Nothing Special   »   [go: up one dir, main page]

US20140073761A1 - Conjugates containing hydrophilic spacer linkers - Google Patents

Conjugates containing hydrophilic spacer linkers Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20140073761A1
US20140073761A1 US13/785,542 US201313785542A US2014073761A1 US 20140073761 A1 US20140073761 A1 US 20140073761A1 US 201313785542 A US201313785542 A US 201313785542A US 2014073761 A1 US2014073761 A1 US 2014073761A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
linker
linkers
acid
releasable
drug
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
US13/785,542
Inventor
Christopher P. Leamon
Iontcho R. Vlahov
Hari Krishna R. Santhapuram
Paul J. Kleindl
Kevin Yu Wang
Fei You
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Endocyte Inc
Original Assignee
Endocyte Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Endocyte Inc filed Critical Endocyte Inc
Priority to US13/785,542 priority Critical patent/US20140073761A1/en
Publication of US20140073761A1 publication Critical patent/US20140073761A1/en
Pending legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • A61K47/4813—
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K9/00—Peptides having up to 20 amino acids, containing saccharide radicals and having a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K9/001—Peptides having up to 20 amino acids, containing saccharide radicals and having a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof the peptide sequence having less than 12 amino acids and not being part of a ring structure
    • C07K9/003—Peptides being substituted by heterocyclic radicals, e.g. bleomycin, phleomycin
    • A61K47/48338—
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
    • A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
    • A61K47/51—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
    • A61K47/54—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an organic compound
    • A61K47/545—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
    • A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
    • A61K47/51—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
    • A61K47/56—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an organic macromolecular compound, e.g. an oligomeric, polymeric or dendrimeric molecule
    • A61K47/59—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an organic macromolecular compound, e.g. an oligomeric, polymeric or dendrimeric molecule obtained otherwise than by reactions only involving carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds, e.g. polyureas or polyurethanes
    • A61K47/60—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an organic macromolecular compound, e.g. an oligomeric, polymeric or dendrimeric molecule obtained otherwise than by reactions only involving carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds, e.g. polyureas or polyurethanes the organic macromolecular compound being a polyoxyalkylene oligomer, polymer or dendrimer, e.g. PEG, PPG, PEO or polyglycerol
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
    • A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
    • A61K47/51—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
    • A61K47/62—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being a protein, peptide or polyamino acid
    • A61K47/65—Peptidic linkers, binders or spacers, e.g. peptidic enzyme-labile linkers
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/04—Antibacterial agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/10—Antimycotics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/12—Antivirals
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P33/00—Antiparasitic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P33/00—Antiparasitic agents
    • A61P33/02—Antiprotozoals, e.g. for leishmaniasis, trichomoniasis, toxoplasmosis
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P33/00—Antiparasitic agents
    • A61P33/02—Antiprotozoals, e.g. for leishmaniasis, trichomoniasis, toxoplasmosis
    • A61P33/04—Amoebicides
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P33/00—Antiparasitic agents
    • A61P33/10—Anthelmintics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00—Antineoplastic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00—Antineoplastic agents
    • A61P35/02—Antineoplastic agents specific for leukemia
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07H—SUGARS; DERIVATIVES THEREOF; NUCLEOSIDES; NUCLEOTIDES; NUCLEIC ACIDS
    • C07H15/00—Compounds containing hydrocarbon or substituted hydrocarbon radicals directly attached to hetero atoms of saccharide radicals
    • C07H15/20—Carbocyclic rings
    • C07H15/24—Condensed ring systems having three or more rings

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to compositions and methods for use in targeted drug delivery. More particularly, the invention is directed to cell-surface receptor binding drug delivery conjugates containing hydrophilic spacer linkers for use in treating disease states caused by pathogenic cell populations and to methods and pharmaceutical compositions that use and include such conjugates.
  • the mammalian immune system provides a means for the recognition and elimination of tumor cells, other pathogenic cells, and invading foreign pathogens. While the immune system normally provides a strong line of defense, there are many instances where cancer cells, other pathogenic cells, or infectious agents evade a host immune response and proliferate or persist with concomitant host pathogenicity. Chemotherapeutic agents and radiation therapies have been developed to eliminate, for example, replicating neoplasms. However, many of the currently available chemotherapeutic agents and radiation therapy regimens have adverse side effects because they work not only to destroy pathogenic cells, but they also affect normal host cells, such as cells of the hematopoietic system. The adverse side effects of these anticancer drugs highlight the need for the development of new therapies selective for pathogenic cell populations and with reduced host toxicity.
  • Another approach for targeting populations of pathogenic cells, such as cancer cells or foreign pathogens, in a host is to enhance the host immune response against the pathogenic cells to avoid the need for administration of compounds that may also exhibit independent host toxicity.
  • One reported strategy for immunotherapy is to bind antibodies, for example, genetically engineered multimeric antibodies, to the surface of tumor cells to display the constant region of the antibodies on the cell surface and thereby induce tumor cell killing by various immune-system mediated processes (De Vita, V. T., Biologic Therapy of Cancer, 2d ed. Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1995; Soulillou, J. P., U.S. Pat. No. 5,672,486).
  • these approaches have been complicated by the difficulties in defining tumor-specific antigens. Accordingly, additional compounds and methods are needed for selectively targeting pathogenic cell populations.
  • conjugates of compounds are described that include a hydrophilic spacer linker.
  • conjugates of compounds are described that include both a hydrophilic spacer linker and a targeting ligand.
  • Illustrative of such conjugates are compounds of the following formula described herein
  • B is a receptor binding ligand that binds to a target cell receptor
  • L is a linker that comprises one or more hydrophilic spacer linkers
  • A is a diagnostic, therapeutic, or imaging agent that is desirably delivered to the cell.
  • non-receptor binding targeted compounds of the following formula are described herein:
  • L is a linker that comprises one or more hydrophilic spacer linkers and A is diagnostic, therapeutic, or imaging agent.
  • the linker L does not include a releasable linker.
  • the linker L includes a releasable linker.
  • at least one of the hydrophilic spacer linkers is formed from or includes at least one carbohydrate.
  • the carbohydrate forms part of the linker chain connecting B and A.
  • the carbohydrate forms part of a side chain attached to the linker chain connecting B and A.
  • more than one receptor binding ligand B may be attached to the linkers described herein. It is further appreciated that more than one agent A may be attached to the linkers described herein.
  • Such multi-ligand and/or multi-drug conjugates are also described herein, where the linker comprises a hydrophilic spacer linker.
  • compounds are described herein that have reduced uptake by the liver and are less likely to be cleared by the liver.
  • such compounds are preferentially cleared by the renal processes as compared to hepatic processes.
  • the agent or agents A include therapeutic drugs, diagnostic agents, imaging agents, and any other compound that is desirably or advantageously delivered to a cell by targeting a cell receptor.
  • Illustrative drugs include cytotoxic drugs, anti-inflammatory agents, and the like.
  • Illustrative diagnostic agents and imaging agents include PET imaging agents, fluorescent imaging agents, radioligands, radioligand complexing agents, and others.
  • the cells that may be targeted with the therapeutic, diagnostic, and/or imaging agents A include a wide variety, such as but not limited to cancer cells, bacterial cells, tumor cells, monocytes, activated macrophages, progenitor cells, such as endothelial progenitor cells, other inflammatory cells, atherosclerotic plaques, infections, and others.
  • the targeting of the cell is accomplished by the appropriate selection of a cell receptor binding ligand B. It is appreciated that selective or specific targeting of a cell in vivo may be accomplished by selecting a receptor that is preferentially expressed or overexpressed by the target cell.
  • the target cell preferentially expresses or overexpresses a vitamin receptor, such as folate receptors.
  • conjugates described herein are included in pharmaceutical compositions in amounts effective to treat diseases and disease states associated with pathogenic populations of cells.
  • conjugates described herein, and pharmaceutical compositions containing them are used in methods for treating diseases and disease states associated with pathogenic populations of cells.
  • FIG. 1 shows the relative binding affinity of EC234, DPM for folic acid ( ⁇ ) and EC0234 ( ⁇ ).
  • FIG. 2 shows the activity of EC0258 against KB cells (2 h pulse/72 h chase) for EC258 ( ⁇ ) and EC258+excess folic acid ( ⁇ ).
  • FIG. 3A shows the effect of EC0234 and EC0246 against M109 tumors in mice, untreated controls ( ⁇ ), EC145 standard (TIW 3 ⁇ mol/kg, 3 wks) ( ⁇ ), EC0234 (TIW 3 ⁇ mol/kg, 3 wks) ( ⁇ ), and EC0246 (TIW 3 ⁇ mol/kg, 3 wks) ( ⁇ ).
  • FIG. 3B shows the effect of EC0234 and EC0246 on percentage body weight change, untreated controls ( ⁇ ), EC145 standard (TIW 3 ⁇ mol/kg, 3 wks) ( ⁇ ), EC0234 (TIW 3 ⁇ mol/kg, 3 wks) ( ⁇ ), and EC0246 (TIW 3 ⁇ mol/kg, 3 wks) ( ⁇ ); indicating that no gross toxicity was observed during treatment.
  • FIG. 4A shows the effect on KB tumor volume in mice of EC0396 ( ⁇ ), EC145 ( ⁇ ) and PBS control ( ⁇ ) dosed at 2 ⁇ mol/kg TIW for two weeks (the vertical line indicates the last dosing day).
  • FIG. 4B shows the effect on percentage body weight change of EC0396 ( ⁇ ), EC145 ( ⁇ ) and PBS control ( ⁇ ) dosed at 2 ⁇ mol/kg TIW for two weeks (the vertical line indicates the last closing day); indicating that no gross toxicity was observed during treatment.
  • FIG. 5A shows the effect on KB tumor volume of EC0400 ( ⁇ ), EC145 ( ⁇ ) and PBS control ( ⁇ ) dosed at 2 ⁇ mol/kg TIW for two weeks (the vertical line indicates the last dosing day).
  • FIG. 5B shows the effect on percentage body weight change of EC0400 ( ⁇ ), EC145 ( ⁇ ) and PBS control ( ⁇ ) dosed at 2 ⁇ mol/kg TIW for two weeks (the vertical line indicates the last dosing day); indicating that no gross toxicity was observed during treatment.
  • FIG. 6A shows the effect on tumor volume of EC0429 ( ⁇ ) and EC145 ( ⁇ ), dosed at 2 ⁇ mol/kg TIW for two weeks (the vertical line indicates the last dosing day) compared to untreated controls ( ⁇ ) for M109 tumors in Balb/c mice.
  • FIG. 6B shows the effect on percentage body weight change EC0429 ( ⁇ ) and EC145 ( ⁇ ), dosed at 2 ⁇ mol/kg TIW for two weeks (the vertical line indicates the last dosing day) compared to untreated controls ( ⁇ ); indicating that no gross toxicity was observed during treatment.
  • FIG. 7A shows the effect on tumor volume of EC0434 ( ⁇ ) and EC145 ( ⁇ ), dosed at 2 ⁇ mol/kg TIW for two weeks (the vertical line indicates the last dosing day) compared to untreated controls ( ⁇ ) for s.c. M109 tumors in Balb/c mice.
  • FIG. 7B shows the effect on percentage body weight change of EC0434 ( ⁇ ) and EC145 ( ⁇ ), dosed at 2 ⁇ mol/kg TIW for two weeks (the vertical line indicates the last dosing day) compared to untreated controls ( ⁇ ); indicating that no gross toxicity was observed during treatment.
  • FIG. 8A shows the effect on tumor volume of EC0305 (s), EC0436 ( ⁇ ) and PBS control ( ⁇ ) dosed at 2 ⁇ mol/kg TIW for two weeks (the vertical line indicates the last dosing day) for s.c. M109 tumors in Balb/c mice.
  • FIG. 8B shows the effect on percentage body weight change of EC0305 ( ⁇ ), EC0436 ( ⁇ ) and PBS control ( ⁇ ) dosed at 2 ⁇ mol/kg TIW for two weeks (the vertical line indicates the last dosing day); indicating that no gross toxicity was observed during treatment.
  • FIG. 9 shows the percentage body weight change of Balb/c mice having s.c. M109 tumors treated intravenously three times in a week for one week with PBS (untreated controls) ( ⁇ ), EC0436 (TIW 2 ⁇ mol/kg) ( ⁇ ), EC0436 (TIW 2.5 ⁇ mol/kg) ( ⁇ ), EC0436 (TIW 3 ⁇ mol/kg) ( ⁇ ), EC0305 (TIW 2 ⁇ mol/kg) ( ⁇ ), EC0305 (TIW 2.5 ⁇ mol/kg) ( ⁇ ), and EC0305 (TIW 3 ⁇ mol/kg) ( ⁇ ).
  • FIG. 10A shows the effect on s.c. KB tumors in nu/nu mice by EC0565 at 3 ⁇ mol/kg (qdx5 for two weeks) ( ⁇ ), compared to PBS treated controls ( ⁇ ). From the data, a Log Cell Kill (LCK) value of 1.2 can be determined (values greater than about 0.7 are indicative of an active anti-cancer compound).
  • LCK Log Cell Kill
  • FIG. 10B shows the effect on on percentage body weight change by EC0565 at 3 ⁇ mol/kg (qdx5 for two weeks) ( ⁇ ), compared to PBS treated controls ( ⁇ ); indicating that no gross toxicity was observed during treatment.
  • FIG. 11 shows the total DAVLBH biliary excretion from various DAVLBH conjugates at 2 ⁇ mol/kg i.v. bolus in a hepatobiliary excretion in bile duct assay in cannulated rats.
  • FIG. 12 shows the effect of ribose-based spacers on bile clearance and the impact of extended derivatization.
  • the numbers above bars correspond to the number of hydrophilic spacers in the linker.
  • FIG. 14 shows the cytotoxicity of bortezomib versus the methylthiol bortezomib derivative (EC0501).
  • FIG. 15 shows that hydrophilic spacer linkers enable specific activity of mono- and bis-thio-velcade folate conjugates against RAW264.7 cells.
  • FIG. 16 shows cell viability (5 h pulse/72 h chase) (XTT) after treatment with EC0595 (13 nM IC50) (V), EC0595 plus excess folic acid ( ⁇ ), bortezomib ( ⁇ ), EC0525 (46 nM IC50) ( ⁇ ), EC0525 plus excess folic acid ( ⁇ ).
  • FIG. 17 shows cell viability after a 24 h incubation (XTT) with bortezomib ( ⁇ ), EC0587 ( ⁇ ), EC0587 plus excess folic acid ( ⁇ ).
  • FIG. 18 shows inhibition of LPS stimulated proteosome activity in RAW 264.7 cells (5 h pulse/24 h chase), LPS 100 ng/mL, 30 m 20S proteosome/substrate reaction time by bortezomib ( ⁇ ), EC0522 ( ⁇ ), EC0522 plus excess folic acid ( ⁇ ), EC0525 ( ⁇ ), EC0525 plus excess folic acid ( ⁇ ), EC0595 ( ⁇ ), EC0595 plus excess folic acid ( ⁇ ); IC 50 is ca. 30 nM for EC0595 and EC0525.
  • FIG. 19 shows activity against RAW cells (5 h pulse/72 h chase) after treatment with ⁇ -amantin ( ⁇ ), EC0592 (IC 50 3.7 nM) ( ⁇ ), EC0592 plus excess folic acid ( ⁇ ).
  • Drug delivery conjugates consisting of a receptor binding ligand (B), a polyvalent linker (L) comprising one or more hydrophilic spacer linkers, and a diagnostic, therapeutic, or imaging agent (A) that is desirably delivered to a cell.
  • the binding ligand (B) is covalently attached to the polyvalent linker (L), and the diagnostic, therapeutic, or imaging agent (A), or analog or derivative thereof, is also covalently attached to the polyvalent linker (L).
  • the diagnostic, therapeutic, or imaging agent (A) includes analogs and derivatives thereof that are attached to the linker (L).
  • the polyvalent linker (L) comprises one or more spacer linkers and/or releasable linkers, and combinations thereof, in any order.
  • releasable linkers, and optional spacer linkers are covalently bonded to each other to form the linker.
  • a releasable linker is directly attached to the agent (A), or analog or derivative thereof.
  • a releasable linker is directly attached to the binding ligand.
  • either or both the binding ligand and the agent (A), or analog or derivative thereof is attached to a releasable linker through one or more spacer linkers.
  • each of the binding ligand and the agent (A), or analog or derivative thereof is attached to a releasable linker, each of which may be directly attached to each other, or covalently attached through one or more spacer linkers.
  • the arrangement of the binding ligand, and the agent (A), or analog or derivative thereof, and the various releasable and optional spacer linkers may be varied widely.
  • the binding ligand, and the agent (A), or analog or derivative thereof, and the various releasable and optional spacer linkers are attached to each other through heteroatoms, such as nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, phosphorus, silicon, and the like.
  • the heteroatoms, excluding oxygen may be in various states of oxidation, such as N(OH), S(O), S(O) 2 , P(O), P(O) 2 , P(O) 3 , and the like.
  • the heteroatoms may be grouped to form divalent radicals, such as for example hydroxylamines, hydrazines, hydrazones, sulfonates, phosphinates, phosphonates, and the like, including radicals of the formulae —(NHR 1 NHR 2 )—, —SO—, —(SO 2 )—, and —N(R 3 )O—, wherein R 1 , R 2 , and R 3 are each independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, substituted aryl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, and alkoxyalkyl.
  • divalent radicals such as for example hydroxylamines, hydrazines, hydrazones, sulfonates, phosphinates, phosphonates, and the like, including radicals of the formulae —(NHR 1 NHR 2 )—, —SO—, —(SO 2
  • more than one binding ligand is attached to the polyvalent linker. In another variation, more than one agent (A) is attached to the polyvalent linker. In another variation, more than one binding ligand and more than one agent (A) is attached to the polyvalent linker.
  • the receptor binding ligand is a vitamin receptor binding ligand such as a vitamin, or an analog or a derivative thereof, capable of binding to vitamin receptors.
  • the binding ligand is a vitamin, or analog or derivative thereof, attached to a releasable linker which is attached to the drug through a linker that is formed from one or more spacer linkers and/or releasable linkers and/or hydrophilic spacer linkers.
  • both the drug and the vitamin, or analog or derivative thereof can each be attached to spacer linkers, where the spacer linkers are attached to each other through one or more releasable linkers.
  • both the drug and the vitamin, or analog or derivative thereof can each be attached to one or more releasable linkers, where the releasable linkers are attached to each other or through a spacer linker.
  • Each of these radicals may be connected through existing or additional heteroatoms on the binding ligand, agent A, or releasable, hydrophilic spacer, or additional spacer linker.
  • the binding site for the binding ligand (B) can include receptors for any binding ligand (B), or a derivative or analog thereof, capable of specifically binding to a receptor wherein the receptor or other protein is uniquely expressed, overexpressed, or preferentially expressed by a population of pathogenic cells.
  • a surface-presented protein uniquely expressed, overexpressed, or preferentially expressed by the pathogenic cells is typically a receptor that is either not present or present at lower concentrations on non-pathogenic cells providing a means for selective elimination, labeling or diagnosis of the pathogenic cells.
  • the binding ligand drug delivery conjugates may be capable of high affinity binding to receptors on cancer cells or other types of pathogenic cells.
  • the high affinity binding can be inherent to the binding ligand or the binding affinity can be enhanced by the use of a chemically modified ligand (e.g., an analog or a derivative of a vitamin).
  • the binding ligand drug delivery conjugates described herein can be formed from, for example, a wide variety of vitamins or receptor-binding vitamin analogs/derivatives, linkers, and drugs.
  • the binding ligand drug delivery conjugates described herein are capable of selectively targeting a population of pathogenic cells in the host animal due to preferential expression of a receptor for the binding ligand, such as a vitamin, accessible for ligand binding, on the pathogenic cells.
  • Illustrative vitamin moieties that can be used as the binding ligand (B) include carnitine, inositol, lipoic acid, pyridoxal, ascorbic acid, niacin, pantothenic acid, folic acid, riboflavin, thiamine, biotin, vitamin B 12 , other water soluble vitamins, the B vitamins, and the lipid soluble vitamins A, D, E and K. These vitamins, and their receptor-binding analogs and derivatives, constitute an illustrative targeting entity that can be coupled with the drug by a bivalent linker (L) to form a binding ligand (B) drug delivery conjugate as described herein.
  • L bivalent linker
  • vitamin is understood to include vitamin analogs and/or derivatives, unless otherwise indicated.
  • pteroic acid which is a derivative of folate
  • biotin analogs such as biocytin, biotin sulfoxide, oxybiotin and other biotin receptor-binding compounds, and the like, are considered to be vitamins, vitamin analogs, and vitamin derivatives.
  • vitamin analogs or derivatives as described herein refer to vitamins that incorporates an heteroatom through which the vitamin analog or derivative is covalently bound to the bivalent linker (L).
  • Illustrative vitamin moieties include folic acid, biotin, riboflavin, thiamine, vitamin B 12 , and receptor-binding analogs and derivatives of these vitamin molecules, and other related vitamin receptor binding molecules.
  • the cell receptor is a folate receptor
  • the targeting ligand B is a folate receptor binding ligand.
  • B is a folate, such as folic acid, or an analog or derivative of folic acid that binds to folic acid receptors. It is to be understood as used herein, that the term folate is used both individually and collectively to refer to folic acid itself, and/or to such analogs and derivatives of folic acid that are capable of binding to folate receptors.
  • B is a compound capable of selectively or specifically binding to a folate receptor, such as an antibody.
  • Illustrative embodiments of folate analogs and/or derivatives include folinic acid, pteropolyglutamic acid, and folate receptor-binding pteridines such as tetrahydropterins, dihydrofolates, tetrahydrofolates, and their deaza and dideaza analogs.
  • the terms “deaza” and “dideaza” analogs refer to the art-recognized analogs having a carbon atom substituted for one or two nitrogen atoms in the naturally occurring folic acid structure, or analog or derivative thereof.
  • the deaza analogs include the 1-deaza, 3-deaza, 5-deaza, 8-deaza, and 10-deaza analogs of folate.
  • the dideaza analogs include, for example, 1,5-dideaza, 5,10-dideaza, 8,10-dideaza, and 5,8-dideaza analogs of folate.
  • Other folates useful as complex forming ligands include the folate receptor-binding analogs aminopterin, amethopterin (methotrexate), N 10 -methylfolate, 2-deamino-hydroxyfolate, deaza analogs such as 1-deazamethopterin or 3-deazamethopterin, and 3′,5′-dichloro-4-amino-4-deoxy-N 10 -methylpteroylglutamic acid (dichloromethotrexate).
  • folic acid analogs and/or derivatives are conventionally termed folates, reflecting their ability to bind with folate-receptors, and such ligands when conjugated with exogenous molecules are effective to enhance transmembrane transport, such as via folate-mediated endocytosis as described herein.
  • Other suitable binding ligands capable of binding to folate receptors to initiate receptor mediated endocytotic transport of the complex include antibodies to the folate receptor.
  • An exogenous molecule in complex with an antibody to a folate receptor is used to trigger transmembrane transport of the complex.
  • X and Y are each-independently selected from the group consisting of halo, R 2 , OR 2 , SR 3 , and NR 4 R 5 ;
  • U, V, and W represent divalent moieties each independently selected from the group consisting of —(R 6a )C ⁇ , —N ⁇ , —(R 6a )C(R 7a )—, and —N(R 4a )—;
  • Q is selected from the group consisting of C and CH;
  • T is selected from the group consisting of S, O, N, and —C ⁇ C—;
  • a 1 and A 2 are each independently selected from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur, —C(Z)—, —C(Z)O—, —OC(Z)—, —N(R 4b )—, —C(Z)N(R 4b )—, —N(R 4b )C(Z)—, —OC(Z)N(R 4b )—, —N(R 4b )C(Z)O—, —N(R 4b )C(Z)N(R 5b )—, —S(O)—, —S(O) 2 —, —N(R 4a )S(O) 2 —, —C(R 6b )(R 7b )—, —N(C ⁇ CH)—, —N(CH 2 C ⁇ CH)—, C 1 -C 12 alkylene, and C 1 -C 12 alkyeneoxy, where Z is oxygen or sulfur;
  • R 1 is selected-from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, C 1 -C 12 alkyl, and C 1 -C 12 alkoxy;
  • R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 4a , R 4b , R 5 , R 5b , R 6b and R 7b are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, C 1 -C 12 alkyl, C 1 -C 12 alkoxy, C 1 -C 12 alkanoyl, C 1 -C 12 alkenyl, C 1 -C 12 alkynyl, (C 1 -C 12 alkoxy)carbonyl, and (C 1 -C 12 alkylamino)carbonyl;
  • R 6 and R 7 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, C 1 -C 12 alkyl, and C 1 -C 12 alkoxy; or, R 6 and R 7 are taken together to form a carbonyl group;
  • R 6a and R 7a are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, C 1 -C 12 alkyl, and C 1 -C 12 alkoxy; or R 6a and R 7a are taken together to form a carbonyl group;
  • L is a divalent linker as described herein;
  • n, p, r, s and t are each independently either 0 or 1.
  • folate refers both individually to folic acid used in forming a conjugate, or alternatively to a folate analog or derivative thereof that is capable of binding to folate or folic acid receptors.
  • n and r are 1, and linker L a is a naturally occurring amino acid covalently linked to A 2 at its alpha-amino group through an amide bond.
  • Illustrative amino acids include aspartic acid, glutamic acid, lysine, cysteine, and the like.
  • the vitamin can be folate which includes a nitrogen
  • the spacer linkers can be alkylenecarbonyl, cycloalkylenecarbonyl, carbonylalkylcarbonyl, 1-alkylenesuccinimid-3-yl, 1-(carbonylalkyl)succinimid-3-yl, wherein each of the spacer linkers is optionally substituted with a substituent X 1 , and the spacer linker is bonded to the folate nitrogen to form an imide or an alkylamide.
  • the substituents X 1 can be alkyl, hydroxyalkyl, amino, aminoalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, sulfhydrylalkyl, alkylthioalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, guanidinoalkyl, R 4 -carbonyl, R 5 -carbonylalkyl, R 6 -acylamino, and R 7 -acylaminoalkyl, wherein R 4 and R 5 are each independently selected from amino acids, amino acid derivatives, and peptides, and wherein R 6 and R 7 are each independently selected from amino acids, amino acid derivatives, and peptides.
  • vitamin analogs and/or derivatives also include analogs and derivatives of biotin such as biocytin, biotin sulfoxide, oxybiotin and other biotin receptor-binding compounds, and the like. It is appreciated that analogs and derivatives of the other vitamins described herein are also contemplated herein.
  • vitamins that can be used as the binding ligand (B) in the drug delivery conjugates described herein include those that bind to vitamin receptors expressed specifically on activated macrophages, such as the folate receptor, which binds folate, or an analog or derivative thereof as described herein.
  • binding ligands may be coupled with the drugs and linkers described and contemplated herein to form binding ligand-linker-drug conjugates capable of facilitating delivery of the drug to a desired target.
  • binding ligands in addition to the vitamins and their analogs and derivatives described, may be used to form drug delivery conjugates capable of binding to target cells.
  • any binding ligand (B) of a cell surface receptor may be advantageously used as a targeting ligand to which a linker-drug conjugate can be attached.
  • Illustrative other ligands described herein include peptide ligands identified from library screens, tumor cell-specific peptides, tumor cell-specific aptamers, tumor cell-specific carbohydrates, tumor cell-specific monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies, Fab or scFv (i.e., a single chain variable region) fragments of antibodies such as, for example, an Fab fragment of an antibody directed to EphA2 or other proteins specifically expressed or uniquely accessible on metastatic cancer cells, small organic molecules derived from combinatorial libraries, growth factors, such as EGF, FGF, insulin, and insulin-like growth factors, and homologous polypeptides, somatostatin and its analogs, transferrin, lipoprotein complexes, bile salts, selectins, steroid hormones, Arg-Gly-Asp containing peptides, retinoids, various Galectins, ⁇ -opioid receptor ligands, cholecystokinin A receptor ligands
  • EphA2 extracellular epitopes of a member of the Ephrin family of proteins, such as EphA2.
  • EphA2 expression is restricted to cell-cell junctions in normal cells, but EphA2 is distributed over the entire cell surface in metastatic tumor cells.
  • EphA2 on metastatic cells would be accessible for binding to, for example, an Fab fragment of an antibody conjugated to a drug, whereas the protein would not be accessible for binding to the Fab fragment on normal cells, resulting in a binding ligand-drug conjugate specific for metastatic cancer cells.
  • the linker L includes one or more hydrophilic spacer linkers.
  • other optional spacer linkers and/or releasable linkers may be included in L.
  • additional spacer linkers may be included when predetermined lengths are selected for separating binding ligand B from agent A.
  • releasable linkers may be included.
  • the targeted ligand conjugates may be used to deliver drugs for treating cancer or other diseases involving pathogenic cells.
  • the drug is desirably released from the conjugate.
  • the conjugate may bind to a folate receptor. Once bound, the conjugate often undergoes the process of endocytosis, and the conjugate is delivered to the interior of the cell.
  • Cellular mechanisms may biologically degrade the conjugate to release the drug “payload” and release the folate compound.
  • the targeted conjugate may be used in immunotherapy.
  • a releasable linker is generally not included.
  • conjugates of folate or other vitamin receptor binding compounds and immunogens once delivered, will bind to the appropriated receptor and decorate or mark the cell with the antigenic payload.
  • the targeted conjugate may be used in a diagnostic therapy.
  • a releasable linker may or may not be included.
  • conjugates that include imaging agents may be delivered to a target cell using the appropriate cell receptor binding ligand, such as a folate or other vitamin receptor binding compound.
  • the conjugate may remain on the surface of the cell for imaging.
  • the conjugate may undergo endocytosis into the interior of the cell. In this latter situation, a releasable linker may be included.
  • conjugates B-L-A described herein also include the following general formulae:
  • L R is a releasable linker section
  • L S is a spacer linker section
  • L H is a hydrophilic linker section of linker L.
  • conjugates L-A described herein also include the following general formulae:
  • L and A are as described herein, and L R is a releasable linker section, L S is a spacer linker section, and L H is a hydrophilic linker section of linker L.
  • L R is a releasable linker section
  • L S is a spacer linker section
  • L H is a hydrophilic linker section of linker L.
  • the arrangement and/or orientation of the various hydrophilic linkers may be in a linear or branched fashion, or both.
  • the hydrophilic linkers may form the backbone of the linker forming the conjugate between the folate and the drug, imagining agent, or diagnostic agent.
  • the hydrophilic portion of the linker may be pendant to or attached to the backbone of the chain of atoms connecting the binding ligand B to the agent A. In this latter arrangement, the hydrophilic portion may be proximal or distal to the backbone chain of atoms.
  • the linker is more or less linear, and the hydrophilic groups are arranged largely in a series to form a chain-like linker in the conjugate. Said another way, the hydrophilic groups form some or all of the backbone of the linker in this linear embodiment.
  • the linker is branched with hydrophilic groups.
  • the hydrophilic groups may be proximal to the backbone or distal to the backbone.
  • the linker is more spherical or cylindrical in shape.
  • the linker is shaped like a bottle-brush.
  • the backbone of the linker is formed by a linear series of amides
  • the hydrophilic portion of the linker is formed by a parallel arrangement of branching side chains, such as by connecting monosaccharides, sulfonates, and the like, and derivatives and analogs thereof.
  • the linker may be neutral or ionizable under certain conditions, such as physiological conditions encountered in vivo.
  • the linker may deprotonate to form a negative ion, or alternatively become protonated to form a positive ion. It is appreciated that more than one deprotonation or protonation event may occur.
  • the same linker may deprotonate and protonate to form inner salts or zwitterionic compounds.
  • the hydrophilic spacer linkers are neutral, i.e. under physiological conditions, the linkers do not significantly protonate nor deprotonate.
  • the hydrophilic spacer linkers may be protonated to carry one or more positive charges. It is understood that the protonation capability is condition dependent. In one aspect, the conditions are physiological conditions, and the linker is protonated in vivo.
  • the spacers include both regions that are neutral and regions that may be protonated to carry one or more positive charges. In another embodiment, the spacers include both regions that may be deprotonated to carry one or more negative charges and regions that may be protonated to carry one or more positive charges. It is understood that in this latter embodiment that zwitterions or inner salts may be formed.
  • the regions of the linkers that may be deprotonated to carry a negative charge include carboxylic acids, such as aspartic acid, glutamic acid, and longer chain carboxylic acid groups, and sulfuric acid esters, such as alkyl esters of sulfuric acid.
  • the regions of the linkers that may be protonated to carry a positive charge include amino groups, such as polyaminoalkylenes including ethylene diamines, propylene diamines, butylene diamines and the like, and/or heterocycles including pyrollidines, piperidines, piperazines, and other amino groups, each of which is optionally substituted.
  • the regions of the linkers that are neutral include poly hydroxyl groups, such as sugars, carbohydrates, saccharides, inositols, and the like, and/or polyether groups, such as polyoxyalkylene groups including polyoxyethylene, polyoxypropylene, and the like.
  • the hydrophilic spacer linkers described herein include are formed primarily from carbon, hydrogen, and oxygen, and have a carbon/oxygen ratio of about 3:1 or less, or of about 2:1 or less.
  • the hydrophilic linkers described herein include a plurality of ether functional groups.
  • the hydrophilic linkers described herein include a plurality of hydroxyl functional groups.
  • Illustrative fragments that may be used to form such linkers include polyhydroxyl compounds such as carbohydrates, polyether compounds such as polyethylene glycol units, and acid groups such as carboxyl and alkyl sulfuric acids.
  • oligoamide spacers, and the like may also be included in the linker.
  • Illustrative carbohydrate spacers include saccharopeptides as described herein that include both a peptide feature and sugar feature; glucuronides, which may be incorporated via [2+3] Huisgen cyclization, also known as click chemistry; ⁇ -alkyl glycosides, such as of 2-deoxyhexapyranoses (2-deoxyglucose, 2-deoxyglucuronide, and the like), and ⁇ -alkyl mannopyranosides.
  • Illustrative PEG groups include those of a specific length range from about 4 to about 20 PEG groups.
  • Illustrative alkyl sulfuric acid esters may also be introduced with click chemistry directly into the backbone.
  • Illustrative oligoamide spacers include EDTA and DTPA spacers, ⁇ -amino acids, and the like.
  • hydrophilic spacer linkers described herein include a polyether, such as the linkers of the following formulae:
  • m is an integer independently selected in each instance from 1 to about 8; p is an integer selected 1 to about 10; and n is an integer independently selected in each instance from 1 to about 3.
  • m is independently in each instance 1 to about 3.
  • n is 1 in each instance.
  • p is independently in each instance about 4 to about 6.
  • the corresponding polypropylene polyethers corresponding to the foregoing are contemplated herein and may be included in the conjugates as hydrophilic spacer linkers.
  • mixed polyethylene and polypropylene polyethers may be included in the conjugates as hydrophilic spacer linkers.
  • cyclic variations of the foregoing polyether compounds such as those that include tetrahydrofuranyl, 1,3-dioxanes, 1,4-dioxanes, and the like are contemplated herein.
  • the hydrophilic spacer linkers described herein include a plurality of hydroxyl functional groups, such as linkers that incorporate monosaccharides, oligosaccharides, polysaccharides, and the like. It is to be understood that the polyhydroxyl containing spacer linkers comprises a plurality of —(CROH)— groups, where R is hydrogen or alkyl.
  • the spacer linkers include one or more of the following fragments:
  • R is H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, or arylalkyl; m is an integer from 1 to about 3; n is an integer from 1 to about 5, p is an integer from 1 to about 5, and r is an integer selected from 1 to about 3. In one aspect, the integer n is 3 or 4. In another aspect, the integer p is 3 or 4. In another aspect, the integer r is 1.
  • the spacer linker includes one or more of the following cyclic polyhydroxyl groups:
  • n is an integer from 2 to about 5
  • p is an integer from 1 to about 5
  • r is an integer from 1 to about 4.
  • the integer n is 3 or 4.
  • the integer p is 3 or 4.
  • the integer r is 2 or 3.
  • the section may be derived from ribose, xylose, glucose, mannose, galactose, or other sugar and retain the stereochemical arrangements of pendant hydroxyl and alkyl groups present on those molecules.
  • various deoxy compounds are also contemplated, Illustratively, compounds of the following formulae are contemplated:
  • n is equal to or less than r, such as when r is 2 or 3, n is 1 or 2, or 1, 2, or 3, respectively.
  • the spacer linker includes a polyhydroxyl compound of the following formula:
  • the spacer linker includes one or more polyhydroxyl compounds of the following formulae:
  • the section may be derived from ribose, xylose, glucose, mannose, galactose, or other sugar and retain the stereochemical arrangements of pendant hydroxyl and alkyl groups present on those molecules.
  • the hydrophilic linkers L described herein include polyhydroxyl groups that are spaced away from the backbone of the linker.
  • such carbohydrate groups or polyhydroxyl groups are connected to the back bone by a triazole group, forming triazole-linked hydrophilic spacer linkers.
  • such linkers include fragments of the following formulae:
  • n, m, and r are integers and are each independently selected in each instance from 1 to about 5.
  • m is independently 2 or 3 in each instance.
  • r is 1 in each instance.
  • n is 1 in each instance.
  • the group connecting the polyhydroxyl group to the backbone of the linker is a different heteroaryl group, including but not limited to, pyrrole, pyrazole, 1,2,4-triazole, furan, oxazole, isoxazole, thienyl, thiazole, isothiazole, oxadiazole, and the like.
  • divalent 6-membered ring heteroaryl groups are contemplated.
  • Other variations of the foregoing illustrative hydrophilic spacer linkers include oxyalkylene groups, such as the following formulae:
  • n and r are integers and are each independently selected in each instance from 1 to about 5; and p is an integer selected from 1 to about 4.
  • such carbohydrate groups or polyhydroxyl groups are connected to the back bone by an amide group, forming amide-linked hydrophilic spacer linkers,
  • linkers include fragments of the following formulae:
  • n is an integer selected from 1 to about 3, and m is an integer selected from 1 to about 22.
  • n is 1 or 2.
  • m is selected from about 6 to about 10, illustratively 8.
  • the group connecting the polyhydroxyl group to the backbone of the linker is a different functional group, including but not limited to, esters, ureas, carbamates, acylhydrazones, and the like.
  • cyclic variations are contemplated.
  • Other variations of the foregoing illustrative hydrophilic spacer linkers include oxyalkylene groups, such as the following formulae:
  • n and r are integers and are each independently selected in each instance from 1 to about 5; and p is an integer selected from 1 to about 4.
  • the spacer linkers include one or more of the following fragments:
  • R is H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, or arylalkyl; m is an independently selected integer from 1 to about 3; n is an integer from 1 to about 6, p is an integer from 1 to about 5, and r is an integer selected from 1 to about 3. In one variation, the integer n is 3 or 4. In another variation, the integer p is 3 or 4. In another variation, the integer r is 1.
  • the spacer linkers include one or more of the following fragments:
  • n is an integer from 1 to about 6
  • p is an integer from 1 to about 5
  • r is an integer selected from 1 to about 3.
  • the integer n is 3 or 4.
  • the integer p is 3 or 4.
  • the integer r is 1.
  • the spacer linkers include one or more of the following fragments:
  • n is an integer from 1 to about 6
  • p is an integer from 1 to about 5
  • r is an integer selected from 1 to about 3.
  • the integer n is 3 or 4.
  • the integer p is 3 or 4.
  • the integer r is 1.
  • hydrophilic spacer linker is a combination of backbone and branching side motifs such as is illustrated by the following formulae
  • n is an integer independently selected in each instance from 0 to about 3.
  • the above formula are intended to represent 4, 5, 6, and even larger membered cyclic sugars.
  • the above formula may be modified to represent deoxy sugars, where one or more of the hydroxy groups present on the formulae are replaced by hydrogen, alkyl, or amino.
  • the corresponding carbonyl compounds are contemplated by the above formulae, where one or more of the hydroxyl groups is oxidized to the corresponding carbonyl.
  • the pyranose includes both carboxyl and amino functional groups and (a) can be inserted into the backbone and (b) can provide synthetic handles for branching side chains in variations of this embodiment. Any of the pendant hydroxyl groups may be used to attach other chemical fragments, including additional sugars to prepare the corresponding oligosaccharides.
  • Other variations of this embodiment are also contemplated, including inserting the pyranose or other sugar into the backbone at a single carbon, i.e., a spiro arrangement, at a geminal pair of carbons, and like arrangements.
  • one or two ends of the linker, or the agent A, or the binding ligand B may be connected to the sugar to be inserted into the backbone in a 1,1; 1,2; 1,3; 1,4; 2,3, or other arrangement.
  • the hydrophilic spacer linkers described herein include are formed primarily from carbon, hydrogen, and nitrogen, and have a carbon/nitrogen ratio of about 3:1 or less, or of about 2:1 or less. In one aspect, the hydrophilic linkers described herein include a plurality of amino functional groups.
  • the spacer linkers include one or more amino groups of the following formulae:
  • n is an integer independently selected in each instance from 1 to about 3. In one aspect, the integer n is independently 1 or 2 in each instance. In another aspect, the integer n is 1 in each instance.
  • the hydrophilic spacer linker is a sulfuric acid ester, such as an alkyl ester of sulfuric acid.
  • the spacer linker is of the following formula:
  • n is an integer independently selected in each instance from l to about 3.
  • n is independently 1 or 2 in each instance.
  • linkers L there are also included in some cases additional spacer linkers L S , and/or additional releasable linkers L R .
  • Those spacer linker and releasable linkers also may include asymmetric carbon atoms.
  • the stereochemical configurations shown herein are merely illustrative, and other stereochemical configurations are contemplated.
  • the corresponding unnatural amino acid configurations may be included in the conjugated described herein as follows:
  • n is an integer from 2 to about 5
  • p is an integer from 1 to about 5
  • r is an integer from 1 to about 4, as described above.
  • open positions such as (*) atoms are locations for attachment of the binding ligand (B) or the agent (A) to be delivered.
  • attachment of either or both of B and A may be direct or through an intervening linker.
  • Intervening linkers include other spacer linkers and/or releasable linkers. Illustrative additional spacer linkers and releasable linkers that are included in the conjugated described herein are described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/765,335, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • the hydrophilic spacer linker comprises one or more carbohydrate containing or polyhydroxyl group containing linkers. In another embodiment, the hydrophilic spacer linker comprises at least three carbohydrate containing or polyhydroxyl group containing linkers. In another embodiment, the hydrophilic spacer linker comprises one or more carbohydrate containing or polyhydroxyl group containing linkers, and one or more aspartic acids. In another embodiment, the hydrophilic spacer linker comprises one or more carbohydrate containing or polyhydroxyl group containing linkers, and one or more glutamic acids.
  • the hydrophilic spacer linker comprises one or more carbohydrate containing or polyhydroxyl group containing linkers, one or more glutamic acids, one or more aspartic acids, and one or more beta amino alanines.
  • the hydrophilic spacer linker also includes one or more cysteines.
  • the hydrophilic spacer linker also includes at least one arginine.
  • the hydrophilic spacer linker comprises one or more divalent 1,4-piperazines that are included in the chain of atoms connecting at least one of the binding ligands (L) with at least one of the agents (A).
  • the hydrophilic spacer linker includes one or more carbohydrate containing or polyhydroxyl group containing linkers.
  • the hydrophilic spacer linker includes one or more carbohydrate containing or polyhydroxyl group containing linkers and one or more aspartic acids.
  • the hydrophilic spacer linker includes one or more carbohydrate containing or polyhydroxyl group containing linkers and one or more glutamic acids.
  • the hydrophilic spacer linker also includes one or more cysteines. In another series of variations, in each of the foregoing embodiments, the hydrophilic spacer linker also includes at least one arginine.
  • the hydrophilic spacer linker comprises one or more oligoamide hydrophilic spacers, such as but not limited to aminoethylpiperazinylacetamide.
  • the hydrophilic spacer linker comprises one or more triazole linked carbohydrate containing or polyhydroxyl group containing linkers. In another embodiment, the hydrophilic spacer linker comprises one or more amide linked carbohydrate containing or polyhydroxyl group containing linkers. In another embodiment, the hydrophilic spacer linker comprises one or more PEG groups and one or more cysteines. In another embodiment, the hydrophilic spacer linker comprises one or more EDTE derivatives.
  • the additional spacer linker can be 1-alkylenesuccinimid-3-yl, optionally substituted with a substituent X 1 , as defined below, and the releasable linkers can be methylene, 1-alkoxyalkylene, 1-alkoxycycloalkylene, 1-alkoxyalkylenecarbonyl, 1-alkoxycycloalkylenecarbonyl, wherein each of the releasable linkers is optionally substituted with a substituent X 2 , as defined below, and wherein the spacer linker and the releasable linker are each bonded to the spacer linker to form a succinimid-1-ylalkyl acetal or ketal.
  • the additional spacer linkers can be carbonyl, thionocarbonyl, alkylene, cycloalkylene, alkylenecycloalkyl, alkylenecarbonyl, cycloalkylenecarbonyl, carbonylalkylcarbonyl, 1-alkylenesuccinimid-3-yl, 1-(carbonylalkyl)succinimid-3-yl, alkylenesulfoxyl, sulfonylalkyl, alkylenesulfoxylalkyl, alkylenesulfonylalkyl, carbonyltetrahydro-2H-pyranyl, carbonyltetrahydrofuranyl, 1-(carbonyltetrahydro-2H-pyranyl)succinimid-3-yl, and 1-(carbonyltetrahydrofuranyl)succinimid-3-yl, wherein each of the spacer linkers is optionally substituted with a substituent X 1 , as defined below.
  • the spacer linker may include an additional nitrogen, and the spacer linkers can be alkylenecarbonyl, cycloalkylenecarbonyl, carbonylalkylcarbonyl, 1-(carbonylalkyl)succinimid-3-yl, wherein each of the spacer linkers is optionally substituted with a substituent X 1 , as defined below, and the spacer linker is bonded to the nitrogen to form an amide.
  • the spacer linker may include an additional sulfur, and the spacer linkers can be alkylene and cycloalkylene, wherein each of the spacer linkers is optionally substituted with carboxy, and the spacer linker is bonded to the sulfur to form a thiol.
  • the spacer linker can include sulfur, and the spacer linkers can be 1-alkylenesuccinimid-3-yl and 1-(carbonylalkyl)succinimid-3-yl, and the spacer linker is bonded to the sulfur to form a succinimid-3-ylthiol.
  • the additional spacer linker can include nitrogen
  • the releasable linker can be a divalent radical comprising alkyleneaziridin-1-yl, carbonylalkylaziridin-1-yl, sulfoxylalkylaziridin-1-yl, or sulfonylalkylaziridin-1-yl, wherein each of the releasable linkers is optionally substituted with a substituent X 2 , as defined below.
  • the spacer linkers can be carbonyl, thionocarbonyl, alkylenecarbonyl, cycloalkylenecarbonyl, carbonylalkylcarbonyl, 1-(carbonylalkyl)succinimid-3-yl, wherein each of the spacer linkers is optionally substituted with a substituent X 1 , as defined below, and wherein the spacer linker is bonded to the releasable linker to form an aziridine amide.
  • the substituents X 1 can be alkyl, alkoxy, alkoxyalkyl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, amino, aminoalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, halo, haloalkyl, sulfhydrylalkyl, alkylthioalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, alkyl carboxylate, alkyl alkanoate, guanidinoalkyl, R 4 -carbonyl, R 5 -carbonylalkyl, R 6 -acylamino, and R 7 -acylaminoalkyl, wherein R 4 and R 5 are each independently selected from amino acids, amino acid derivatives, and peptides, and wherein R 6 and R 7 are each independently selected from amino acids, amino acid derivatives, and peptides.
  • the releasable linker may be a divalent radical comprising alkyleneaziridin-1-yl, alkylenecarbonylaziridin-1-yl, carbonylalkylaziridin-1-yl, alkylenesulfoxylaziridin-1-yl, sulfoxylalkylaziridin-1-yl, sulfonylalkylaziridin-1-yl, or alkylenesulfonylaziridin-1-yl, wherein each of the releasable linkers is optionally substituted with a substituent X 2 , as defined below.
  • Additional illustrative releasable linkers include methylene, 1-alkoxyalkylene, 1-alkoxycycloalkylene, 1-alkoxyalkylenecarbonyl, 1-alkoxycycloalkylenecarbonyl, carbonylarylcarbonyl, carbonyl(carboxyaryl)carbonyl, carbonyl(biscarboxyaryl)carbonyl, haloalkylenecarbonyl, alkylene(dialkylsilyl), alkylene(alkylarylsilyl), alkylene(diarylsilyl), (dialkylsilyl)aryl, (alkylarylsilyl)aryl, (diarylsilyl)aryl, oxycarbonyloxy, oxycarbonyloxyalkyl, sulfonyloxy, oxysulfonylalkyl, iminoalkylidenyl, carbonylalkylideniminyl, iminocycloalkylidenyl, carbonylcycl
  • the releasable linker may include oxygen, and the releasable linkers can be methylene, 1-alkoxyalkylene, 1-alkoxycycloalkylene, 1-alkoxyalkylenecarbonyl, and 1-alkoxycycloalkylenecarbonyl, wherein each of the releasable linkers is optionally substituted with a substituent X 2 , as defined below, and the releasable linker is bonded to the oxygen to form an acetal or ketal.
  • the releasable linker may include oxygen, and the releasable linker can be methylene, wherein the methylene is substituted with an optionally-substituted aryl, and the releasable linker is bonded to the oxygen to form an acetal or ketal.
  • the releasable linker may include oxygen, and the releasable linker can be sulfonylalkyl, and the releasable linker is bonded to the oxygen to form an alkylsulfonate.
  • the releasable linker may include nitrogen, and the releasable linkers can be iminoalkylidenyl, carbonylalkylideniminyl, iminocycloalkylidenyl, and carbonylcycloalkylideniminyl, wherein each of the releasable linkers is optionally substituted with a substituent X 2 , as defined below, and the releasable linker is bonded to the nitrogen to form an hydrazone.
  • the hydrazone may be acylated with a carboxylic acid derivative, an orthoformate derivative, or a carbamoyl derivative to form various acylhydrazone releasable linkers.
  • the releasable linker may include oxygen
  • the releasable linkers can be alkylene(dialkylsilyl), alkylene(alkylarylsilyl), alkylene(diarylsilyl), (dialkylsilyl)aryl, (alkylarylsilyl)aryl, and (diarylsilyl)aryl, wherein each of the releasable linkers is optionally substituted with a substituent X 2 , as defined below, and the releasable linker is bonded to the oxygen to form a silanol.
  • the drug can include a nitrogen atom
  • the releasable linker may include nitrogen
  • the releasable linkers can be carbonylarylcarbonyl, carbonyl(carboxyaryl)carbonyl, carbonyl(biscarboxyaryl)carbonyl, and the releasable linker can be bonded to the heteroatom nitrogen to form an amide, and also bonded to the drug nitrogen to form an amide.
  • the drug can include an oxygen atom
  • the releasable linker may include nitrogen
  • the releasable linkers can be carbonylarylcarbonyl, carbonyl(carboxyaryl)carbonyl, carbonyl(biscarboxyaryl)carbonyl, and the releasable linker can form an amide, and also bonded to the drug oxygen to form an ester.
  • the substituents X 2 can be alkyl, alkoxy, alkoxyalkyl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, amino, aminoalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, halo, haloalkyl, sulfhydrylalkyl, alkylthioalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, alkyl carboxylate, alkyl alkanoate, guanidinoalkyl, R 4 -carbonyl, R 5 -carbonylalkyl, R 6 -acylamino, and R 7 -acylaminoalkyl, wherein R 4 and R 5 are each independently selected from amino acids, amino acid derivatives, and peptides, and wherein R 6 and R 7 are each independently selected from amino acids, amino acid derivatives, and peptides.
  • the heterocycles can be pyrrolidines, piperidines, oxazolidines, isoxazolidines, thiazolidines, isothiazolidines, pyrrolidinones, piperidinones, oxazolidinones, isoxazolidinones, thiazolidinones, isothiazolidinones, and succinimides.
  • the agent A can include a nitrogen atom, and the releasable linker can be haloalkylenecarbonyl, optionally substituted with a substituent X 2 , and the releasable linker is bonded to the drug nitrogen to form an amide.
  • the agent A can include an oxygen atom, and the releasable linker can be haloalkylenecarbonyl, optionally substituted with a substituent X 2 , and the releasable linker is bonded to the drug oxygen to form an ester.
  • the agent A can include a double-bonded nitrogen atom, and in this embodiment, the releasable linkers can be alkylenecarbonylamino and 1-(alkylenecarbonylamino)succinimid-3-yl, and the releasable linker can be bonded to the drug nitrogen to form an hydrazone.
  • the releasable linkers can be alkylenecarbonylamino and 1-(alkylenecarbonylamino)succinimid-3-yl, and the releasable linker can be bonded to the drug nitrogen to form an hydrazone.
  • the agent A can include a sulfur atom, and in this embodiment, the releasable linkers can be alkylenethio and carbonylalkylthio, and the releasable linker can be bonded to the drug sulfur to form a disulfide.
  • the agent A can be a mitomycin, a mitomycin derivative, or a mitomycin analog
  • the releasable linkers can be carbonylalkylthio, carbonyltetrahydro-2H-pyranyl, carbonyltetrahydrofuranyl, 1-(carbonyltetrahydro-2H-pyranyl)succinimid-3-yl, and 1-(carbonyltetrahydrofuranyl)succinimid-3-yl, wherein each of the releasable linkers is optionally substituted with a substituent X 2 , and wherein the aziridine of the mitomycin is bonded to the releasable linker to form an acylaziridine.
  • the binding ligand B can be folate which includes a nitrogen
  • the spacer linkers can be alkylenecarbonyl, cycloalkylenecarbonyl, carbonylalkylcarbonyl, -alkylenesuccinimid-3-yl, 1-(carbonylalkyl)succinimid-3-yl, wherein each of the spacer linkers is optionally substituted with a substituent X I , and the spacer linker is bonded to the folate nitrogen to form an imide or an alkylamide.
  • the substituents X 1 can be alkyl, hydroxyalkyl, amino, aminoalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, sulfhydrylalkyl, alkylthioalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, guanidinoalkyl, R 4 -carbonyl, R 5 -carbonylalkyl, R 6 -acylamino, and R 7 -acylaminoalkyl, wherein R 4 and R 5 are each independently selected from amino acids, amino acid derivatives, and peptides, and wherein R 6 and R 7 are each independently selected from amino acids, amino acid derivatives, and peptides.
  • cycloalkylene refers to a bivalent chain of carbon atoms, a portion of which forms a ring, such as cycloprop-1,1-diyl, cycloprop-1,2-diyl, cyclohex-1,4-diyl, 3-ethylcyclopent-1,2-diyl, 1-methylenecyclohex-4-yl, and the like.
  • heterocycle refers to a monovalent chain of carbon and heteroatoms, wherein the heteroatoms are selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur, a portion of which, including at least one heteroatom, form a ring, such as aziridine, pyrrolidine, oxazolidine, 3-methoxypyrrolidine, 3-methylpiperazine, and the like.
  • aryl refers to an aromatic mono or polycyclic ring of carbon atoms, such as phenyl, naphthyl, and the like. In addition, aryl may also include heteroaryl.
  • heteroaryl refers to an aromatic mono or polycyclic ring of carbon atoms and at least one heteroatom selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur, such as pyridinyl, pyrimidinyl, indolyl, benzoxazolyl, and the like.
  • optionally substituted as used herein refers to the replacement of one or more hydrogen atoms, generally on carbon, with a corresponding number of substituents, such as halo, hydroxy, amino, alkyl or dialkylamino, alkoxy, alkylsulfonyl, cyano, nitro, and the like.
  • substituents such as halo, hydroxy, amino, alkyl or dialkylamino, alkoxy, alkylsulfonyl, cyano, nitro, and the like.
  • two hydrogens on the same carbon, on adjacent carbons, or nearby carbons may be replaced with a bivalent substituent to form the corresponding cyclic structure.
  • iminoalkylidenyl refers to a divalent radical containing alkylene as defined herein and a nitrogen atom, where the terminal carbon of the alkylene is double-bonded to the nitrogen atom, such as the formulae —(CH) ⁇ N—, —(CH 2 ) 2 (CH) ⁇ N—, —CH 2 C(Me) ⁇ N—, and the like.
  • amino acid refers generally to aminoalkylcarboxylate, where the alkyl radical is optionally substituted, such as with alkyl, hydroxy alkyl, sulfhydrylalkyl, aminoalkyl, carboxyalkyl, and the like, including groups corresponding to the naturally occurring amino acids, such as serine, cysteine, methionine, aspartic acid, glutamic acid, and the like. It is to be understood that such amino acids may be of a single stereochemistry or a particular mixture of stereochemisties, including racemic mixtures.
  • amino acid refers to beta, gamma, and longer amino acids, such as amino acids of the formula:
  • R is hydrogen, alkyl, acyl, or a suitable nitrogen protecting group
  • R′ and R′′ are hydrogen or a substituent, each of which is independently selected in each occurrence, and q is an integer such as 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5.
  • R′ and/or R′′ independently correspond to, but are not limited to, hydrogen or the side chains present on naturally occurring amino acids, such as methyl, benzyl, hydroxymethyl, thiomethyl, carboxyl, carboxylmethyl, guanidinopropyl, and the like, and derivatives and protected derivatives thereof.
  • the above described formula includes all stereoisomeric variations.
  • the amino acid may be selected from asparagine, aspartic acid, cysteine, glutamic acid, lysine, glutamine, arginine, serine, ornitine, threonine, and the like.
  • the drug, or an analog or a derivative thereof includes an alkylthiol nucleophile.
  • alkoxyalkyl referring to methyloxymethyl, ethyloxyethyl, and the like
  • haloalkoxyalkyl referring to trifluoromethyloxyethyl, 1,2-difluoro-2-chloroeth-1-yloxypropyl, and the like
  • arylalkyl referring to benzyl, phenethyl, methylbenzyl, and the like, and others.
  • amino acid derivative refers generally to an optionally substituted aminoalkylcarboxylate, where the amino group and/or the carboxylate group are each optionally substituted, such as with alkyl, carboxylalkyl, alkylamino, and the like, or optionally protected.
  • the optionally substituted intervening divalent alkyl fragment may include additional groups, such as protecting groups, and the like.
  • peptide refers generally to a series of amino acids and/or amino acid analogs and derivatives covalently linked one to the other by amide bonds.
  • releasable linker refers to a linker that includes at least one bond that can be broken under physiological conditions (e.g., a pH-labile, acid-labile, oxidatively-labile, or enzyme-labile bond). It should be appreciated that such physiological conditions resulting in bond breaking include standard chemical hydrolysis reactions that occur, for example, at physiological pH, or as a result of compartmentalization into a cellular organelle such as an endosome having a lower pH than cytosolic pH.
  • physiological conditions resulting in bond breaking include standard chemical hydrolysis reactions that occur, for example, at physiological pH, or as a result of compartmentalization into a cellular organelle such as an endosome having a lower pH than cytosolic pH.
  • the cleavable bond or bonds may be present in the interior of a cleavable linker and/or at one or both ends of a cleavable linker. It is appreciated that the lability of the cleavable bond may be adjusted by including functional groups or fragments within the polyvalent linker L that are able to assist or facilitate such bond breakage, also termed anchimeric assistance. In addition, it is appreciated that additional functional groups or fragments may be included within the polyvalent linker L that are able to assist or facilitate additional fragmentation of the receptor binding ligand agent conjugates after bond breaking of the releasable linker.
  • the lability of the cleavable bond can be adjusted by, for example, substitutional changes at or near the cleavable bond, such as including alpha branching adjacent to a cleavable disulfide bond, increasing the hydrophobicity of substituents on silicon in a moiety having a silicon-oxygen bond that may be hydrolyzed, homologating alkoxy groups that form part of a ketal or acetal that may be hydrolyzed, and the like.
  • a cleavable bond can connect two adjacent atoms within the releasable linker and/or connect other linkers or V and/or D, as described herein, at either or both ends of the releasable linker.
  • a cleavable bond connects two adjacent atoms within the releasable linker, following breakage of the bond, the releasable linker is broken into two or more fragments.
  • the releasable linker is separated from the other moiety.
  • another moiety such as an additional heteroatom, additional spacer linker, another releasable linker, the agent A, or analog or derivative thereof, or the binding ligand B, or analog or derivative thereof, following breakage of the bond.
  • each of the additional spacer and releasable linkers are bivalent. It should be further understood that the connectivity between each of the various additional spacer and releasable linkers themselves, and between the various additional spacer and releasable linkers and A and/or B, as defined herein, may occur at any atom found in the various additional spacer or releasable linkers.
  • the polyvalent linker comprises an additional spacer linker and a releasable linker taken together to form 3-thiosuccinimid-1-ylalkyloxymethyloxy, where the methyl is optionally substituted with alkyl or substituted aryl.
  • the polyvalent linker comprises an additional spacer linker and a releasable linker taken together to form 3-thiosuccinimid-1-ylalkylcarbonyl, where the carbonyl forms an acylaziridine with the agent A, or analog or derivative thereof.
  • the polyvalent linker comprises an additional spacer linker and a releasable linker taken together to form 1-alkoxycycloalkylenoxy.
  • the polyvalent linker comprises an additional spacer linker and a releasable linker taken together to form alkyleneaminocarbonyl(dicarboxylarylene)carboxylate.
  • the polyvalent linker comprises a releasable linker, an additional spacer linker, and a releasable linker taken together to form dithioalkylcarbonylhydrazide, where the hydrazide forms an hydrazone with the agent A, or analog or derivative thereof.
  • the polyvalent linker comprises an additional spacer linker and a releasable linker taken together to form 3-thiosuccinimid-1-ylalkylcarbonylhydrazide, where the hydrazide forms an hydrazone with the agent A, or analog or derivative thereof.
  • the polyvalent linker comprises an additional spacer linker and a releasable linker taken together to form 3-thioalkylsulfonylalkyl(disubstituted silyl)oxy, where the disubstituted silyl is substituted with alkyl or optionally substituted aryl.
  • the polyvalent linker comprises a plurality of additional spacer linkers selected from the group consisting of the naturally occurring amino acids and stereoisomers thereof.
  • the polyvalent linker comprises a releasable linker, an additional spacer linker, and a releasable linker taken together to form 3-dithioalkyloxycarbonyl, where the carbonyl forms a carbonate with the agent A, or analog or derivative thereof.
  • the polyvalent linker comprises a releasable linker, an additional spacer linker, and a releasable linker taken together to form 3-dithioarylalkyloxycarbonyl, where the carbonyl forms a carbonate with the agent A, or analog or derivative thereof, and the aryl is optionally substituted.
  • the polyvalent linker comprises an additional spacer linker and a releasable linker taken together to form 3-thiosuccinimid-1-ylalkyloxyalkyloxyalkylidene, where the alkylidene forms an hydrazone with the agent A, or analog or derivative thereof, each alkyl is independently selected, and the oxyalkyloxy is optionally substituted with alkyl or optionally substituted aryl.
  • the polyvalent linker comprises a releasable linker, an additional spacer linker, and a releasable linker taken together to form 3-dithioalkyloxycarbonylhydrazide.
  • the polyvalent linker comprises a releasable linker, an additional spacer linker, and a releasable linker taken together to form 3-dithioalkylamino, where the amino forms a vinylogous amide with the agent A, or analog or derivative thereof.
  • the polyvalent linker comprises a releasable linker, an additional spacer linker, and a releasable linker taken together to form 3-dithioalkylamino, where the amino forms a vinylogous amide with the agent A, or analog or derivative thereof, and the alkyl is ethyl.
  • the polyvalent linker comprises a releasable linker, an additional spacer linker, and a releasable linker taken together to form 3-dithioalkylaminocarbonyl, where the carbonyl forms a carbamate with the agent A, or analog or derivative thereof.
  • the polyvalent linker comprises a releasable linker, an additional spacer linker, and a releasable linker taken together to form 3-dithioalkylaminocarbonyl, where the carbonyl forms a carbamate with the agent A, or analog or derivative thereof, and the alkyl is ethyl.
  • the polyvalent linker comprises a releasable linker, an additional spacer linker, and a releasable linker taken together to form 3-dithioarylalkyloxycarbonyl, where the carbonyl forms a carbamate or a carbamoylaziridine with the agent A, or analog or derivative thereof.
  • the polyvalent linker (L) includes a disulfide releasable linker. In another embodiment, the polyvalent linker (L) includes at least one releasable linker that is not a disulfide releasable linker.
  • the releasable and spacer linkers may be arranged in such a way that subsequent to the cleavage of a bond in the polyvalent linker, released functional groups chemically assist the breakage or cleavage of additional bonds, also termed anchimeric assisted cleavage or breakage.
  • An illustrative embodiment of such a polyvalent linker or portion thereof includes compounds having the formulae:
  • X is an heteroatom, such as nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or a carbonyl group
  • n is an integer selected from 0 to 4; illustratively 2; R is hydrogen, or a substituent, including a substituent capable of stabilizing a positive charge inductively or by resonance on the aryl ring, such as alkoxy and the like, including methoxy; and the symbol (*) indicates points of attachment for additional spacer, heteroatom, or releasable linkers forming the polyvalent linker, or alternatively for attachment of the drug, or analog or derivative thereof, or the vitamin, or analog or derivative thereof.
  • n is 2 and R is methoxy.
  • Assisted cleavage may include mechanisms involving benzylium intermediates, benzyne intermediates, lactone cyclization, oxonium intermediates, beta-elimination, and the like. It is further appreciated that, in addition to fragmentation subsequent to cleavage of the releasable linker, the initial cleavage of the releasable linker may be facilitated by an anchimerically assisted mechanism.
  • X a is an electrophilic group such as maleimide, vinyl sulfone, activated carboxylic acid derivatives, and the like
  • X b is NH, O, or S
  • m and n are each independently selected integers from 0-4.
  • m and n are each independently selected integers from 0-2.
  • Such intermediates may be coupled to drugs, binding ligands, or other linkers vai nucleophilic attack onto electrophilic group X a , and/or by forming ethers or carboxylic acid derivatives of the.
  • the benzylic hydroxyl group is converted into the corresponding activated benzyloxycarbonyl compound with phosgene or a phosgene equivalent.
  • This embodiment may be coupled to drugs, binding ligands, or other linkers vai nucleophilic attack onto the activated carbonyl group.
  • Illustrative mechanisms for cleavage of the bivalant linkers described herein include the following 1,4 and 1,6 fragmentation mechanisms
  • X is an exogenous or endogenous nucleophile, glutathione, or bioreducing agent, and the like, and either of Z or Z′ is the vitamin, or analog or derivative thereof, or the drug, or analog or derivative thereof, or a vitamin or drug moiety in conjunction with other portions of the polyvalent linker. It is to be understood that although the above fragmentation mechanisms are depicted as concerted mechanisms, any number of discrete steps may take place to effect the ultimate fragmentation of the polyvalent linker to the final products shown.
  • the bond cleavage may also occur by acid-catalyzed elimination of the carbamate moiety, which may be anchimerically assisted by the stabilization provided by either the aryl group of the beta sulfur or disulfide illustrated in the above examples.
  • the releasable linker is the carbamate moiety.
  • the fragmentation may be initiated by a nucleophilic attack on the disulfide group, causing cleavage to form a thiolate.
  • the thiolate may intermolecularly displace a carbonic acid or carbamic acid moiety and form the corresponding thiacyclopropane.
  • the resulting phenyl thiolate may further fragment to release a carbonic acid or carbamic acid moiety by forming a resonance stabilized intermediate.
  • the releasable nature of the illustrative polyvalent linkers described herein may be realized by whatever mechanism may be relevant to the chemical, metabolic, physiological, or biological conditions present,
  • Z is the vitamin, or analog or derivative thereof, or the drug, or analog or derivative thereof, or each is a vitamin or drug moiety in conjunction with other portions of the polyvalent linker, such as a drug or vitamin moiety including one or more spacer linkers and/or other releasable linkers.
  • acid catalysis such as in an endosome, may initiate the cleavage via protonation of the urethane group.
  • acid-catalyzed elimination of the carbamate leads to the release of CO 2 and the nitrogen-containing moiety attached to Z, and the formation of a benzyl cation, which may be trapped by water, or any other Lewis base.
  • X is NH, CH2, or O
  • R is hydrogen, or a substituent, including a substituent capable of stabilizing a positive charge inductively or by resonance on the aryl ring, such as alkoxy and the like, including methoxy
  • the symbol (*) indicates points of attachment for additional spacer, heteroatom, or releasable linkers forming the polyvalent linker, or alternatively for attachment of the drug, or analog or derivative thereof, or the vitamin, or analog or derivative thereof.
  • Illustrative mechanisms for cleavage of such polyvalent linkers described herein include the following 1,4 and 1,6 fragmentation mechanisms followed by anchimerically assisted cleavage of the acylated Z′ via cyclization by the hydrazide group:
  • X is an exogenous or endogenous nucleophile, glutathione, or bioreducing agent, and the like, and either of Z or Z′ is the vitamin, or analog or derivative thereof, or the drug, or analog or derivative thereof, or a vitamin or drug moiety in conjunction with other portions of the polyvalent linker. It is to be understood that although the above fragmentation mechanisms are depicted as concerted mechanisms, any number of discrete steps may take place to effect the ultimate fragmentation of the polyvalent linker to the final products shown.
  • the bond cleavage may also occur by acid-catalyzed elimination of the carbamate moiety, which may be anchimerically assisted by the stabilization provided by either the aryl group of the beta sulfur or disulfide illustrated in the above examples.
  • the releasable linker is the carbamate moiety.
  • the fragmentation may be initiated by a nucleophilic attack on the disulfide group, causing cleavage to form a thiolate.
  • the thiolate may intermolecularly displace a carbonic acid or carbamic acid moiety and form the corresponding thiacyclopropane.
  • the resulting phenyl thiolate may further fragment to release a carbonic acid or carbamic acid moiety by forming a resonance stabilized intermediate.
  • the releasable nature of the illustrative polyvalent linkers described herein may be realized by whatever mechanism may be relevant to the chemical, metabolic, physiological, or biological conditions present.
  • acid catalysis such as in an endosome, may also initiate the cleavage via protonation of the urethane group.
  • polyvalent linkers described herein are compounds of the following formulae
  • n is an integer selected from 1 to about 4;
  • R a and R b are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl, including lower alkyl such as C 1 -C 4 alkyl that are optionally branched; or R a and R b are taken together with the attached carbon atom to form a carbocyclic ring;
  • R is an optionally substituted alkyl group, an optionally substituted acyl group, or a suitably selected nitrogen protecting group; and (*) indicates points of attachment for the drug, vitamin, imaging agent, diagnostic agent, other polyvalent linkers, or other parts of the conjugate.
  • polyvalent linkers described herein include compounds of the following formulae
  • R is an optionally substituted alkyl group, an optionally substituted acyl group, or a suitably selected nitrogen protecting group; and (*) indicates points of attachment for the drug, vitamin, imaging agent, diagnostic agent, other polyvalent linkers, or other parts of the conjugate.
  • polyvalent linkers described herein include compounds of the following formulae
  • R is an optionally substituted alkyl group, an optionally substituted acyl group, or a suitably selected nitrogen protecting group; and (*) indicates points of attachment for the drug, vitamin, imaging agent, diagnostic agent, other polyvalent linkers, or other parts of the conjugate.
  • Another illustrative mechanism involves an arrangement of the releasable and spacer linkers in such a way that subsequent to the cleavage of a bond in the polyvalent linker, released functional groups chemically assist the breakage or cleavage of additional bonds, also termed anchimeric assisted cleavage or breakage.
  • An illustrative embodiment of such a polyvalent linker or portion thereof includes compounds having the formula:
  • X is an heteroatom, such as nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur
  • n is an integer selected from 0, 1, 2, and 3
  • R is hydrogen, or a substituent, including a substituent capable of stabilizing a positive charge inductively or by resonance on the aryl ring, such as alkoxy, and the like
  • Z or Z′ is the vitamin, or analog or derivative thereof, or the drug, or analog or derivative thereof, or a vitamin or drug moiety in conjunction with other portions of the polyvalent linker.
  • Assisted cleavage may include mechanisms involving benzylium intermediates, benzyne intermediates, lactone cyclization, oxonium intermediates, beta-elimination, and the like. It is further appreciated that, in addition to fragmentation subsequent to cleavage of the releasable linker, the initial cleavage of the releasable linker may be facilitated by an anchimerically assisted mechanism.
  • the hydroxyalkanoic acid which may cyclize, facilitates cleavage of the methylene bridge, by for example an oxonium ion, and facilitates bond cleavage or subsequent fragmentation after bond cleavage of the releasable linker.
  • acid catalyzed oxonium ion-assisted cleavage of the methylene bridge may begin a cascade of fragmentation of this illustrative polyvalent linker, or fragment thereof.
  • acid-catalyzed hydrolysis of the carbamate may facilitate the beta elimination of the hydroxyalkanoic acid, which may cyclize, and facilitate cleavage of methylene bridge, by for example an oxonium ion. It is appreciated that other chemical mechanisms of bond breakage or cleavage under the metabolic, physiological, or cellular conditions described herein may initiate such a cascade of fragmentation. It is appreciated that other chemical mechanisms of bond breakage or cleavage under the metabolic, physiological, or cellular conditions described herein may initiate such a cascade of fragmentation.
  • linkers described herein include releasable linkers that cleave under the conditions described herein by a chemical mechanism involving beta elimination.
  • releasable linkers include beta-thio, beta-hydroxy, and beta-amino substituted carboxylic acids and derivatives thereof, such as esters, amides, carbonates, carbamates, and ureas.
  • such releasable linkers include l- and 4-thioarylesters, carbamates, and carbonates.
  • the polyvalent linker includes additional spacer linkers and releasable linkers connected to form a polyvalent 3-thiosuccinimid-1-ylalkyloxymethyloxy group, illustrated by the following formula
  • n is an integer from 1 to 6, the alkyl group is optionally substituted, and the methyl is optionally substituted with an additional alkyl or optionally substituted aryl group, each of which is represented by an independently selected group R.
  • the (*) symbols indicate points of attachment of the polyvalent linker fragment to other parts of the conjugates described herein.
  • the polyvalent linker includes additional spacer linkers and releasable linkers connected to form a polyvalent 3-thiosuccinimid-1-ylalkylcarbonyl group, illustrated by the following formula
  • the polyvalent linker includes spacer linkers and releasable linkers connected to form a polyvalent 3-thioalkylsulfonylalkyl(disubstituted silyl)oxy group, where the disubstituted silyl is substituted with alkyl and/or optionally substituted aryl groups.
  • the polyvalent linker includes additional spacer linkers and releasable linkers connected to form a polyvalent dithioalkylcarbonylhydrazide group, or a polyvalent 3-thiosuccinimid-1-ylalkylcarbonylhydrazide, illustrated by the following formulae
  • n is an integer from 1 to 6, the alkyl group is optionally substituted, and the hydrazide forms an hydrazone with (B), (D), or another part of the polyvalent linker (L).
  • the (*) symbols indicate points of attachment of the polyvalent linker fragment to other parts of the conjugates described herein.
  • the polyvalent linker includes additional spacer linkers and releasable linkers connected to form a polyvalent 3-thiosuccinimid-1-ylalkyloxyalkyloxyalkylidene group, illustrated by the following formula
  • each n is an independently selected integer from 1 to 6, each alkyl group independently selected and is optionally substituted, such as with alkyl or optionally substituted aryl, and where the alkylidene forms an hydrazone with (B), (D), or another part of the polyvalent linker (L).
  • the (*) symbols indicate points of attachment of the polyvalent linker fragment to other parts of the conjugates described herein.
  • Additional illustrative additional spacer linkers include alkylene-amino-alkylenecarbonyl, alkylene-thio-carbonylalkylsuccinimid-3-yl, and the like, as further illustrated by the following formulae:
  • the linker includes one or more amino acids.
  • the linker includes a single amino acid.
  • the linker includes a peptide having from 2 to about 50, 2 to about 30, or 2 to about 20 amino acids.
  • the linker includes a peptide having from about 4 to about 8 amino acids.
  • amino acids are illustratively selected from the naturally occurring amino acids, or stereoisomers thereof.
  • the amino acid may also be any other amino acid, such as any amino acid having the general formula:
  • R is hydrogen, alkyl, acyl, or a suitable nitrogen protecting group
  • R′ and R′′ are hydrogen or a substituent, each of which is independently selected in each occurrence, and q is an integer such as 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5.
  • R′ and/or R′′ independently correspond to, but are not limited to, hydrogen or the side chains present on naturally occurring amino acids, such as methyl, benzyl, hydroxymethyl, thiomethyl, carboxyl, carboxylmethyl, guanidinopropyl, and the like, and derivatives and protected derivatives thereof.
  • the above described formula includes all stereoisomeric variations.
  • the amino acid may be selected from asparagine, aspartic acid, cysteine, glutamic acid, lysine, glutamine, arginine, serine, ornitine, threonine, and the like.
  • the releasable linker includes at least 2 amino acids selected from asparagine, aspartic acid, cysteine, glutamic acid, lysine, glutamine, arginine, serine, ornitine, and threonine.
  • the releasable linker includes between 2 and about 5 amino acids selected from asparagine, aspartic acid, cysteine, glutamic acid, lysine, glutamine, arginine, serine, ornitine, and threonine.
  • the releasable linker includes a tripeptide, tetrapeptide, pentapeptide, or hexapeptide consisting of amino acids selected from aspartic acid, cysteine, glutamic acid, lysine, arginine, and ornitine, and combinations thereof.
  • the drug in another illustrative aspect of the vitamin receptor binding drug delivery conjugate intermediate described herein, includes an alkylthiol nucleophile.
  • hydrophilic linkers may alter the stability, metabolism and tissue distribution of the conjugates, especially compared to other conjugate forms such as the peptidic based forms described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/765,336.
  • carbohydrate-protein interactions are weaker than peptide-protein interactions.
  • the conjugates may lead to lower binding of serum proteins.
  • the increased cyctotoxicity may be a natural consequence of the decreased serum protein binding or the better or differential biodistribution (i.e. less drug is wasted in non-specific compartments). This is especially true for the use of hydrophilic but neutral spacers. Without being bound by theory it is also suggested that the hydrophilic spacer linkers described herein may decrease toxicity that might be due at least in part to non-specific binding interactions.
  • drug is linked to a hydrophilic spacer linker, directly or indirectly, to accomplish the goal of decreasing liver clearance. It has been found herein that the attachment of hydrophilic groups, either releasable or not, and more specifically hydrophilic neutral groups, increases renal-specific delivery.
  • liver clearance of folate-drug conjugates possessing disulfide linkers and peptidic spacers retain residual and sometimes substantial unfavorable toxicity profiles.
  • Including the hydrophilic spacers described herein also introduced vectors for kidney-specific delivery. It is therefore appreciated that including such linkers in targeted drug conjugates may decrease overall liver uptake and consequentially decrease overall toxicity.
  • toxicity at MTD such as with vinca alkaloid conjugates, may be caused by non-specific liver clearance, leading to metabolism, release of free drug, such as DAVLBH, into bile and then the intestine. The local toxicity as well as systemic toxicity (due to re-absorption) might then occur.
  • hydrophilic linkers in the targeted and non-targeted conjugates described herein, it is believed that clearance through the kidney may preferentially occur, thus decreasing and/or avoiding concomitant liver metabolism based toxicity. Accordingly, measuring total bile clearance of the drug component, such as DAVLBH, from a series of drug-folate conjugates, may be used to predict which agent would be the least toxic.
  • the conjugates described herein may be used to deliver target agents A to cells in a selective or specific manner. In one aspect of such delivery, unwanted clearance mechanisms may also be avoided. It has been discovered that the hydrophilic spacer linkers described herein when used to form conjugates of receptor binding ligands B and agents A, can decrease the amount of clearance by the liver. It has further been discovered that these hydrophilic spacer linkers tend to favor clearance along renal pathways, such as the kidney. It has further been discovered that the conjugates described herein exhibit lower toxicity than the parent agents A by themselves when administered in the same way. Without being bound by theory, it is suggested that the lower toxicity arises from the observed decrease in liver clearance mechanism in favor of renal clearance mechanisms.
  • non-targeted compounds of the following formula are described herein:
  • L is a hydrophilic spacer and A is diagnostic, therapeutic, or imaging agent. It is appreciated that such non-targeted compounds, though not targeted using a receptor binding ligand B, may nonetheless exhibit decreased toxicity than the parent agent A when delivered in the same manner.
  • the non-targeted compounds, like the targeted conjugates described above include the hydrophilic spacer L. Therefore, the agent that does not reach the cell desirably treated will be cleared by ordinary metabolic and biological routes. However, it is appreciated that the presence of the hydrophilic spacer L will direct the clearance through renal pathways rather than hepatic pathways.
  • multi-drug conjugates are described herein.
  • Several illustrative configurations of such multi-drug conjugates are contemplated herein, and include the compounds and compositions described in PCT international publication No. WO 2007/022494, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • the polyvalent linkers may connect the receptor binding ligand B to the two or more agents A in a variety of structural configurations, including but not limited to the following illustrative general formulae:
  • each of (L 1 ), (L 2 ), and (L 3 ) is a polyvalent linker as described herein comprising a hydrophilic spacer linker, and optionally including one or more releasable linkers and/or additional spacer linkers, and each of (A 1 ), (A 2 ), and (A 3 ) is an agent A, or an analog or derivative thereof.
  • additional agents A, or analogs or derivatives thereof, additional linkers, and additional configurations of the arrangement of each of (B), (L), and (A), are also contemplated herein.
  • more than one receptor binding ligand B is included in the delivery conjugates described herein, including but not limited to the following illustrative general formulae:
  • each B is a receptor binding ligand
  • each of (L 1 ), (L 2 ), and (L 3 ) is a polyvalent linker as described herein comprising a hydrophilic spacer linker, and optionally including one or more releasable linkers and/or additional spacer linkers
  • each of (A 1 ), (A 2 ), and (A 3 ) is an agent A, or an analog or derivative thereof.
  • Other variations, including additional agents A, or analogs or derivatives thereof, additional linkers, and additional configurations of the arrangement of each of (B), (L), and (A), are also contemplated herein.
  • the receptor binding ligands B are ligands for the same receptor
  • the receptor binding ligands B are ligands for different receptors.
  • the drugs are selected based on activity against one or more populations of pathogenic cells with a particular mechanism of action.
  • Illustrative mechanisms of action include alkylating agents, microtubule inhibitors, including those that stabilize and/or destabilize microtubule formation, including beta-tubulin agents, cyclin dependent kinase (CDK) inhibitors, topoisomerase inhibitors, protein synthesis inhibitors, protein kinase inhibitors, including Ras, Raf, PKC, PI3K, and like inhibitors, transcription inhibitor, antifolates, heat shock protein blockers, and the like.
  • alkylating agents include alkylating agents, microtubule inhibitors, including those that stabilize and/or destabilize microtubule formation, including beta-tubulin agents, cyclin dependent kinase (CDK) inhibitors, topoisomerase inhibitors, protein synthesis inhibitors, protein kinase inhibitors, including Ras, Raf, PKC, PI3K, and like inhibitors, transcription inhibitor
  • Illustrative alkylating agents include, but are not limited to, mitomycins CBI, and the like.
  • Illustrative cyclin dependent kinase (CDK) inhibitors include, but are not limited to, CYC202, seliciclib, R-roscovitine, AGM-1470, and the like.
  • Illustrative topoisomerase inhibitors include, but are not limited to, doxorubicin, other anthracyclines, and the like.
  • Illustrative protein synthesis inhibitors include, but are not limited to, bruceantin, and the like.
  • Illustrative protein kinase inhibitors including Ras, Raf, PKC, PI3K, and like inhibitors, include but are not limited to L-779,450, R115777, and the like.
  • Illustrative transcription inhibitors include, but are not limited to, ⁇ -amanatin, actinomycin, and the like.
  • Illustrative antifolates include, but are not limited to, methotrexate, and the like.
  • Illustrative heat shock protein blockers include, but are not limited to, geldanamycin, and the like.
  • Illustrative microtubule inhibitors including those that stabilize and/or destabilize microtubule formation, including ⁇ -tubulin agents, microtubule poisons, and the like.
  • Illustrative microtubule poisons that bind to selected receptors include, but are not limited to, inhibitors biding to the vinca binding site such as arenastatin, dolastatin, halichondrin B, maytansine, phomopsin A, rhizoxin, ustiloxin, vinblastine, vincristine, and the like, stabilizers binding to the taxol binding site such as discodermalide, epothilone, taxol, paclitaxol, and the like, inhibitors binding to the colchicine binding site such as, colchicine, combretastatin, curacin A, podophyllotoxin, steganacine, and the like, and others binding to undefined sites such as cryptophycin, tubulysins, and the like.
  • the tubulsyin is a naturally occurring tubulysin. In another embodiment, the tubulsyin is a synthetic or semi-synthetic tubulysin. Additional tubulysin that may be included in the conjugates described herein are described in PCT international application serial No. PCT/US2008/056824, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • At least one of the drugs is a microtubule inhibitor, or an analog or derivative thereof. In another embodiment, at least one of the drugs is a DNA alkylation agent. In another embodiment, at least one of the drugs is a DNA alkylation agent, and at least one other of the drugs is a microtubule inhibitor.
  • At least one of the drugs is a P-glycoprotein (PGP) inhibitor.
  • PGP P-glycoprotein
  • at least one of the drugs included on the drug delivery conjugates described herein is a PGP inhibitor
  • at least one other of the drugs included on the drug delivery conjugates is a PGP substrate.
  • the PGP substrate is a DNA alkylating agent.
  • the PGP inhibitor drug and the PGP substrate drug are both released in the cell after endocytosis.
  • the PGP inhibitor drug may improve the overall efficacy and/or potency of the PGP substrate drug.
  • the PGP inhibitor may reduces PGP expression, which in turn will decrease efflux of one or more of the drugs included on the multidrug conjugates described herein from the pathogenic cell.
  • the mitomycins, or analogs or derivatives thereof such as mitomycin C may operate as a PGP inhibitor, or down-regulator of PGP.
  • the vinca alkaloid, or analog or derivative thereof, such as vinblastine analogs and derivatives may be a PGP substrate that is protected from efflux from the pathogenic cell by the PGP inhibitor or down-regulator.
  • At least one of the drugs is a vinca alkaloid, or an analog or derivative thereof.
  • Vinca alklaloids described herein include all members of the vinca indole-dihydroindole family of alkaloids, such as but not limited to vindesine, vinblastine, vincristine, catharanthine, vindoline, leurosine, vinorelbine, imidocarb, sibutramine, toltrazuril, vinblastinoic acid, and the like, and analogs and derivatives thereof.
  • binding ligand (B) drug delivery conjugates can be used to treat disease states characterized by the presence of a pathogenic cell population in the host wherein the members of the pathogenic cell population have an accessible binding site for the binding ligand (B), or analog or derivative thereof, wherein the binding site is uniquely expressed, overexpressed, or preferentially expressed by the pathogenic cells.
  • the selective elimination of the pathogenic cells is mediated by the binding of the ligand moiety of the binding ligand (B) drug delivery conjugate to a ligand receptor, transporter, or other surface-presented protein that specifically binds the binding ligand (B), or analog or derivative thereof, and which is uniquely expressed, overexpressed, or preferentially expressed by the pathogenic cells.
  • a surface-presented protein uniquely expressed, overexpressed, or preferentially expressed by the pathogenic cells is a receptor not present or present at lower concentrations on non-pathogenic cells providing a means for selective elimination of the pathogenic cells.
  • binding ligand (B) drug delivery conjugates described herein can be used to treat a variety of tumor cell types, as well as other types of pathogenic cells, such as infectious agents, that preferentially express ligand receptors, such as vitamin receptors, and, thus, have surface accessible binding sites for ligands, such as vitamins, or vitamin analogs or derivatives.
  • methods are described herein for targeting binding ligand-linker-drug conjugates to maximize targeting of the pathogenic cells for elimination.
  • the invention further contemplates the use of combinations of binding ligand-linker-drug conjugates to maximize targeting of the pathogenic cells for elimination.
  • binding ligand (B) drug delivery conjugates described herein can be used for both human clinical medicine and veterinary applications.
  • the host animal harboring the population of pathogenic cells and treated with the binding ligand (e.g., a vitamin) drug delivery conjugates can be human or, in the case of veterinary applications, can be a laboratory, agricultural, domestic, or wild animal.
  • the methods described herein can be applied to host animals including, but not limited to, humans, laboratory animals such rodents (e.g., mice, rats, hamsters, etc.), rabbits, monkeys, chimpanzees, domestic animals such as dogs, cats, and rabbits, agricultural animals such as cows, horses, pigs, sheep, goats, and wild animals in captivity such as bears, pandas, lions, tigers, leopards, elephants, zebras, giraffes, gorillas, dolphins, and whales.
  • rodents e.g., mice, rats, hamsters, etc.
  • rabbits, monkeys, chimpanzees domestic animals
  • domestic animals such as dogs, cats
  • rabbits agricultural animals
  • cows, horses, pigs, sheep, goats and wild animals in captivity
  • pathogenic cells refers to for example cancer cells, infectious agents such as bacteria and viruses, bacteria- or virus-infected cells, activated macrophages capable of causing a disease state, and any other type of pathogenic cells that uniquely express, preferentially express, or overexpress binding ligand receptors, such as vitamin receptors or receptors that bind analogs or derivatives of vitamins.
  • Pathogenic cells can also include any cells causing a disease state for which treatment with the binding ligand drug delivery conjugates described herein results in reduction of the symptoms of the disease.
  • the pathogenic cells can be host cells that are pathogenic under some circumstances such as cells of the immune system that are responsible for graft versus host disease, but not pathogenic under other circumstances.
  • the population of pathogenic cells can be a cancer cell population that is tumorigenic, including benign tumors and malignant tumors, or it can be non-tumorigenic.
  • the cancer cell population can arise spontaneously or by such processes as mutations present in the germline of the host animal or somatic mutations, or it can be chemically-, virally-, or radiation-induced.
  • the methods can be utilized to treat such cancers as carcinomas, sarcomas, lymphomas, Hodgkin's disease, melanomas, mesotheliomas, Burkitt's lymphoma, nasopharyngeal carcinomas, leukemias, and myelomas.
  • the cancer cell population can include, but is not limited to, oral, thyroid, endocrine, skin, gastric, esophageal, laryngeal, pancreatic, colon, bladder, bone, ovarian, cervical, uterine, breast, testicular, prostate, rectal, kidney, liver, and lung cancers.
  • the effect of conjugate administration is a therapeutic response measured by reduction or elimination of tumor mass or of inhibition of tumor cell proliferation.
  • the elimination can be an elimination of cells of the primary tumor or of cells that have metastasized or are in the process of dissociating from the primary tumor.
  • a prophylactic treatment with the binding ligand (B) drug delivery conjugate e.g., a vitamin used as the binding ligand
  • drug delivery conjugate e.g., a vitamin used as the binding ligand
  • the prophylactic treatment can be an initial treatment with the binding ligand (B) drug delivery conjugate, such as treatment in a multiple dose daily regimen, and/or can be an additional treatment or series of treatments after an interval of days or months following the initial treatment(s). Accordingly, elimination of any of the pathogenic cell populations treated using the described methods includes reduction in the number of pathogenic cells, inhibition of proliferation of pathogenic cells, a prophylactic treatment that prevents return of pathogenic cells, or a treatment of pathogenic cells that results in reduction of the symptoms of disease.
  • B binding ligand
  • the methods can be used in combination with surgical removal of a tumor, radiation therapy, chemotherapy, or biological therapies such as other immunotherapies including, but not limited to, monoclonal antibody therapy, treatment with immunomodulatory agents, adoptive transfer of immune effector cells, treatment with hematopoietic growth factors, cytokines and vaccination.
  • immunotherapies including, but not limited to, monoclonal antibody therapy, treatment with immunomodulatory agents, adoptive transfer of immune effector cells, treatment with hematopoietic growth factors, cytokines and vaccination.
  • the methods are also applicable to populations of pathogenic cells that cause a variety of infectious diseases.
  • the methods are applicable to such populations of pathogenic cells as bacteria, fungi, including yeasts, viruses, virus-infected cells, mycoplasma, and parasites.
  • Infectious organisms that can be treated with the binding ligand (B) drug delivery conjugates described herein are any art-recognized infectious organisms that cause pathogenesis in an animal, including such organisms as bacteria that are gram-negative or gram-positive cocci or bacilli.
  • Proteus species Klebsiella species, Providencia species, Yersinia species, Erwinia species, Enterobacter species, Salmonella species, Serratia species, Aerobacter species, Escherichia species, Pseudomonas species, Shigella species, Vibrio species, Aeromonas species, Campylobacter species, Streptococcus species, Staphylococcus species, Lactobacillus species, Micrococcus species, Moraxella species, Bacillus species, Clostridium species, Corynebacterium species, Eberthella species, Micrococcus species, Mycobacterium species, Neisseria species, Haemophilus species, Bacteroides species, Listeria species, Erysipelothrix species, Acinetobacter species, Brucella species, Pasteurella species, Vibrio species, Flavobacterium species, Fusobacterium species, Streptobacillus species, Calymmatobacterium species, Legionella species, Trepon
  • bacteria that are resistant to antibiotics such as antibiotic-resistant Streptococcus species and Staphlococcus species, or bacteria that are susceptible to antibiotics, but cause recurrent infections treated with antibiotics so that resistant organisms eventually develop.
  • Bacteria that are susceptible to antibiotics, but cause recurrent infections treated with antibiotics so that resistant organisms eventually develop can be treated with the binding ligand (B) drug delivery conjugates described herein in the absence of antibiotics, or in combination with lower doses of antibiotics than would normally be administered to a patient, to avoid the development of these antibiotic-resistant bacterial strains,
  • viruses such as DNA and RNA viruses
  • viruses include, but are not limited to, DNA viruses such as papilloma viruses, parvoviruses, adenoviruses, herpesviruses and vaccinia viruses, and RNA viruses, such as arenaviruses, coronaviruses, rhinoviruses, respiratory syncytial viruses, influenza viruses, picornaviruses, paramyxoviruses, reoviruses, retroviruses, lentiviruses, and rhabdoviruses.
  • DNA viruses such as papilloma viruses, parvoviruses, adenoviruses, herpesviruses and vaccinia viruses
  • RNA viruses such as arenaviruses, coronaviruses, rhinoviruses, respiratory syncytial viruses, influenza viruses, picornaviruses, paramyxoviruses, reoviruses, retroviruses, lentiviruses, and rhabdoviruse
  • the methods are also applicable to any fungi, including yeasts, mycoplasma species, parasites, or other infectious organisms that cause disease in animals.
  • fungi that can be treated with the methods and compositions include fungi that grow as molds or are yeastlike, including, for example, fungi that cause diseases such as ringworm, histoplasmosis, blastomycosis, aspergillosis, cryptococcosis, sporotrichosis, coccidioidomycosis, paracoccidio-idomycosis, mucormycosis, chromoblastomycosis, dermatophytosis, protothecosis, fusariosis, pityriasis, mycetoma, paracoccidioidomycosis, phaeohyphomycosis, pseudallescheriasis, sporotrichosis, trichosporosis, pneumocystis infection, and candidias
  • the methods can also be utilized to treat parasitic infections including, but not limited to, infections caused by tapeworms, such as Taenia, Hymenolepsis, Diphyllobothrium , and Echinococcus species, flukes, such as Fasciolopsis, Heterophyes, Metagonimus, Clonorchis, Fasciola, Paragonimus , and Schitosoma species, roundworms, such as Enterobius, Trichuris, Ascaris, Ancylostoma, Necator, Strongyloides, Trichinella, Wuchereria, Brugia, Loa Onchocerca , and Dracunculus species, ameba, such as Naegleria and Acanthamoeba species, and protozoans, such as Plasmodium, Trypanosoma, Leishmania, Toxoplasma, Entamoeba, Giardia, Isospora, Cryptosporidium , and Enterocytozoon species.
  • the pathogenic cells to which the binding ligand drug delivery conjugates described herein are directed can also be cells harboring endogenous pathogens, such as virus-, mycoplasma-, parasite-, or bacteria-infected cells, if these cells preferentially express ligand receptors, such as vitamin receptors.
  • endogenous pathogens such as virus-, mycoplasma-, parasite-, or bacteria-infected cells, if these cells preferentially express ligand receptors, such as vitamin receptors.
  • the binding ligand drug delivery conjugates can be internalized into the targeted pathogenic cells upon binding of the binding ligand moiety to a receptor, transporter, or other surface-presented protein that specifically binds the ligand and which is preferentially expressed on the pathogenic cells. Such internalization can occur, for example, through receptor-mediated endocytosis. If the binding ligand (B) drug delivery conjugate contains a releasable linker, the binding ligand moiety and the drug can dissociate intracellularly and the drug can act on its intracellular target.
  • the binding ligand moiety of the drug delivery conjugate can bind to the pathogenic cell placing the drug in close association with the surface of the pathogenic cell.
  • the drug can then be released by cleavage of the releasable linker.
  • the drug can be released by a protein disulfide isomerase if the releasable linker is a disulfide group.
  • the drug can then be taken up by the pathogenic cell to which the binding ligand (B) drug delivery conjugate is bound, or the drug can be taken up by another pathogenic cell in close proximity thereto.
  • the drug could be released by a protein disulfide isomerase inside the cell where the releasable linker is a disulfide group.
  • the drug may also be released by a hydrolytic mechanism, such as acid-catalyzed hydrolysis, as described above for certain beta elimination mechanisms, or by an anchimerically assisted cleavage through an oxonium ion or lactonium ion producing mechanism.
  • a hydrolytic mechanism such as acid-catalyzed hydrolysis, as described above for certain beta elimination mechanisms, or by an anchimerically assisted cleavage through an oxonium ion or lactonium ion producing mechanism.
  • the selection of the releasable linker or linkers will dictate the mechanism by which the drug is released from the conjugate. It is appreciated that such a selection can be pre-defined by the conditions wherein the drug conjugate will be used.
  • the drug delivery conjugates can be internalized into the targeted cells upon binding, and the binding ligand and the drug can remain associated intracellularly with the drug exhibiting its effects without dissociation from the vitamin moiety.
  • the vitamin-drug delivery conjugate can act through a mechanism independent of cellular vitamin receptors.
  • the drug delivery conjugates can bind to soluble vitamin receptors present in the serum or to serum proteins, such as albumin, resulting in prolonged circulation of the conjugates relative to the unconjugated drug, and in increased activity of the conjugates towards the pathogenic cell population relative to the unconjugated drug.
  • the vitamin moiety of the drug delivery conjugate can bind to the pathogenic cell placing the drug on the surface of the pathogenic cell to target the pathogenic cell for attack by other molecules capable of binding to the drug.
  • the drug delivery conjugates can be internalized into the targeted cells upon binding, and the vitamin moiety and the drug can remain associated intracellularly with the drug exhibiting its effects without dissociation from the vitamin moiety.
  • a cell receptor binding delivery conjugate of the general formula B-L-A is provided, where L is as defined herein, and A is a drug such as an immunogen.
  • the immunogen can be a hapten, for example, fluorescein, dinitrophenyl, and the like.
  • the vitamin receptor binding drug delivery conjugate binds to the surface of the pathogenic cells and “labels” the cells with the immunogen, thereby triggering an immune response directed at the labeled pathogenic cell population.
  • Antibodies administered to the host in a passive immunization or antibodies existing in the host system from a preexisting innate or acquired immunity bind to the immunogen and trigger endogenous immune responses.
  • Antibody binding to the cell-bound vitamin-immunogen conjugate results in complement-mediated cytotoxicity, antibody-dependent cell-mediated cytotoxicity, antibody opsonization and phagocytosis, antibody-induced receptor clustering signaling cell death or quiescence, or any other humoral or cellular immune response stimulated by antibody binding to cell-bound ligand-immunogen conjugates.
  • an immunogen can be directly recognized by immune cells without prior antibody opsonization, direct killing of the pathogenic cells can occur. This embodiment is described in more detail in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/822,379, incorporated herein by reference.
  • the polyvalent linker may also include releasable linkers, as described above, such as a vitamin receptor binding drug delivery conjugate of the general formula B-L-A where L is a linker that comprises one or more hydrophilic spacer linkers and a releaseable linker.
  • the binding ligand (B) drug delivery conjugates described herein comprise a binding ligand, a polyvalent linker (L), a drug, and, optionally, heteroatom linkers to link the binding ligand and the drug to the polyvalent linker (L).
  • the polyvalent linker (L) can comprise a spacer linker, a releasable (i.e., cleavable) linker, and an heteroatom linker, or combinations thereof.
  • the drug can be any molecule capable of modulating or otherwise modifying cell function, including pharmaceutically active compounds.
  • Suitable molecules can include, but are not limited to: peptides, oligopeptides, retro-inverso oligopeptides, proteins, protein analogs in which at least one non-peptide linkage replaces a peptide linkage, apoproteins, glycoproteins, enzymes, coenzymes, enzyme inhibitors, amino acids and their derivatives, receptors and other membrane proteins; antigens and antibodies thereto; haptens and antibodies thereto; hormones, lipids, phospholipids, liposomes; toxins; antibiotics; analgesics; bronchodilators; beta-blockers; antimicrobial agents; antihypertensive agents; cardiovascular agents including antiarrhythmics, cardiac glycosides, antianginals and vasodilators; central nervous system agents including stimulants, psychotropics, antimanics, and depressants; antiviral agents; antihistamines; cancer
  • the drug can be any drug known in the art which is cytotoxic, enhances tumor permeability, inhibits tumor cell proliferation, promotes apoptosis, decreases anti-apoptotic activity in target cells, is used to treat diseases caused by infectious agents, enhances an endogenous immune response directed to the pathogenic cells, or is useful for treating a disease state caused by any type of pathogenic cell.
  • Drugs suitable for use in accordance with this invention include adrenocorticoids and corticosteroids, alkylating agents, antiandrogens, antiestrogens, androgens, aclamycin and aclamycin derivatives, estrogens, antimetabolites such as cytosine arabinoside, purine analogs, pyrimidine analogs, and methotrexate, busulfan, carboplatin, chlorambucil, cisplatin and other platinum compounds, tamoxiphen, taxol, paclitaxel, paclitaxel derivatives, Taxotere®, cyclophosphamide, daunomycin, daunorubicin, doxorubicin, rhizoxin, T2 toxin, plant alkaloids, prednisone, hydroxyurea, teniposide, mitomycins, discodermolides, microtubule inhibitors, epothilones, tubulysin, cyclopropyl
  • colchicine colchicine derivatives, allocolchicine, thiocolchicine, trityl cysteine, Halicondrin B, dolastatins such as dolastatin 10, amanitins such as ⁇ -amanitin, camptothecin, irinotecan, and other camptothecin derivatives thereof, maytansines, geldanamycin and geldanamycin derivatives, estramustine, nocodazole, MAP4, colcemid, inflammatory and proinflammatory agents, peptide and peptidomimetic signal transduction inhibitors, and any other art-recognized drug or toxin.
  • the agent (A) is a drug selected from a vinca alkaloid, such as DAVLBH, a cryptophycin, bortezomib, thiobortezomib, a tubulysin, aminopterin, rapamycin, paclitaxel, docetaxel, doxorubicin, daunorubicin, everolimus, ⁇ -amanatin, verucarin, didemnin B, geldanomycin, purvalanol A, everolimus, ispinesib, budesonide, dasatinib, an epothilone, a maytansine, and a tyrosine kinase inhibitor, including analogs and derivatives of the foregoing.
  • a vinca alkaloid such as DAVLBH, a cryptophycin, bortezomib, thiobortezomib, a tubulysin, aminopterin,
  • the conjugate includes at least two agents (A) selected from a vinca alkaloid, such as DAVLBH, a cryptophycin, bortezomib, thiobortezomib, a tubulysin, aminopterin, rapamycin, paclitaxel, docetaxel, doxorubicin, daunorubicin, everolimus, ⁇ -amanatin, verucarin, didemnin B, geldanomycin, purvalanol A, everolimus, ispinesib, budesonide, dasatinib, an epothilone, a maytansine, and a tyrosine kinase inhibitor, including analogs and derivatives of the foregoing.
  • the agents (A) are the same. In another variation, the agents (A) are different.
  • the drugs for use in the methods described herein remain stable in serum for at least 4 hours.
  • the drugs have an IC 50 in the nanomolar range, and, in another embodiment, the drugs are water soluble. If the drug is not water soluble, the polyvalent linker (L) can be derivatized to enhance water solubility.
  • the term “drug” also means any of the drug analogs or derivatives described hereinabove. It should be appreciated that in accordance with this invention, a drug analog or derivative can mean a drug that incorporates an heteroatom through which the drug analog or derivative is covalently bound to the polyvalent linker (L).
  • the binding ligand drug delivery conjugates can comprise a binding ligand (B), a bivalent linker (L), a drug, and, optionally, heteroatom linkers to link the binding ligand (B) receptor binding moiety and the drug to the bivalent linker (L).
  • a vitamin analog or derivative can mean a vitamin that incorporates an heteroatom through which the vitamin analog or derivative is covalently bound to the bivalent linker (L).
  • the vitamin can be covalently bound to the bivalent linker (L) through an heteroatom linker, or a vitamin analog or derivative (i.e., incorporating an heteroatom) can be directly bound to the bivalent linker (L).
  • a drug analog or derivative is a drug
  • a drug analog or derivative can mean a drug that incorporates an heteroatom through which the drug analog or derivative is covalently bound to the bivalent linker (L).
  • the drug can be covalently bound to the bivalent linker (L) through an heteroatom linker, or a drug analog or derivative (i.e., incorporating an heteroatom) can be directly bound to the bivalent linker (L).
  • the bivalent linker (L) can comprise a spacer linker, a releasable (i.e., cleavable) linker, and an heteroatom linker to link the spacer linker to the releasable linker in conjugates containing both of these types of linkers.
  • any manner of forming a conjugate between the bivalent linker (L) and the binding ligand (B), or analog or derivative thereof, between the bivalent linker (L) and the drug, or analog or derivative thereof, including any intervening heteroatom linkers can be utilized.
  • any art-recognized method of forming a conjugate between the spacer linker, the releasable linker, and the heteroatom linker to form the bivalent linker (L) can be used.
  • the conjugate can be formed by direct conjugation of any of these molecules, for example, through complexation, or through hydrogen, ionic, or covalent bonds. Covalent bonding can occur, for example, through the formation of amide, ester, disulfide, or imino bonds between acid, aldehyde, hydroxy, amino, sulfhydryl, or hydrazo groups.
  • the bivalent linker (L) includes a chain of atoms selected from C, N, O, S, Si, and P that covalently connects the binding ligand (B), the hydrophilic linker, and/or the agent (A).
  • the linker may have a wide variety of lengths, such as in the range from about 2 to about 100 atoms.
  • the atoms used in forming the linker may be combined in all chemically relevant ways, such as chains of carbon atoms forming alkylene, alkenylene, and alkynylene groups, and the like; chains of carbon and oxygen atoms forming ethers, polyoxyalkylene groups, or when combined with carbonyl groups forming esters and carbonates, and the like; chains of carbon and nitrogen atoms forming amines, imines, polyamines, hydrazines, hydrazones, or when combined with carbonyl groups forming amides, ureas, semicarbazides, carbazides, and the like; chains of carbon, nitrogen, and oxygen atoms forming alkoxyamines, alkoxylamines, or when combined with carbonyl groups forming urethanes, amino acids, acyloxylamines, hydroxamic acids, and the like; and many others.
  • the atoms forming the chain in each of the foregoing illustrative embodiments may be either saturated or unsaturated, such that for example, alkanes, alkenes, alkynes, imines, and the like may be radicals that are included in the linker.
  • the atoms forming the linker may also be cyclized upon each other to form divalent cyclic structures that form the linker, including cyclo alkanes, cyclic ethers, cyclic amines, arylenes, heteroarylenes, and the like in the linker.
  • compositions comprising an amount of a binding ligand (B) drug delivery conjugate effective to eliminate a population of pathogenic cells in a host animal when administered in one or more doses are described.
  • the binding ligand drug delivery conjugate is preferably administered to the host animal parenterally, e.g., intradermally, subcutaneously, intramuscularly, intraperitoneally, intravenously, or intrathecally.
  • the binding ligand drug delivery conjugate can be administered to the host animal by other medically useful processes, such as orally, and any effective dose and suitable therapeutic dosage form, including prolonged release dosage forms, can be used.
  • parenteral dosage forms include aqueous solutions of the active agent, in an isotonic saline, 5% glucose or other well-known pharmaceutically acceptable liquid carriers such as liquid alcohols, glycols, esters, and amides.
  • the parenteral dosage form can be in the form of a reconstitutable lyophilizate comprising the dose of the drug delivery conjugate.
  • any of a number of prolonged release dosage forms known in the art can be administered such as, for example, the biodegradable carbohydrate matrices described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,713,249; 5,266,333; and 5,417,982, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference, or, alternatively, a slow pump (e.g., an osmotic pump) can be used.
  • a slow pump e.g., an osmotic pump
  • At least one additional composition comprising a therapeutic factor can be administered to the host in combination or as an adjuvant to the above-detailed methodology, to enhance the binding ligand drug delivery conjugate-mediated elimination of the population of pathogenic cells, or more than one additional therapeutic factor can be administered.
  • the therapeutic factor can be selected from a chemotherapeutic agent, or another therapeutic factor capable of complementing the efficacy of the administered binding ligand drug delivery conjugate.
  • therapeutically effective combinations of these factors can be used.
  • chemotherapeutic agents which are, for example, cytotoxic themselves or can work to enhance tumor permeability, are also suitable for use in the described methods in combination with the binding ligand drug delivery conjugates.
  • chemotherapeutic agents include adrenocorticoids and corticosteroids, alkylating agents, antiandrogens, antiestrogens, androgens, aclamycin and aclamycin derivatives, estrogens, antimetabolites such as cytosine arabinoside, purine analogs, pyrimidine analogs, and methotrexate, busulfan, carboplatin, chlorambucil, cisplatin and other platinum compounds, tamoxiphen, taxol, paclitaxel, paclitaxel derivatives, Taxotere®, cyclophosphamide, daunomycin, daunorubicin, doxorubicin, rhizoxin, T2 toxin, plant alkaloids, prednisone,
  • drugs that can be used include penicillins, cephalosporins, vancomycin, erythromycin, clindamycin, rifampin, chloramphenicol, aminoglycoside antibiotics, gentamicin, amphotericin B, acyclovir, trifluridine, ganciclovir, zidovudine, amantadine, ribavirin, maytansines and analogs and derivatives thereof, gemcitabine, and any other art-recognized antimicrobial compound.
  • the therapeutic factor can be administered to the host animal prior to, after, or at the same time as the binding ligand drug delivery conjugates and the therapeutic factor can be administered as part of the same composition containing the binding ligand drug delivery conjugate or as part of a different composition than the binding ligand drug delivery conjugate. Any such therapeutic composition containing the therapeutic factor at a therapeutically effective dose can be used.
  • binding ligand drug delivery conjugate can be used.
  • the host animal can be treated with conjugates with different vitamins, but the same drug in a co-dosing protocol.
  • the host animal can be treated with conjugates comprising the same binding ligand linked to different drugs, or various binding ligands linked to various drugs.
  • binding ligand drug delivery conjugates with the same or different vitamins, and the same or different drugs comprising multiple vitamins and multiple drugs as part of the same drug delivery conjugate could be used.
  • the unitary daily dosage of the binding ligand drug delivery conjugate can vary significantly depending on the host condition, the disease state being treated, the molecular weight of the conjugate, its route of administration and tissue distribution, and the possibility of co-usage of other therapeutic treatments such as radiation therapy.
  • the effective amount to be administered to a patient is based on body surface area, patient weight, and physician assessment of patient condition.
  • effective doses can range, for example, from about 1 ng/kg to about 1 mg/kg, from about 1 ⁇ g/kg to about 500 ⁇ g/kg, from about 1 ⁇ g/kg to about 100 ⁇ g/kg, from about 1 ⁇ g/kg to about 50 ⁇ g/kg, and from about 1 ⁇ g/kg to about 10 ⁇ g/kg.
  • any effective regimen for administering the binding ligand drug delivery conjugates can be used.
  • the binding ligand drug delivery conjugates can be administered as single doses, or can be divided and administered as a multiple-dose daily regimen.
  • a staggered regimen for example, one to three days per week can be used as an alternative to daily treatment, and such intermittent or staggered daily regimen is considered to be equivalent to every day treatment and within the scope of the methods described herein.
  • the host is treated with multiple injections of the binding ligand drug delivery conjugate to eliminate the population of pathogenic cells.
  • the host is injected multiple times (preferably about 2 up to about 50 times) with the binding ligand drug delivery conjugate, for example, at 12-72 hour intervals or at 48-72 hour intervals.
  • additional injections of the binding ligand drug delivery conjugate can be administered to the patient at an interval of days or months after the initial injections(s) and the additional injections prevent recurrence of the disease state caused by the pathogenic cells.
  • vitamins, or analogs or derivatives thereof, that can be used in the binding ligand drug delivery conjugates include those that bind to receptors expressed specifically on activated macrophages, such as the folate receptor which binds folate, or an analog or derivative thereof.
  • the folate-linked conjugates for example, can be used to kill or suppress the activity of activated macrophages that cause disease states in the host.
  • Such macrophage targeting conjugates when administered to a patient suffering from an activated macrophage-mediated disease state, work to concentrate and associate the conjugated drug in the population of activated macrophages to kill the activated macrophages or suppress macrophage function.
  • Elimination, reduction, or deactivation of the activated macrophage population works to stop or reduce the activated macrophage-mediated pathogenesis characteristic of the disease state being treated.
  • diseases known to be mediated by activated macrophages include rheumatoid arthritis, ulcerative colitis, Crohn's disease, psoriasis, osteomyelitis, multiple sclerosis, atherosclerosis, pulmonary fibrosis, sarcoidosis, systemic sclerosis, organ transplant rejection (GVHD) and chronic inflammations.
  • Administration of the drug delivery conjugate is typically continued until symptoms of the disease state are reduced or eliminated.
  • the binding ligand drug delivery conjugates administered to kill activated macrophages or suppress the function of activated macrophages can be administered parenterally to the animal or patient suffering from the disease state, for example, intradermally, subcutaneously, intramuscularly, intraperitoneally, or intravenously in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • the binding ligand drug delivery conjugates can be administered to the animal or patient by other medically useful procedures and effective doses can be administered in standard or prolonged release dosage forms.
  • the therapeutic method can be used alone or in combination with other therapeutic methods recognized for treatment of disease states mediated by activated macrophages.
  • the drug delivery conjugates described herein can be prepared by art-recognized synthetic methods.
  • the synthetic methods are chosen depending upon the selection of the optionally addition heteroatoms or the heteroatoms that are already present on the spacer linkers, releasable linkers, the drug, and/or or the binding ligand.
  • the relevant bond forming reactions are described in Richard C. Larock, “Comprehensive Organic Transformations, a guide to functional group preparations,” VCH Publishers, Inc. New York (1989), and in Theodora E. Greene & Peter G. M. Wuts, “Protective Groups ion Organic Synthesis,” 2 d edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc. New York (1991), the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • folate-containing peptidyl fragment Pte-Glu-(AA), —NH(CHR 2 )CO 2 H (3) is prepared by a polymer-supported sequential approach using standard methods, such as the Fmoc-strategy on an acid-sensitive Fmoc-AA-Wang resin (1), as shown in Scheme 1.
  • R 1 is Fmoc
  • R 2 is the desired appropriately-protected amino acid side chain
  • DIPEA is diisopropylethylamine.
  • Standard coupling procedures such as PyBOP and others described herein or known in the art are used, where the coupling agent is illustratively applied as the activating reagent to ensure efficient coupling.
  • Fmoc protecting groups are removed after each coupling step under standard conditions, such as upon treatment with piperidine, tetrabutylammonium fluoride (TBAF), and the like.
  • amino acid building blocks such as Fmoc-Glu-OtBu, N 10 -TFA-Pte-OH, and the like, are used, as described in Scheme 1, and represented in step (b) by Fmoc-AA-OH.
  • AA refers to any amino acid starting material, that is appropriately protected.
  • amino acid as used herein is intended to refer to any reagent having both an amine and a carboxylic acid functional group separated by one or more carbons, and includes the naturally occurring alpha and beta amino acids, as well as amino acid derivatives and analogs of these amino acids.
  • amino acids having side chains that are protected such as protected serine, threonine, cysteine, aspartate, and the like may also be used in the folate-peptide synthesis described herein.
  • gamma, delta, or longer homologous amino acids may also be included as starting materials in the folate-peptide synthesis described herein.
  • amino acid analogs having homologous side chains, or alternate branching structures, such as norleucine, isovaline, ⁇ -methyl threonine, ⁇ -methyl cysteine, ⁇ , ⁇ -dimethyl cysteine, and the like, may also be included as starting materials in the folate-peptide synthesis described herein.
  • step (a) & (b) The coupling sequence (steps (a) & (b)) involving Fmoc-AA-OH is performed “n” times to prepare solid-support peptide 2 , where n is an integer and may equal 0 to about 100.
  • step (a) the remaining Fmoc group is removed (step (a)), and the peptide is sequentially coupled to a glutamate derivative (step (c)), deprotected, and coupled to TFA-protected pteroic acid (step (d)).
  • step (e) the peptide is cleaved from the polymeric support upon treatment with trifluoroacetic acid, ethanedithiol, and triisopropylsilane.
  • reaction conditions result in the simultaneous removal of the t-Bu, t-Boc, and Trt protecting groups that may form part of the appropriately-protected amino acid side chain.
  • the TFA protecting group is removed upon treatment with base (step (f)) to provide the folate-containing peptidyl fragment 3.
  • the compounds described herein may be prepared using conventional synthetic organic chemistry.
  • the following illustrative process may be used to prepare compounds described herein, where is an integer such as 1 to about 10.
  • the intermediates may be coupled with any additional hydrophilic spacer linkers, other spacer linkers, releasable linkers, or the agent A.
  • additional hydrophilic spacer linkers, other spacer linkers, or releasable linkers may be inserted between the binding ligand B and the indicated hydrophilic spacer linkers.
  • the left-to-right arrangement of the bivalent hydrophilic spacer linkers is not limiting, and accordingly, the agent A, the binding ligand B, additional hydrophilic spacer linkers, other spacer linkers, and/or releasable linkers may be attached to either end of the hydrophilic spacer linkers described herein.
  • FR-positive KB cells were heavily seeded into 24-well cell culture plates and allowed to adhere to the plastic for 18 h. Spent incubation media was replaced in designated wells with folate-free RPMI (FFRPMI) supplemented with 100 nM 3 H-folic acid in the absence and presence of increasing concentrations of test article or folic acid. Cells were incubated for 60 min at 37° C.
  • FFRPMI folate-free RPMI
  • Negative control tubes contained only the 3 H-folic acid in FFRPMI (no competitor).
  • Positive control tubes contained a final concentration of 1 mM folic acid, and CPMs measured in these samples (representing non-specific binding of label) were subtracted from all samples.
  • relative affinities were defined as the inverse molar ratio of compound required to displace 50% of 3 H-folic acid bound to the FR on KB cells, and the relative affinity of folic acid for the FR was set to 1.
  • the compounds described herein were evaluated using an in vitro cytotoxicity assay that predicts the ability of the drug to inhibit the growth of folate receptor-positive KB cells.
  • the compounds were comprised of folate linked to a respective chemotherapeutic drug, as prepared according to the protocols described herein.
  • the KB cells were exposed for up to 7 h at 37° C. to the indicated concentrations of folate-drug conjugate in the absence or presence of at least a 100-fold excess of folic acid.
  • the cells were then rinsed once with fresh culture medium and incubated in fresh culture medium for 72 hours at 37° C. Cell viability was assessed using a 3 H-thymidine incorporation assay.
  • each well received 1 mL of media containing increasing concentrations of test article (4 wells per sample) in the presence or absence of 100 ⁇ M free folic acid (a binding site competitor).
  • Treated cells were pulsed for 2 h at 37° C., rinsed 4 times with 0.5 mL of media, and then chased in 1 mL of fresh media up to 70 h. Spent media was aspirated from all wells and replaced with fresh media containing 5 ⁇ Ci/mL 3 H-thymidine. Following a further 2 h 37° C.
  • cytotoxicity was measurable, and in most cases, the IC 50 values (concentration of drug conjugate required to reduce 3 H-thymidine incorporation into newly synthesized DNA by 50%) were in the low nanomolar range. Furthermore, the cytotoxicities of these conjugates were reduced in the presence of excess free folic acid, indicating that the observed cell killing was mediated by binding to the folate receptor.
  • the following table illustrated data for selected compounds against KB cells and against RAW264.7 cells
  • each well receives 1 mL of medium containing increasing concentrations of test compound (4 wells per sample) in the presence or absence of 100 ⁇ M free folic acid as indicated.
  • Treated cells are pulsed for 2 h at 37° C., rinsed 4 times with 0.5 mL of media, and then chased in 1 mL of fresh medium up to 70 h.
  • Spent medium is aspirated from all wells and replaced with fresh medium containing 5 ⁇ Ci/mL 3 H-thymidine. Following a further 2 h 37° C.
  • mice Four to seven week-old mice (Balb/c or nu/nu strains) were purchased from Harlan Sprague Dawley, Inc. (Indianapolis, Ind.). Normal rodent chow contains a high concentration of folic acid (6 mg/kg chow); accordingly, mice used were maintained on the folate-free diet (Harlan diet #TD00434) for 1 week before tumor implantation to achieve serum folate concentrations close to the range of normal human serum. For tumor cell inoculation, 1 ⁇ 10 6 M109 cells (Balb/c strain) or 1 ⁇ 10 6 KB cells (nu/nu strain) in 100 ⁇ L were injected in the subcutis of the dorsal medial area.
  • Log cell kill (LCK) and treated over control (T/C) values were then calculated according to published procedures (see, e.g., Lee et al., “BMS-247550: a novel epothilone analog with a mode of action similar to paclitaxel but possessing superior antitumor efficacy” Clin Cancer Res 7:1429-1437 (2001); Rose, “Taxol-based combination chemotherapy and other in vivo preclinical antitumor studies” J Natl Cancer Inst Monogr 47-53 (1993)).
  • Dosing solutions were prepared fresh each day in PBS and administered through the lateral tail vein of the mice. Dosing was initiated when the s.c. tumors had an average volume between 50-100 mm 3 (t o ), typically 8 days post tumor inoculation (PTI) for KB tumors, and 11 days PTI for M109 tumors.
  • mice bearing subcutaneous M109 tumors (a syngeneic lung carcinoma).
  • mice Female Balb/c strain
  • Harlan, Inc. Female Balb/c strain
  • the mice were maintained on Harlan's folate-free chow for a total of three weeks prior to the onset of and during this experiment.
  • Folate receptor-negative 4T-1 tumor cells (1 ⁇ 10 6 cells per animal) were inoculated in the subcutis of the right axilla. Approximately 5 days post tumor inoculation when the 4T-1 tumor average volume was ⁇ 100 mm 3 , mice (5/group) were injected i.v.
  • FIGS. 3A , 4 A, 5 A, 6 A, 7 A, 8 A, and 10 A indicate that the conjugates described herein exhibit superior efficacy in the treatment of tumors compared to the corresponding unconjugated compounds.
  • Treatment of Balb/c mice with s.c. M109 tumors with EC0396 and EC145 led to complete responses in all treated animals (3/3 for EC0396 and 5/5 for EC145).
  • no recurrence of disease was observed.
  • treatment with EC0400 led to a complete response and no recurrence of disease after nearly 70 days.
  • Drug Toxicity Determinations Persistent drug toxicity was assessed by collecting blood via cardiac puncture and submitting the serum for independent analysis of blood urea nitrogen (BUN), creatinine, total protein, AST-SGOT, ALT-SGPT plus a standard hematological cell panel at Ani-Lytics, Inc. (Gaithersburg, Md.).
  • BUN blood urea nitrogen
  • AST-SGOT creatinine
  • ALT-SGPT a standard hematological cell panel
  • Ani-Lytics, Inc. Gaithersburg, Md.
  • histopathologic evaluation of formalin-fixed heart, lungs, liver, spleen, kidney, intestine, skeletal muscle and bone were conducted by board-certified pathologists at Animal Reference Pathology Laboratories (ARUP; Salt Lake City, Utah).
  • mice Toxicity as Measured by Weight Loss.
  • the percentage weight change was determined in mice (5 mice/group) on selected days post-tumor inoculation (PTI), compared to controls, and graphed.
  • PTI post-tumor inoculation
  • the conjugated compounds described herein showed equal or less toxicity compared to unconjugated compounds, as determined by percent weight loss.
  • the compounds described herein may show a positive relationship between the number of hydrophilic spacer linkers included in the conjugate and the maximum tolerated dose on mice for a single dose.
  • the following vinblastine conjugates described herein compared to a control conjugate are shown in the following table.
  • Bile Clearance Comparison of Bile Clearance (% ID) of unconjugated drug, drug conjugate lacking a hydrophilic spacer linker, and conjugates described herein.
  • Bile clearance Compound Spacer (% ID) DAVLBH None 58.0 EC145 no hydrophilic spacer 8.7 EC0234 Mono-ribosyl 10.6 EC0246 Bis-ribosyl 4.7 EC0258 Tri-ribosyl 3.2 EC0434 Tetra-ribosyl 2.8 EC0400 Mono-glucuronide 6.3 EC0423 Bis-glucuronide 3.9 EC0409 PEG 12 7.9 EC0429 Piperazine/Asp 8.6
  • results shown in FIGS. 11 and 13 indicate a 76% decrease in the liver clearance of EC0434, which includes hydrophilic spacer linkers described herein, as compared to the standard EC145. Without being bound by theory, these results are believed to correspond to non-specific liver clearance, and accordingly, it is suggested that significantly lower doses of those conjugates that include the hydrophilic spacer linkers described herein may be administered compared to the corresponding conjugates that do not include such linkers. Further, without being bound by theory, it is suggested that hepatic clearance leads to the dose limiting GI-related toxicity that is observed with some conjugates.
  • EC0233 was synthesized by SPPS in three steps according to the general peptide synthesis procedure described herein starting from H-Cys(4-methoxytrityl)-2-chlorotrityl-Resin, and the following SPPS reagents:
  • Coupling steps In a peptide synthesis vessel add the resin, add the amino acid solution, DIPEA, and PyBOP. Bubble argon for 1 hr. and wash 3 ⁇ with DMF and IPA. Use 20% piperidine in DMF for Fmoc deprotection, 3 ⁇ (10 min), before each amino acid coupling. Continue to complete all 3 coupling steps. At the end wash the resin with 2% hydrazine in DMF 3 ⁇ (5 min) to cleave TFA protecting group on Pteroic acid.
  • Cleavage step Cleavage Reagent: 92.5% (50 ml) TFA, 2.5% (1.34 ml) H 2 O, 2.5% (1.34 ml) triisopropylsilane, 2.5% (1.34 ml) ethanedithiol.
  • EC0244 Bis-Saccharo-Folate Linker EC0244.
  • EC0244 was synthesized by SPPS in five steps according to the general peptide synthesis procedure described herein starting from H-Cys(4-methoxytrityl)-2-chlorotrityl-Resin, and the following SPPS reagents:
  • EC0257 was synthesized by SPPS in six steps according to the general peptide synthesis procedure described herein starting from H-Cys(4-methoxytrityl)-2-chlorotrityl-Resin, and the following SPPS reagents:
  • EC0261 was synthesized by SPPS in seven steps according to the general peptide synthesis procedure described herein starting from H-Cys(4-methoxytrityl)-2-chlorotrityl-Resin, and the following SPPS reagents:
  • EC0268 Tetra-Saccharo-Tris-Asp-Folate Linker EC0268.
  • EC0268 was synthesized by SPPS in nine steps according to the general peptide synthesis procedure described herein starting from H-Cys(4-methoxytrityl)-2-chlorotrityl-Resin, and the following SPPS reagents:
  • EC0463 Tetra-Saccharo-Asp-Folate Linker EC0463.
  • EC0463 was synthesized by SPPS in seven steps according to the general peptide synthesis procedure described herein starting from H-Cys(4-methoxytrityl)-2-chlorotrityl-Resin, and the following SPPS reagents:
  • EC0480 Tetra-Saccharo-Bis- ⁇ -Glu-Arg-Folate Linker EC0480.
  • EC0480 was synthesized by SPPS in nine steps according to the general peptide synthesis procedure described herein starting from H-Cys(4-methoxytrityl)-2-chlorotrityl-Resin, and the following SPPS reagents:
  • Tetra-Saccharo-Bis-Asp-Folate Linker EC0452 Tetra-Saccharo-Bis-Asp-Folate Linker EC0452:
  • EC0452 Tetra-Saccharo-Bis-Asp-Folate Linker EC0452.
  • EC0452 was synthesized by SPPS in nine steps according to the general peptide synthesis procedure described herein starting from H-Cys(4-methoxytrityl)-2-chlorotrityl-Resin, and the following SPPS reagents:
  • EC0457 Tetra-Saccharo-bis-Asp-Folate Linker EC0457.
  • EC0457 was synthesized by SPPS in eight steps according to the general peptide synthesis procedure described herein starting from H-Cys(4-methoxytrityl)-2-chlorotrityl-Resin, and the following SPPS reagents:
  • EC0477 Tetra-Saccharo-tris-Glu-Folate Linker EC0477.
  • EC0477 was synthesized by SPPS in nine steps according to the general peptide synthesis procedure described herein starting from H-Cys(4-methoxytrityl)-2-chlorotrityl-Resin, and the following SPPS reagents:
  • EC0453 was synthesized by SPPS according to the general peptide synthesis procedure described herein starting from H-Cys(4-methoxytrityl)-2-chlorotrityl-Resin, and the following SPPS reagents:
  • Coupling steps In a peptide synthesis vessel add the resin, add the amino acid solution, DIPEA, and PyBOP. Bubble argon for 1 hr. and wash 3 ⁇ with DMF and IPA. Use 20% piperidine in DMF for Fmoc deprotection, 3 ⁇ (10 min), before each amino acid coupling. Continue to complete all 9 coupling steps. At the end treat the resin with 2% hydrazine in DMF 3 ⁇ (5 min) to cleave TFA protecting group on Pteroic acid, wash the resin with DMF (3 ⁇ ), IPA (3 ⁇ ), MeOH (3 ⁇ ), and bubble the resin with argon for 30 min.
  • Cleavage step Cleavage Reagent: 92.5% TFA, 2.5% H 2 O, 2.5% triisopropylsilane, 2.5% ethanedithiol.
  • EC0478 Tetra-Homosaccharo-Tris- ⁇ Glu-Folate Spacer EC0478.
  • EC0478 was synthesized by SPPS in nine steps according to the general peptide synthesis procedure described herein starting from H-Cys(4-methoxytrityl)-2-chlorotrityl-Resin, and the following SPPS reagents:
  • EC0491 Tetra-Saccharoglutamate-Bis- ⁇ Glu-Folate Spacer EC0491.
  • EC0491 was synthesized by SPPS in eight steps according to the general peptide synthesis procedure described herein starting from H-Cys(4-methoxytrityl)-2-chlorotrityl-Resin, and the following SPPS reagents:
  • EC0479 was synthesized by SPPS according to the general peptide synthesis procedure described herein starting from H-Cys(4-methoxytrityl)-2-chlorotrityl-Resin, and the following SPPS reagents:
  • Coupling steps In a peptide synthesis vessel add the resin, add the amino acid solution, DIPEA, and PyBOP. Bubble argon for 1 hr. and wash 3 ⁇ with DMF and IPA. Use 20% piperidine in DMF for Fmoc deprotection, 3 ⁇ (10 min), before each amino acid coupling. Continue to complete all 9 coupling steps. At the end treat the resin with 2% hydrazine in DMF 3 ⁇ (5 min) to cleave TFA protecting group on Pteroic acid, wash the resin with DMF (3 ⁇ ), IPA (3 ⁇ ), MeOH (3 ⁇ ), and bubble the resin with argon for 30 min.
  • Cleavage step Reagent: 92.5% TFA, 2.5% H 2 O, 2.5% triisopropylsilane, 2.5% ethanedithiol.
  • Coupling steps In a peptide synthesis vessel add the resin, add the amino acid solution, DIPEA, and PyBOP. Bubble argon for 1 hr. and wash 3 ⁇ with DMF and IPA. Use 20% piperidine in DMF for Fmoc deprotection, 3 ⁇ (10 min), before each amino acid coupling. Continue to complete all 9 coupling steps. At the end treat the resin with 2% hydrazine in DMF 3 ⁇ (5 min) to cleave TFA protecting group on Pteroic acid, wash the resin with DMF (3 ⁇ ), IPA (3 ⁇ ), MeOH (3 ⁇ ), and bubble the resin with argon for 30 min.
  • Cleavage step Reagent: 92.5% TFA, 2.5% H 2 O, 2.5% triisopropylsilane, 2.5% ethanedithiol.
  • binding ligand-linker intermediates EC0233, EC0244, EC0257, and EC0261, were prepared as described herein.
  • Huisgen azide for forming 1,2,3-triazole (a) NaN 3 ; (b) Ag 2 CO 3 , DCM, molecular sieves; (c) LiOH, MeOH, H 2 O.
  • Vinblastine Pyridinyl Disulfide 2-[(Benzotriazole-1-yl-(oxycarbonyloxy)-ethyldisulfanyl]-pyridine HCl (601 mg) and 378 ⁇ L it of DIPEA were sequentially added to a solution of desacetyl vinblastine hydrazide (668 mg) in 5 ml of DCM at 0° C. The reaction was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred for 3 hours. TLC (15% MeOH in DCM) showed complete conversion. The mixture was purified by silica gel chromatography (1:9 MeOH/DCM).
  • the reaction mixture is diluted with 2.0 mM sodium phosphate buffer (pH 7.0, ca 150 volume percent) and the THF is removed by evacuation.
  • the resulting suspension is filtered and the filtrate may be purified by preparative HPLC (as described herein). Fraction are lyophilized to isolate the conjugates.
  • the foregoing method is equally applicable for preparing other tubulysin conjugates by the appropriate selection of the tubulysin starting compound.
  • EC0234 (Mono-Saccharo-Folate Vinblastine Conjugate) including a hydrophilic spacer linker.
  • folate linker (EC0233, 22 mg, 0.030 mmol) was dissolved in 2 mL of water and bubbled with argon for 10 mM.
  • a 0.1N NaHCO 3 solution was argon bubbled for 10 min. pH of the linker solution was carefully adjusted to 6.9 using the 0.1N NaHCO 3 solution.
  • the vinblastine pyridinyl disulfide (27 mg, 0.028 mmol) in 2 mL of tetrahydrofuran (THF) was added slowly to the above solution.
  • EC0246 (Bis-Saccharo-Folate Vinblastine Conjugate).
  • folate linker (EC0244, 30 mg, 0.030 mmol) was dissolved in 5 mL of water and bubbled with argon for 10 min.
  • a 0.1N NaHCO 3 solution was argon bubbled for 10 min. pH of the linker solution was carefully adjusted to 6.9 using the 0.1N NaHCO 3 solution.
  • the vinblastine pyridinyl disulfide (27 mg, 0.028 mmol) in 5 mL of tetrahydrofuran (THF) was added slowly to the above solution.
  • EC0258 Tris-Saccharo-Asp-Folate Vinblastine Conjugate.
  • folate linker (EC0257, 37 mg, 0.031 mmol) was dissolved in 5 mL of water and bubbled with argon for 10 min.
  • a 0.1N NaHCO 3 solution was argon bubbled for 10 min. pH of the linker solution was carefully adjusted to 6.9 using the 0.1N NaHCO 3 solution.
  • the vinblastine pyridinyl disulfide (27.5 mg, 0.028 mmol) in 5 mL of tetrahydrofuran (THF) was added slowly to the above solution.
  • EC0263 Tris-Saccharo-Bis-Asp-Folate Vinblastine Conjugate.
  • folate linker EC0261, 37 mg, 0.029 mmol
  • a 0.1N NaHCO 3 solution was argon bubbled for 10 min. pH of the linker solution was carefully adjusted to 6.9 using the 0.1N NaHCO 3 solution.
  • the vinblastine pyridinyl disulfide (25.5 mg, 0.026 mmol) in 5 mL of tetrahydrofuran (THF) was added slowly to the above solution.
  • EC0434 Tetra-Saccharo-Tris-Asp-Folate Vinblastine Conjugate.
  • folate linker EC0268, 20 mg, 0.012 mmol
  • a 0.1N NaHCO 3 solution was argon bubbled for 10 min. pH of the linker solution was carefully adjusted to 6.9 using the 0.1N NaHCO 3 solution.
  • the vinblastine pyridinyl disulfide (12 mg, 0.012 mmol) in 3 mL of tetrahydrofuran (THF) was added slowly to the above solution.
  • EC0454 Tetra-Saccharo-Bis-Asp-Folate Vinblastine Conjugate.
  • folate linker (EC0452, 34 mg, 0.02 mmol) was dissolved in 3 mL of water and bubbled with argon for 10 min.
  • a 0.1N NaHCO 3 solution was argon bubbled for 10 min. pH of the linker solution was carefully adjusted to 6.9 using the 0.1N NaHCO 3 solution.
  • the vinblastine pyridinyl disulfide (20 mg, 0.02 mmol) in 3 mL of tetrahydrofuran (THF) was added slowly to the above solution.
  • EC0455 Tetra-Saccharo-bis-Asp-Folate Vinblastine Conjugate.
  • folate linker EC0457, 20 mg, 0.013 mmol
  • a 0.1N NaHCO 3 solution was argon bubbled for 10 min. pH of the linker solution was carefully adjusted to 6.9 using the 0.1N NaHCO 3 solution.
  • the vinblastine pyridinyl disulfide (18 mg, 0.018 mmol) in 1.5 mL of tetrahydrofuran (THF) was added slowly to the above solution.
  • folate linker (EC0453, 46 mg, 0.029 mmol) was dissolved in 3 mL of water, which had been bubbled with argon for 10 min.
  • a saturated NaHCO 3 solution was argon bubbled for 10 min.
  • the pH of the linker solution was carefully adjusted, with argon bubbling, to 6.9 using the NaHCO 3 solution.
  • the vinblastine pyridinyl disulfide (32 mg, 1.1 eq) in 3 mL of tetrahydrofuran (THF) was added quickly to the above solution. The resulting clear solution was stirred under argon.
  • folate linker (EC0479, 12 mg, 0.0058 mmol) was dissolved in 2.5 mL of water, which had been bubbled with argon for 10 min.
  • a saturated NaHCO 3 solution was argon bubbled for 10 min.
  • the pH of the linker solution was carefully adjusted, with argon bubbling, to 6.9 using the NaHCO 3 solution.
  • the vinblastine pyridinyl disulfide (5.7 mg, 1.0 eq) in 2.5 mL of tetrahydrofuran (THF) was added quickly to the above solution. The resulting clear solution was stirred under argon.
  • EC0484 Tetra-Saccharo-Bis- ⁇ -Glu-Arg-Folate Vinblastine Conjugate.
  • folate linker EC0480, 15 mg, 0.009 mmol
  • a 0.1N NaHCO 3 solution was argon bubbled for 10 min. pH of the linker solution was carefully adjusted to 6.9 using the 0.1N NaHCO 3 solution.
  • the vinblastine pyridinyl disulfide (8.8 mg, 0.009 mmol) in 3 mL of tetrahydrofuran (THF) was added slowly to the above solution.
  • EC0487 Tetra-Saccharo-Asp-Folate Vinblastine Conjugate.
  • folate linker EC0463, 21 mg, 0.015 mmol
  • a 0.1N NaHCO 3 solution was argon bubbled for 10 min. pH of the linker solution was carefully adjusted to 6.9 using the 0.1N NaHCO 3 solution.
  • the vinblastine pyridinyl disulfide (15 mg, 0.015 mmol) in 3 mL of tetrahydrofuran (THF) was added slowly to the above solution.
  • folate linker (EC0488, 26 mg, 0.015 mmol) was dissolved in 2.5 mL of water, which had been bubbled with argon for 10 min.
  • a saturated NaHCO 3 solution was argon bubbled for 10 min.
  • the pH of the linker solution was carefully adjusted, with argon bubbling, to 6.9 using the NaHCO 3 solution.
  • the vinblastine pyridinyl disulfide (15 mg, 1.0 eq) in 2.5 mL of tetrahydrofuran (THF) was added quickly to the above solution. The resulting clear solution was stirred under argon.
  • EC0490 Tetra-HomoSaccharo-Tris- ⁇ Glu-Folate Vinblastine Conjugate.
  • folate linker EC0478, 22 mg, 0.013 mmol
  • a 0.1N NaHCO 3 solution was argon bubbled for 10 min. pH of the linker solution was carefully adjusted to 6.9 using the 0.1N NaHCO 3 solution.
  • the vinblastine pyridinyl disulfide (mg, mmol) in 3 mL of tetrahydrofuran (THF) was added slowly to the above solution.
  • EC0492 Tetra-HomoSaccharo-Tris- ⁇ Glu-Folate Vinblastine Conjugate.
  • folate linker EC0491, 26 mg, 0.013 mmol
  • a 0.1N NaHCO 3 solution was argon bubbled for 10 min. pH of the linker solution was carefully adjusted to 6.9 using the 0.1N NaHCO 3 solution.
  • the vinblastine pyridinyl disulfide 13 mg, 0.013 mmol
  • THF tetrahydrofuran
  • EC0493 Tetra-Saccharo-tris-Glu-Folate Vinblastine Conjugate.
  • folate linker EC0477, 25 mg, 0.015 mmol
  • a 0.1N NaHCO 3 solution was argon bubbled for 10 min. pH of the linker solution was carefully adjusted to 6.9 using the 0.1N NaHCO 3 solution.
  • the vinblastine pyridinyl disulfide (20 mg, 0.020 mmol) in 1.5 mL of tetrahydrofuran (THF) was added slowly to the above solution.
  • glucuronide compounds EC0400 and EC0423, where the saccharide based group is illustratively introduced using click chemistry, were also prepared as described herein.
  • oligoamide spacer compounds where the oligoamide includes an EDTE derivative were prepared as described herein.
  • ⁇ -alkyl glycosides of 2-deoxyhexapyranose compounds and PEG-linked compounds may be prepared as described herein, using click chemistry to attach the hydrophilic groups onto the spacer linker.
  • EC0305 lacking a hydrophilic spacer linker.
  • EC89 (86 mg) was taken in deionized water (4.0 mL, bubbled with argon for 10 minutes prior to use) and the pH of the suspension was adjusted by saturated NaHCO 3 (bubbled with argon for 10 minutes prior to use) to about 6.9 (the suspension became a solution when the pH increased). Additional deionized water was added to the solution to make a total volume of 5.0 mL and to the aqueous solution was added immediately a solution of EC0312 (97 mg) in THF (5.0 mL). The reaction mixture became homogenous quickly.
  • tubulysin conjugates including a hydrophilic spacer linker were prepared using the process and syntheses described herein from tubulysins.
  • the boronic acid and the linker may form intermolecular interactions with the carbohydrate side chains.
  • the boronic acid forms boronate ester complexes with one or two hydroxyl groups.
  • Such ester complexes may be formed with vicinal hydroxyls as well as with 1,3-hydroxyls.
  • the boronate ester complexes may form at the end of the carbohydrate fragment, or in the interior of the carbohydrate fragment. It is further appreciated that in aqueous solution, the boronate ester complexes may be in equilibrium with the boronic acid.
  • EC0323 was not competitive with folic acid, and exhibited the same IC50 with and without excess folic acid present.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Oncology (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Genetics & Genomics (AREA)
  • Biochemistry (AREA)
  • Proteomics, Peptides & Aminoacids (AREA)
  • Tropical Medicine & Parasitology (AREA)
  • Communicable Diseases (AREA)
  • Biophysics (AREA)
  • Biotechnology (AREA)
  • Virology (AREA)
  • Hematology (AREA)
  • Medicinal Preparation (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
  • Peptides Or Proteins (AREA)
  • Medicines Containing Antibodies Or Antigens For Use As Internal Diagnostic Agents (AREA)

Abstract

Described herein are compositions and methods for use in targeted drug delivery using cell receptor binding drug delivery conjugates containing hydrophilic spacer linkers for use in imaging, diagnosing, and/or treating diseases and disease states caused by pathogenic cell populations.

Description

    CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
  • This application claims the benefit of priority under 35 U.S.C. §119(e) of U.S. provisional patent application Ser. Nos. 60/946,092 and 61/036,186, filed Jun. 25, 2007 and Mar. 13, 2008, respectively; the disclosures of which are incorporated herein in their entirety by reference.
    • TECHNICAL FIELD
  • The present invention relates to compositions and methods for use in targeted drug delivery. More particularly, the invention is directed to cell-surface receptor binding drug delivery conjugates containing hydrophilic spacer linkers for use in treating disease states caused by pathogenic cell populations and to methods and pharmaceutical compositions that use and include such conjugates.
    • BACKGROUND
  • The mammalian immune system provides a means for the recognition and elimination of tumor cells, other pathogenic cells, and invading foreign pathogens. While the immune system normally provides a strong line of defense, there are many instances where cancer cells, other pathogenic cells, or infectious agents evade a host immune response and proliferate or persist with concomitant host pathogenicity. Chemotherapeutic agents and radiation therapies have been developed to eliminate, for example, replicating neoplasms. However, many of the currently available chemotherapeutic agents and radiation therapy regimens have adverse side effects because they work not only to destroy pathogenic cells, but they also affect normal host cells, such as cells of the hematopoietic system. The adverse side effects of these anticancer drugs highlight the need for the development of new therapies selective for pathogenic cell populations and with reduced host toxicity.
  • Researchers have developed therapeutic protocols for destroying pathogenic cells by targeting cytotoxic compounds to such cells. Many of these protocols utilize toxins conjugated to antibodies that bind to antigens unique to or overexpressed by the pathogenic cells in an attempt to minimize delivery of the toxin to normal cells. Using this approach, certain immunotoxins have been developed consisting of antibodies directed to specific antigens on pathogenic cells, the antibodies being linked to toxins such as ricin, Pseudomonas exotoxin, Diptheria toxin, and tumor necrosis factor. These immunotoxins target pathogenic cells, such as tumor cells, bearing the specific antigens recognized by the antibody (Olsnes, S., Immunol. Today, 10, pp. 291-295, 1989; Melby, E. L., Cancer Res., 53(8), pp. 1755-1760, 1993; Better, M. D., PCT Publication Number WO 91/07418, published May 30, 1991).
  • Another approach for targeting populations of pathogenic cells, such as cancer cells or foreign pathogens, in a host is to enhance the host immune response against the pathogenic cells to avoid the need for administration of compounds that may also exhibit independent host toxicity. One reported strategy for immunotherapy is to bind antibodies, for example, genetically engineered multimeric antibodies, to the surface of tumor cells to display the constant region of the antibodies on the cell surface and thereby induce tumor cell killing by various immune-system mediated processes (De Vita, V. T., Biologic Therapy of Cancer, 2d ed. Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1995; Soulillou, J. P., U.S. Pat. No. 5,672,486). However, these approaches have been complicated by the difficulties in defining tumor-specific antigens. Accordingly, additional compounds and methods are needed for selectively targeting pathogenic cell populations.
    • SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
  • It has been discovered that therapeutic agents, diagnostic agents, and imaging agents may be conjugated to other compounds to control or alter their behavior, biodistribution, metabolism, and/or clearance in vivo. In one illustrative embodiment of the invention, conjugates of compounds are described that include a hydrophilic spacer linker. In one aspect, conjugates of compounds are described that include both a hydrophilic spacer linker and a targeting ligand. Illustrative of such conjugates are compounds of the following formula described herein

  • B-L-A
  • wherein B is a receptor binding ligand that binds to a target cell receptor, L is a linker that comprises one or more hydrophilic spacer linkers, and A is a diagnostic, therapeutic, or imaging agent that is desirably delivered to the cell.
  • In another embodiment, non-receptor binding targeted compounds of the following formula are described herein:

  • L-A
  • where L is a linker that comprises one or more hydrophilic spacer linkers and A is diagnostic, therapeutic, or imaging agent. In one variation, the linker L does not include a releasable linker. In another variation, the linker L includes a releasable linker. In another embodiment, at least one of the hydrophilic spacer linkers is formed from or includes at least one carbohydrate. In one variation, the carbohydrate forms part of the linker chain connecting B and A. In another variation, the carbohydrate forms part of a side chain attached to the linker chain connecting B and A.
  • It is appreciated that in each of the above embodiments, more than one receptor binding ligand B may be attached to the linkers described herein. It is further appreciated that more than one agent A may be attached to the linkers described herein. Such multi-ligand and/or multi-drug conjugates are also described herein, where the linker comprises a hydrophilic spacer linker.
  • In another embodiment, compounds are described herein that have reduced uptake by the liver and are less likely to be cleared by the liver. In one aspect, such compounds are preferentially cleared by the renal processes as compared to hepatic processes.
  • The agent or agents A include therapeutic drugs, diagnostic agents, imaging agents, and any other compound that is desirably or advantageously delivered to a cell by targeting a cell receptor. Illustrative drugs include cytotoxic drugs, anti-inflammatory agents, and the like. Illustrative diagnostic agents and imaging agents include PET imaging agents, fluorescent imaging agents, radioligands, radioligand complexing agents, and others.
  • In the embodiments of compounds, compositions, and methods described herein, the cells that may be targeted with the therapeutic, diagnostic, and/or imaging agents A include a wide variety, such as but not limited to cancer cells, bacterial cells, tumor cells, monocytes, activated macrophages, progenitor cells, such as endothelial progenitor cells, other inflammatory cells, atherosclerotic plaques, infections, and others. The targeting of the cell is accomplished by the appropriate selection of a cell receptor binding ligand B. It is appreciated that selective or specific targeting of a cell in vivo may be accomplished by selecting a receptor that is preferentially expressed or overexpressed by the target cell. Illustratively, the target cell preferentially expresses or overexpresses a vitamin receptor, such as folate receptors.
  • In another embodiment, the conjugates described herein are included in pharmaceutical compositions in amounts effective to treat diseases and disease states associated with pathogenic populations of cells.
  • In another embodiment, the conjugates described herein, and pharmaceutical compositions containing them are used in methods for treating diseases and disease states associated with pathogenic populations of cells.
    • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
  • FIG. 1 shows the relative binding affinity of EC234, DPM for folic acid () and EC0234 (▪).
  • FIG. 2 shows the activity of EC0258 against KB cells (2 h pulse/72 h chase) for EC258 () and EC258+excess folic acid (∘).
  • FIG. 3A shows the effect of EC0234 and EC0246 against M109 tumors in mice, untreated controls (▪), EC145 standard (TIW 3 μmol/kg, 3 wks) (), EC0234 (TIW 3 μmol/kg, 3 wks) (▾), and EC0246 (TIW 3 μmol/kg, 3 wks) (▴).
  • FIG. 3B shows the effect of EC0234 and EC0246 on percentage body weight change, untreated controls (▪), EC145 standard (TIW 3 μmol/kg, 3 wks) (), EC0234 (TIW 3 μmol/kg, 3 wks) (▾), and EC0246 (TIW 3 μmol/kg, 3 wks) (▴); indicating that no gross toxicity was observed during treatment.
  • FIG. 4A shows the effect on KB tumor volume in mice of EC0396 (▾), EC145 (▴) and PBS control (▪) dosed at 2 μmol/kg TIW for two weeks (the vertical line indicates the last dosing day).
  • FIG. 4B shows the effect on percentage body weight change of EC0396 (▾), EC145 (▴) and PBS control (▪) dosed at 2 μmol/kg TIW for two weeks (the vertical line indicates the last closing day); indicating that no gross toxicity was observed during treatment.
  • FIG. 5A shows the effect on KB tumor volume of EC0400 (), EC145 (▴) and PBS control (▪) dosed at 2 μmol/kg TIW for two weeks (the vertical line indicates the last dosing day).
  • FIG. 5B shows the effect on percentage body weight change of EC0400 (), EC145 (▴) and PBS control (▪) dosed at 2 μmol/kg TIW for two weeks (the vertical line indicates the last dosing day); indicating that no gross toxicity was observed during treatment.
  • FIG. 6A shows the effect on tumor volume of EC0429 (∇) and EC145 (▴), dosed at 2 μmol/kg TIW for two weeks (the vertical line indicates the last dosing day) compared to untreated controls () for M109 tumors in Balb/c mice.
  • FIG. 6B shows the effect on percentage body weight change EC0429 (∇) and EC145 (▴), dosed at 2 μmol/kg TIW for two weeks (the vertical line indicates the last dosing day) compared to untreated controls (); indicating that no gross toxicity was observed during treatment.
  • FIG. 7A shows the effect on tumor volume of EC0434 (Δ) and EC145 (▴), dosed at 2 μmol/kg TIW for two weeks (the vertical line indicates the last dosing day) compared to untreated controls () for s.c. M109 tumors in Balb/c mice.
  • FIG. 7B shows the effect on percentage body weight change of EC0434 (Δ) and EC145 (▴), dosed at 2 μmol/kg TIW for two weeks (the vertical line indicates the last dosing day) compared to untreated controls (); indicating that no gross toxicity was observed during treatment.
  • FIG. 8A shows the effect on tumor volume of EC0305 (s), EC0436 (▾) and PBS control (▪) dosed at 2 μmol/kg TIW for two weeks (the vertical line indicates the last dosing day) for s.c. M109 tumors in Balb/c mice.
  • FIG. 8B shows the effect on percentage body weight change of EC0305 (), EC0436 (▾) and PBS control (▪) dosed at 2 μmol/kg TIW for two weeks (the vertical line indicates the last dosing day); indicating that no gross toxicity was observed during treatment.
  • FIG. 9 shows the percentage body weight change of Balb/c mice having s.c. M109 tumors treated intravenously three times in a week for one week with PBS (untreated controls) (), EC0436 (TIW 2 μmol/kg) (▴), EC0436 (TIW 2.5 μmol/kg) (▾), EC0436 (TIW 3 μmol/kg) (▪), EC0305 (TIW 2 μmol/kg) (Δ), EC0305 (TIW 2.5 μmol/kg) (∇), and EC0305 (TIW 3 μmol/kg) (□).
  • FIG. 10A shows the effect on s.c. KB tumors in nu/nu mice by EC0565 at 3 μmol/kg (qdx5 for two weeks) (), compared to PBS treated controls (▪). From the data, a Log Cell Kill (LCK) value of 1.2 can be determined (values greater than about 0.7 are indicative of an active anti-cancer compound).
  • FIG. 10B shows the effect on on percentage body weight change by EC0565 at 3 μmol/kg (qdx5 for two weeks) (), compared to PBS treated controls (▪); indicating that no gross toxicity was observed during treatment.
  • FIG. 11 shows the total DAVLBH biliary excretion from various DAVLBH conjugates at 2 μmol/kg i.v. bolus in a hepatobiliary excretion in bile duct assay in cannulated rats. The percent of total dose in the bile was measured for EC145=8.7% (), EC0409=7.9% (♦), EC0429=8.6% (▪), EC0434=2.8% (▾), In addition, EC145 shows an AUC=1092 (); last time point collected was 139 min; and EC0434 shows an AUC=260 (▪); the 120, 135, and 360 minute time points were all below level of quantitation, i.e. <0.65 μM.
  • FIG. 12 shows the effect of ribose-based spacers on bile clearance and the impact of extended derivatization. The numbers above bars correspond to the number of hydrophilic spacers in the linker.
  • FIG. 13 shows that EC0565 induces dose-responsive inhibition of RPS6 and p70S6K in KB cells (1 h pulse/4 h chase) using a 30 min camera exposure, where C=Control (untreated cells); FAC=Folic acid control (100 μM).
  • FIG. 14 shows the cytotoxicity of bortezomib versus the methylthiol bortezomib derivative (EC0501). IC50 bortezomib, 20 nM (); EC0501, 240 nM (▪).
  • FIG. 15 shows that hydrophilic spacer linkers enable specific activity of mono- and bis-thio-velcade folate conjugates against RAW264.7 cells. Cell viability after a 5 h pulse, followed by a 72 h chase (MTT); bortezomib (▪), EC0501 (□), EC0522 (▴), EC0522 plus excess folic acid (V).
  • FIG. 16 shows cell viability (5 h pulse/72 h chase) (XTT) after treatment with EC0595 (13 nM IC50) (V), EC0595 plus excess folic acid (∇), bortezomib (▪), EC0525 (46 nM IC50) (), EC0525 plus excess folic acid (∘).
  • FIG. 17 shows cell viability after a 24 h incubation (XTT) with bortezomib (▪), EC0587 (), EC0587 plus excess folic acid (∘).
  • FIG. 18 shows inhibition of LPS stimulated proteosome activity in RAW 264.7 cells (5 h pulse/24 h chase), LPS 100 ng/mL, 30 m 20S proteosome/substrate reaction time by bortezomib (▪), EC0522 (▾), EC0522 plus excess folic acid (∇), EC0525 (), EC0525 plus excess folic acid (∘), EC0595 (♦), EC0595 plus excess folic acid (□); IC50 is ca. 30 nM for EC0595 and EC0525.
  • FIG. 19 shows activity against RAW cells (5 h pulse/72 h chase) after treatment with α-amantin (▪), EC0592 (IC50 3.7 nM) (), EC0592 plus excess folic acid (∘).
    •  DETAILED DESCRIPTION
  • Drug delivery conjugates are described herein consisting of a receptor binding ligand (B), a polyvalent linker (L) comprising one or more hydrophilic spacer linkers, and a diagnostic, therapeutic, or imaging agent (A) that is desirably delivered to a cell. The binding ligand (B) is covalently attached to the polyvalent linker (L), and the diagnostic, therapeutic, or imaging agent (A), or analog or derivative thereof, is also covalently attached to the polyvalent linker (L). It is to be understood that the diagnostic, therapeutic, or imaging agent (A) includes analogs and derivatives thereof that are attached to the linker (L). The polyvalent linker (L) comprises one or more spacer linkers and/or releasable linkers, and combinations thereof, in any order. In one variation, releasable linkers, and optional spacer linkers are covalently bonded to each other to form the linker. In another variation, a releasable linker is directly attached to the agent (A), or analog or derivative thereof. In another variation, a releasable linker is directly attached to the binding ligand. In another variation, either or both the binding ligand and the agent (A), or analog or derivative thereof, is attached to a releasable linker through one or more spacer linkers. In another variation, each of the binding ligand and the agent (A), or analog or derivative thereof, is attached to a releasable linker, each of which may be directly attached to each other, or covalently attached through one or more spacer linkers.
  • From the foregoing, it should be appreciated that the arrangement of the binding ligand, and the agent (A), or analog or derivative thereof, and the various releasable and optional spacer linkers may be varied widely. In one aspect, the binding ligand, and the agent (A), or analog or derivative thereof, and the various releasable and optional spacer linkers are attached to each other through heteroatoms, such as nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, phosphorus, silicon, and the like. In variations, the heteroatoms, excluding oxygen, may be in various states of oxidation, such as N(OH), S(O), S(O)2, P(O), P(O)2, P(O)3, and the like. In other variation, the heteroatoms may be grouped to form divalent radicals, such as for example hydroxylamines, hydrazines, hydrazones, sulfonates, phosphinates, phosphonates, and the like, including radicals of the formulae —(NHR1NHR2)—, —SO—, —(SO2)—, and —N(R3)O—, wherein R1, R2, and R3 are each independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, substituted aryl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, and alkoxyalkyl. In another variation, more than one binding ligand is attached to the polyvalent linker. In another variation, more than one agent (A) is attached to the polyvalent linker. In another variation, more than one binding ligand and more than one agent (A) is attached to the polyvalent linker.
  • In one embodiment, the receptor binding ligand is a vitamin receptor binding ligand such as a vitamin, or an analog or a derivative thereof, capable of binding to vitamin receptors. In another embodiment, the binding ligand is a vitamin, or analog or derivative thereof, attached to a releasable linker which is attached to the drug through a linker that is formed from one or more spacer linkers and/or releasable linkers and/or hydrophilic spacer linkers. In one variation, both the drug and the vitamin, or analog or derivative thereof, can each be attached to spacer linkers, where the spacer linkers are attached to each other through one or more releasable linkers. In addition, both the drug and the vitamin, or analog or derivative thereof, can each be attached to one or more releasable linkers, where the releasable linkers are attached to each other or through a spacer linker. Each of these radicals may be connected through existing or additional heteroatoms on the binding ligand, agent A, or releasable, hydrophilic spacer, or additional spacer linker.
  • The binding site for the binding ligand (B) can include receptors for any binding ligand (B), or a derivative or analog thereof, capable of specifically binding to a receptor wherein the receptor or other protein is uniquely expressed, overexpressed, or preferentially expressed by a population of pathogenic cells. A surface-presented protein uniquely expressed, overexpressed, or preferentially expressed by the pathogenic cells is typically a receptor that is either not present or present at lower concentrations on non-pathogenic cells providing a means for selective elimination, labeling or diagnosis of the pathogenic cells. The binding ligand drug delivery conjugates may be capable of high affinity binding to receptors on cancer cells or other types of pathogenic cells. The high affinity binding can be inherent to the binding ligand or the binding affinity can be enhanced by the use of a chemically modified ligand (e.g., an analog or a derivative of a vitamin).
  • The binding ligand drug delivery conjugates described herein can be formed from, for example, a wide variety of vitamins or receptor-binding vitamin analogs/derivatives, linkers, and drugs. The binding ligand drug delivery conjugates described herein are capable of selectively targeting a population of pathogenic cells in the host animal due to preferential expression of a receptor for the binding ligand, such as a vitamin, accessible for ligand binding, on the pathogenic cells. Illustrative vitamin moieties that can be used as the binding ligand (B) include carnitine, inositol, lipoic acid, pyridoxal, ascorbic acid, niacin, pantothenic acid, folic acid, riboflavin, thiamine, biotin, vitamin B12, other water soluble vitamins, the B vitamins, and the lipid soluble vitamins A, D, E and K. These vitamins, and their receptor-binding analogs and derivatives, constitute an illustrative targeting entity that can be coupled with the drug by a bivalent linker (L) to form a binding ligand (B) drug delivery conjugate as described herein. The term vitamin is understood to include vitamin analogs and/or derivatives, unless otherwise indicated. Illustratively, pteroic acid which is a derivative of folate, biotin analogs such as biocytin, biotin sulfoxide, oxybiotin and other biotin receptor-binding compounds, and the like, are considered to be vitamins, vitamin analogs, and vitamin derivatives. It should be appreciated that vitamin analogs or derivatives as described herein refer to vitamins that incorporates an heteroatom through which the vitamin analog or derivative is covalently bound to the bivalent linker (L).
  • Illustrative vitamin moieties include folic acid, biotin, riboflavin, thiamine, vitamin B12, and receptor-binding analogs and derivatives of these vitamin molecules, and other related vitamin receptor binding molecules.
  • In another embodiment, the cell receptor is a folate receptor, and the targeting ligand B is a folate receptor binding ligand. In another embodiment, B is a folate, such as folic acid, or an analog or derivative of folic acid that binds to folic acid receptors. It is to be understood as used herein, that the term folate is used both individually and collectively to refer to folic acid itself, and/or to such analogs and derivatives of folic acid that are capable of binding to folate receptors. In another embodiment, B is a compound capable of selectively or specifically binding to a folate receptor, such as an antibody.
  • Illustrative embodiments of folate analogs and/or derivatives include folinic acid, pteropolyglutamic acid, and folate receptor-binding pteridines such as tetrahydropterins, dihydrofolates, tetrahydrofolates, and their deaza and dideaza analogs. The terms “deaza” and “dideaza” analogs refer to the art-recognized analogs having a carbon atom substituted for one or two nitrogen atoms in the naturally occurring folic acid structure, or analog or derivative thereof. For example, the deaza analogs include the 1-deaza, 3-deaza, 5-deaza, 8-deaza, and 10-deaza analogs of folate. The dideaza analogs include, for example, 1,5-dideaza, 5,10-dideaza, 8,10-dideaza, and 5,8-dideaza analogs of folate. Other folates useful as complex forming ligands include the folate receptor-binding analogs aminopterin, amethopterin (methotrexate), N10-methylfolate, 2-deamino-hydroxyfolate, deaza analogs such as 1-deazamethopterin or 3-deazamethopterin, and 3′,5′-dichloro-4-amino-4-deoxy-N10-methylpteroylglutamic acid (dichloromethotrexate). The foregoing folic acid analogs and/or derivatives are conventionally termed folates, reflecting their ability to bind with folate-receptors, and such ligands when conjugated with exogenous molecules are effective to enhance transmembrane transport, such as via folate-mediated endocytosis as described herein. Other suitable binding ligands capable of binding to folate receptors to initiate receptor mediated endocytotic transport of the complex include antibodies to the folate receptor. An exogenous molecule in complex with an antibody to a folate receptor is used to trigger transmembrane transport of the complex.
  • Additional analogs of folic acid that bind to folic acid receptors are described in US Patent Application Publication Serial Nos. 2005/0227985 and 2004/0242582, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference. Illustratively, such folate analogs have the general formula:
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00001
  • wherein X and Y are each-independently selected from the group consisting of halo, R2, OR2, SR3, and NR4R5;
  • U, V, and W represent divalent moieties each independently selected from the group consisting of —(R6a)C═, —N═, —(R6a)C(R7a)—, and —N(R4a)—; Q is selected from the group consisting of C and CH; T is selected from the group consisting of S, O, N, and —C═C—;
  • A1 and A2 are each independently selected from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur, —C(Z)—, —C(Z)O—, —OC(Z)—, —N(R4b)—, —C(Z)N(R4b)—, —N(R4b)C(Z)—, —OC(Z)N(R4b)—, —N(R4b)C(Z)O—, —N(R4b)C(Z)N(R5b)—, —S(O)—, —S(O)2—, —N(R4a)S(O)2—, —C(R6b)(R7b)—, —N(C≡CH)—, —N(CH2C≡CH)—, C1-C12 alkylene, and C1-C12 alkyeneoxy, where Z is oxygen or sulfur;
  • R1 is selected-from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, C1-C12 alkyl, and C1-C12 alkoxy; R2, R3, R4, R4a, R4b, R5, R5b, R6b and R7b are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, C1-C12 alkyl, C1-C12 alkoxy, C1-C12 alkanoyl, C1-C12 alkenyl, C1-C12 alkynyl, (C1-C12 alkoxy)carbonyl, and (C1-C12 alkylamino)carbonyl;
  • R6 and R7 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, C1-C12 alkyl, and C1-C12 alkoxy; or, R6 and R7 are taken together to form a carbonyl group; R6a and R7a are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, C1-C12 alkyl, and C1-C12 alkoxy; or R6a and R7a are taken together to form a carbonyl group;
  • L is a divalent linker as described herein; and
  • n, p, r, s and t are each independently either 0 or 1.
  • As used herein, it is to be understood that the term folate refers both individually to folic acid used in forming a conjugate, or alternatively to a folate analog or derivative thereof that is capable of binding to folate or folic acid receptors.
  • In one aspect of such folate analogs, when s is 1, t is 0, and when s is 0, t is 1. In another aspect of such folate analogs, both n and r are 1, and linker La is a naturally occurring amino acid covalently linked to A2 at its alpha-amino group through an amide bond. Illustrative amino acids include aspartic acid, glutamic acid, lysine, cysteine, and the like. The vitamin can be folate which includes a nitrogen, and in this embodiment, the spacer linkers can be alkylenecarbonyl, cycloalkylenecarbonyl, carbonylalkylcarbonyl, 1-alkylenesuccinimid-3-yl, 1-(carbonylalkyl)succinimid-3-yl, wherein each of the spacer linkers is optionally substituted with a substituent X1, and the spacer linker is bonded to the folate nitrogen to form an imide or an alkylamide. In this embodiment, the substituents X1 can be alkyl, hydroxyalkyl, amino, aminoalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, sulfhydrylalkyl, alkylthioalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, guanidinoalkyl, R4-carbonyl, R5-carbonylalkyl, R6-acylamino, and R7-acylaminoalkyl, wherein R4 and R5 are each independently selected from amino acids, amino acid derivatives, and peptides, and wherein R6 and R7 are each independently selected from amino acids, amino acid derivatives, and peptides.
  • Illustrative embodiments of vitamin analogs and/or derivatives also include analogs and derivatives of biotin such as biocytin, biotin sulfoxide, oxybiotin and other biotin receptor-binding compounds, and the like. It is appreciated that analogs and derivatives of the other vitamins described herein are also contemplated herein. In one embodiment, vitamins that can be used as the binding ligand (B) in the drug delivery conjugates described herein include those that bind to vitamin receptors expressed specifically on activated macrophages, such as the folate receptor, which binds folate, or an analog or derivative thereof as described herein.
  • In addition to the vitamins described herein, it is appreciated that other binding ligands may be coupled with the drugs and linkers described and contemplated herein to form binding ligand-linker-drug conjugates capable of facilitating delivery of the drug to a desired target. These other binding ligands, in addition to the vitamins and their analogs and derivatives described, may be used to form drug delivery conjugates capable of binding to target cells. In general, any binding ligand (B) of a cell surface receptor may be advantageously used as a targeting ligand to which a linker-drug conjugate can be attached.
  • Illustrative other ligands described herein include peptide ligands identified from library screens, tumor cell-specific peptides, tumor cell-specific aptamers, tumor cell-specific carbohydrates, tumor cell-specific monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies, Fab or scFv (i.e., a single chain variable region) fragments of antibodies such as, for example, an Fab fragment of an antibody directed to EphA2 or other proteins specifically expressed or uniquely accessible on metastatic cancer cells, small organic molecules derived from combinatorial libraries, growth factors, such as EGF, FGF, insulin, and insulin-like growth factors, and homologous polypeptides, somatostatin and its analogs, transferrin, lipoprotein complexes, bile salts, selectins, steroid hormones, Arg-Gly-Asp containing peptides, retinoids, various Galectins, δ-opioid receptor ligands, cholecystokinin A receptor ligands, ligands specific for angiotensin AT1 or AT2 receptors, peroxisome proliferator-activated receptor λ ligands, β-lactam antibiotics such as penicillin, small organic molecules including antimicrobial drugs, and other molecules that bind specifically to a receptor preferentially expressed on the surface of tumor cells or on an infectious organism, antimicrobial and other drugs designed to fit into the binding pocket of a particular receptor based on the crystal structure of the receptor or other cell surface protein, binding ligands of tumor antigens or other molecules preferentially expressed on the surface of tumor cells, or fragments of any of these molecules.
  • An example of a tumor-specific antigen that could function as a binding site for a binding ligand-drug conjugate include extracellular epitopes of a member of the Ephrin family of proteins, such as EphA2. EphA2 expression is restricted to cell-cell junctions in normal cells, but EphA2 is distributed over the entire cell surface in metastatic tumor cells. Thus, EphA2 on metastatic cells would be accessible for binding to, for example, an Fab fragment of an antibody conjugated to a drug, whereas the protein would not be accessible for binding to the Fab fragment on normal cells, resulting in a binding ligand-drug conjugate specific for metastatic cancer cells.
  • The linker L includes one or more hydrophilic spacer linkers. In addition, other optional spacer linkers and/or releasable linkers may be included in L. It is appreciated that additional spacer linkers may included when predetermined lengths are selected for separating binding ligand B from agent A. It is also appreciated that in certain configurations, releasable linkers may be included. For example, as described herein in one embodiment, the targeted ligand conjugates may be used to deliver drugs for treating cancer or other diseases involving pathogenic cells. In such embodiments, it is appreciated that once delivered, the drug is desirably released from the conjugate. For example, in the configuration where the targeting ligand is folate, or an analog or derivative thereof, the conjugate may bind to a folate receptor. Once bound, the conjugate often undergoes the process of endocytosis, and the conjugate is delivered to the interior of the cell. Cellular mechanisms may biologically degrade the conjugate to release the drug “payload” and release the folate compound.
  • In an alternative configuration, the targeted conjugate may be used in immunotherapy. In this configuration, a releasable linker is generally not included. For example, conjugates of folate or other vitamin receptor binding compounds and immunogens, once delivered, will bind to the appropriated receptor and decorate or mark the cell with the antigenic payload. In another alternative configuration, the targeted conjugate may be used in a diagnostic therapy. In this configuration, a releasable linker may or may not be included. For example, conjugates that include imaging agents may be delivered to a target cell using the appropriate cell receptor binding ligand, such as a folate or other vitamin receptor binding compound. In one aspect, the conjugate may remain on the surface of the cell for imaging. In another configuration, the conjugate may undergo endocytosis into the interior of the cell. In this latter situation, a releasable linker may be included.
  • Accordingly, in other aspects, the conjugates B-L-A described herein also include the following general formulae:

  • B-LS-LH-A

  • B-LH-LS-A

  • B-LS-LH-LS-A

  • B-LR-LH-A

  • B-LH-LR-A

  • B-LR-LH-LR-A

  • B-LS-LR-LH-A

  • B-LR-LH-LS-A

  • B-LR-LS-LH-LR-A

  • B-LH-LS-LH-LR-A
  • where B, L, and A are as described herein, and LR is a releasable linker section, LS is a spacer linker section, and LH is a hydrophilic linker section of linker L. It is to be understood that the foregoing formulae are merely illustrative, and that other arrangements of the hydrophilic spacer linker sections, releasable linker sections, and spacer linker sections are to be included herein. In addition, it is to be understood that additional conjugates are contemplated that include a plurality hydrophilic spacer linkers, and/or a plurality of releasable linkers, and/or a plurality of spacer linkers.
  • Similarly, in other aspects, the conjugates L-A described herein also include the following general formulae:

  • LS-LH-A

  • LH-LS-A

  • LS-LH-LS-A

  • LR-LH-A

  • LH-LR-A

  • LR-LH-LR-A

  • LS-LR-LH-A

  • LR-LH-LS-A

  • LR-LS-LH-LR-A

  • LH-LS-LH-LR-A
  • where L and A are as described herein, and LR is a releasable linker section, LS is a spacer linker section, and LH is a hydrophilic linker section of linker L. It is to be understood that the foregoing formulae are merely illustrative, and that other arrangements of the hydrophilic spacer linker sections, releasable linker sections, and spacer linker sections are to be included herein. In addition, it is to be understood that additional conjugates are contemplated that include a plurality hydrophilic spacer linkers, and/or a plurality of releasable linkers, and/or a plurality of spacer linkers.
  • It is appreciated that the arrangement and/or orientation of the various hydrophilic linkers may be in a linear or branched fashion, or both. For example, the hydrophilic linkers may form the backbone of the linker forming the conjugate between the folate and the drug, imagining agent, or diagnostic agent. Alternatively, the hydrophilic portion of the linker may be pendant to or attached to the backbone of the chain of atoms connecting the binding ligand B to the agent A. In this latter arrangement, the hydrophilic portion may be proximal or distal to the backbone chain of atoms.
  • In another embodiment, the linker is more or less linear, and the hydrophilic groups are arranged largely in a series to form a chain-like linker in the conjugate. Said another way, the hydrophilic groups form some or all of the backbone of the linker in this linear embodiment.
  • In another embodiment, the linker is branched with hydrophilic groups. In this branched embodiment, the hydrophilic groups may be proximal to the backbone or distal to the backbone. In each of these arrangements, the linker is more spherical or cylindrical in shape. In one variation, the linker is shaped like a bottle-brush. In one aspect, the backbone of the linker is formed by a linear series of amides, and the hydrophilic portion of the linker is formed by a parallel arrangement of branching side chains, such as by connecting monosaccharides, sulfonates, and the like, and derivatives and analogs thereof.
  • It is understood that the linker may be neutral or ionizable under certain conditions, such as physiological conditions encountered in vivo. For ionizable linkers, under the selected conditions, the linker may deprotonate to form a negative ion, or alternatively become protonated to form a positive ion. It is appreciated that more than one deprotonation or protonation event may occur. In addition, it is understood that the same linker may deprotonate and protonate to form inner salts or zwitterionic compounds.
  • In another embodiment, the hydrophilic spacer linkers are neutral, i.e. under physiological conditions, the linkers do not significantly protonate nor deprotonate. In another embodiment, the hydrophilic spacer linkers may be protonated to carry one or more positive charges. It is understood that the protonation capability is condition dependent. In one aspect, the conditions are physiological conditions, and the linker is protonated in vivo. In another embodiment, the spacers include both regions that are neutral and regions that may be protonated to carry one or more positive charges. In another embodiment, the spacers include both regions that may be deprotonated to carry one or more negative charges and regions that may be protonated to carry one or more positive charges. It is understood that in this latter embodiment that zwitterions or inner salts may be formed.
  • In one aspect, the regions of the linkers that may be deprotonated to carry a negative charge include carboxylic acids, such as aspartic acid, glutamic acid, and longer chain carboxylic acid groups, and sulfuric acid esters, such as alkyl esters of sulfuric acid. In another aspect, the regions of the linkers that may be protonated to carry a positive charge include amino groups, such as polyaminoalkylenes including ethylene diamines, propylene diamines, butylene diamines and the like, and/or heterocycles including pyrollidines, piperidines, piperazines, and other amino groups, each of which is optionally substituted. In another embodiment, the regions of the linkers that are neutral include poly hydroxyl groups, such as sugars, carbohydrates, saccharides, inositols, and the like, and/or polyether groups, such as polyoxyalkylene groups including polyoxyethylene, polyoxypropylene, and the like.
  • In one embodiment, the hydrophilic spacer linkers described herein include are formed primarily from carbon, hydrogen, and oxygen, and have a carbon/oxygen ratio of about 3:1 or less, or of about 2:1 or less. In one aspect, the hydrophilic linkers described herein include a plurality of ether functional groups. In another aspect, the hydrophilic linkers described herein include a plurality of hydroxyl functional groups. Illustrative fragments that may be used to form such linkers include polyhydroxyl compounds such as carbohydrates, polyether compounds such as polyethylene glycol units, and acid groups such as carboxyl and alkyl sulfuric acids. In one variation, oligoamide spacers, and the like may also be included in the linker.
  • Illustrative carbohydrate spacers include saccharopeptides as described herein that include both a peptide feature and sugar feature; glucuronides, which may be incorporated via [2+3] Huisgen cyclization, also known as click chemistry; β-alkyl glycosides, such as of 2-deoxyhexapyranoses (2-deoxyglucose, 2-deoxyglucuronide, and the like), and β-alkyl mannopyranosides. Illustrative PEG groups include those of a specific length range from about 4 to about 20 PEG groups. Illustrative alkyl sulfuric acid esters may also be introduced with click chemistry directly into the backbone. Illustrative oligoamide spacers include EDTA and DTPA spacers, β-amino acids, and the like.
  • In another embodiment, the hydrophilic spacer linkers described herein include a polyether, such as the linkers of the following formulae:
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00002
  • where m is an integer independently selected in each instance from 1 to about 8; p is an integer selected 1 to about 10; and n is an integer independently selected in each instance from 1 to about 3. In one aspect, m is independently in each instance 1 to about 3. In another aspect, n is 1 in each instance. In another aspect, p is independently in each instance about 4 to about 6. Illustratively, the corresponding polypropylene polyethers corresponding to the foregoing are contemplated herein and may be included in the conjugates as hydrophilic spacer linkers. In addition, it is appreciated that mixed polyethylene and polypropylene polyethers may be included in the conjugates as hydrophilic spacer linkers. Further, cyclic variations of the foregoing polyether compounds, such as those that include tetrahydrofuranyl, 1,3-dioxanes, 1,4-dioxanes, and the like are contemplated herein.
  • In another illustrative embodiment, the hydrophilic spacer linkers described herein include a plurality of hydroxyl functional groups, such as linkers that incorporate monosaccharides, oligosaccharides, polysaccharides, and the like. It is to be understood that the polyhydroxyl containing spacer linkers comprises a plurality of —(CROH)— groups, where R is hydrogen or alkyl.
  • In another embodiment, the spacer linkers include one or more of the following fragments:
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00003
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00004
  • wherein R is H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, or arylalkyl; m is an integer from 1 to about 3; n is an integer from 1 to about 5, p is an integer from 1 to about 5, and r is an integer selected from 1 to about 3. In one aspect, the integer n is 3 or 4. In another aspect, the integer p is 3 or 4. In another aspect, the integer r is 1.
  • In another embodiment, the spacer linker includes one or more of the following cyclic polyhydroxyl groups:
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00005
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00006
  • wherein n is an integer from 2 to about 5, p is an integer from 1 to about 5, and r is an integer from 1 to about 4. In one aspect, the integer n is 3 or 4. In another aspect, the integer p is 3 or 4. In another aspect, the integer r is 2 or 3. It is understood that all stereochemical forms of such sections of the linkers are contemplated herein. For example, in the above formula, the section may be derived from ribose, xylose, glucose, mannose, galactose, or other sugar and retain the stereochemical arrangements of pendant hydroxyl and alkyl groups present on those molecules. In addition, it is to be understood that in the foregoing formulae, various deoxy compounds are also contemplated, Illustratively, compounds of the following formulae are contemplated:
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00007
  • wherein n is equal to or less than r, such as when r is 2 or 3, n is 1 or 2, or 1, 2, or 3, respectively.
  • In another embodiment, the spacer linker includes a polyhydroxyl compound of the following formula:
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00008
  • wherein n and r are each an integer selected from 1 to about 3. In one aspect, the spacer linker includes one or more polyhydroxyl compounds of the following formulae:
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00009
  • It is understood that all stereochemical forms of such sections of the linkers are contemplated herein. For example, in the above formula, the section may be derived from ribose, xylose, glucose, mannose, galactose, or other sugar and retain the stereochemical arrangements of pendant hydroxyl and alkyl groups present on those molecules.
  • In another configuration, the hydrophilic linkers L described herein include polyhydroxyl groups that are spaced away from the backbone of the linker. In one embodiment, such carbohydrate groups or polyhydroxyl groups are connected to the back bone by a triazole group, forming triazole-linked hydrophilic spacer linkers. Illustratively, such linkers include fragments of the following formulae:
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00010
  • wherein n, m, and r are integers and are each independently selected in each instance from 1 to about 5. In one illustrative aspect, m is independently 2 or 3 in each instance. In another aspect, r is 1 in each instance. In another aspect, n is 1 in each instance. In one variation, the group connecting the polyhydroxyl group to the backbone of the linker is a different heteroaryl group, including but not limited to, pyrrole, pyrazole, 1,2,4-triazole, furan, oxazole, isoxazole, thienyl, thiazole, isothiazole, oxadiazole, and the like. Similarly, divalent 6-membered ring heteroaryl groups are contemplated. Other variations of the foregoing illustrative hydrophilic spacer linkers include oxyalkylene groups, such as the following formulae:
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00011
  • wherein n and r are integers and are each independently selected in each instance from 1 to about 5; and p is an integer selected from 1 to about 4.
  • In another embodiment, such carbohydrate groups or polyhydroxyl groups are connected to the back bone by an amide group, forming amide-linked hydrophilic spacer linkers, Illustratively, such linkers include fragments of the following formulae:
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00012
  • wherein n is an integer selected from 1 to about 3, and m is an integer selected from 1 to about 22. In one illustrative aspect, n is 1 or 2. In another illustrative aspect, m is selected from about 6 to about 10, illustratively 8. In one variation, the group connecting the polyhydroxyl group to the backbone of the linker is a different functional group, including but not limited to, esters, ureas, carbamates, acylhydrazones, and the like. Similarly, cyclic variations are contemplated. Other variations of the foregoing illustrative hydrophilic spacer linkers include oxyalkylene groups, such as the following formulae:
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00013
  • wherein n and r are integers and are each independently selected in each instance from 1 to about 5; and p is an integer selected from 1 to about 4.
  • In another embodiment, the spacer linkers include one or more of the following fragments:
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00014
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00015
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00016
  • wherein R is H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, or arylalkyl; m is an independently selected integer from 1 to about 3; n is an integer from 1 to about 6, p is an integer from 1 to about 5, and r is an integer selected from 1 to about 3. In one variation, the integer n is 3 or 4. In another variation, the integer p is 3 or 4. In another variation, the integer r is 1.
  • In another embodiment, the spacer linkers include one or more of the following fragments:
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00017
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00018
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00019
  • wherein m is an independently selected integer from 1 to about 3; n is an integer from 1 to about 6, p is an integer from 1 to about 5, and r is an integer selected from 1 to about 3. In one variation, the integer n is 3 or 4. In another variation, the integer p is 3 or 4. In another variation, the integer r is 1.
  • In another embodiment, the spacer linkers include one or more of the following fragments:
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00020
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00021
  • wherein m is an independently selected integer from 1 to about 3; n is an integer from 1 to about 6, p is an integer from 1 to about 5, and r is an integer selected from 1 to about 3. In one variation, the integer n is 3 or 4. In another variation, the integer p is 3 or 4. In another variation, the integer r is 1.
  • In another embodiment, the hydrophilic spacer linker is a combination of backbone and branching side motifs such as is illustrated by the following formulae
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00022
  • wherein n is an integer independently selected in each instance from 0 to about 3. The above formula are intended to represent 4, 5, 6, and even larger membered cyclic sugars. In addition, it is to be understood that the above formula may be modified to represent deoxy sugars, where one or more of the hydroxy groups present on the formulae are replaced by hydrogen, alkyl, or amino. In addition, it is to be understood that the corresponding carbonyl compounds are contemplated by the above formulae, where one or more of the hydroxyl groups is oxidized to the corresponding carbonyl. In addition, in this illustrative embodiment, the pyranose includes both carboxyl and amino functional groups and (a) can be inserted into the backbone and (b) can provide synthetic handles for branching side chains in variations of this embodiment. Any of the pendant hydroxyl groups may be used to attach other chemical fragments, including additional sugars to prepare the corresponding oligosaccharides. Other variations of this embodiment are also contemplated, including inserting the pyranose or other sugar into the backbone at a single carbon, i.e., a spiro arrangement, at a geminal pair of carbons, and like arrangements. For example, one or two ends of the linker, or the agent A, or the binding ligand B may be connected to the sugar to be inserted into the backbone in a 1,1; 1,2; 1,3; 1,4; 2,3, or other arrangement.
  • In another embodiment, the hydrophilic spacer linkers described herein include are formed primarily from carbon, hydrogen, and nitrogen, and have a carbon/nitrogen ratio of about 3:1 or less, or of about 2:1 or less. In one aspect, the hydrophilic linkers described herein include a plurality of amino functional groups.
  • In another embodiment, the spacer linkers include one or more amino groups of the following formulae:
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00023
  • where n is an integer independently selected in each instance from 1 to about 3. In one aspect, the integer n is independently 1 or 2 in each instance. In another aspect, the integer n is 1 in each instance.
  • In another embodiment, the hydrophilic spacer linker is a sulfuric acid ester, such as an alkyl ester of sulfuric acid. Illustratively, the spacer linker is of the following formula:
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00024
  • where n is an integer independently selected in each instance from l to about 3. Illustratively, n is independently 1 or 2 in each instance.
  • It is understood, that in such polyhydroxyl, polyamino, carboxylic acid, sulfuric acid, and like linkers that include free hydrogens bound to heteroatoms, one or more of those free hydrogen atoms may be protected with the appropriate hydroxyl, amino, or acid protecting group, respectively, or alternatively may be blocked as the corresponding pro-drugs, the latter of which are selected for the particular use, such as pro-drugs that release the parent drug under general or specific physiological conditions.
  • In each of the foregoing illustrative examples of linkers L, there are also included in some cases additional spacer linkers LS, and/or additional releasable linkers LR. Those spacer linker and releasable linkers also may include asymmetric carbon atoms. It is to be further understood that the stereochemical configurations shown herein are merely illustrative, and other stereochemical configurations are contemplated. For example in one variation, the corresponding unnatural amino acid configurations may be included in the conjugated described herein as follows:
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00025
  • wherein n is an integer from 2 to about 5, p is an integer from 1 to about 5, and r is an integer from 1 to about 4, as described above.
  • It is to be further understood that in the foregoing embodiments, open positions, such as (*) atoms are locations for attachment of the binding ligand (B) or the agent (A) to be delivered. In addition, it is to be understood that such attachment of either or both of B and A may be direct or through an intervening linker. Intervening linkers include other spacer linkers and/or releasable linkers. Illustrative additional spacer linkers and releasable linkers that are included in the conjugated described herein are described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/765,335, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • In one embodiment, the hydrophilic spacer linker comprises one or more carbohydrate containing or polyhydroxyl group containing linkers. In another embodiment, the hydrophilic spacer linker comprises at least three carbohydrate containing or polyhydroxyl group containing linkers. In another embodiment, the hydrophilic spacer linker comprises one or more carbohydrate containing or polyhydroxyl group containing linkers, and one or more aspartic acids. In another embodiment, the hydrophilic spacer linker comprises one or more carbohydrate containing or polyhydroxyl group containing linkers, and one or more glutamic acids. In another embodiment, the hydrophilic spacer linker comprises one or more carbohydrate containing or polyhydroxyl group containing linkers, one or more glutamic acids, one or more aspartic acids, and one or more beta amino alanines. In a series of variations, in each of the foregoing embodiments, the hydrophilic spacer linker also includes one or more cysteines. In another series of variations, in each of the foregoing embodiments, the hydrophilic spacer linker also includes at least one arginine.
  • In another embodiment, the hydrophilic spacer linker comprises one or more divalent 1,4-piperazines that are included in the chain of atoms connecting at least one of the binding ligands (L) with at least one of the agents (A). In one variation, the hydrophilic spacer linker includes one or more carbohydrate containing or polyhydroxyl group containing linkers. In another variation, the hydrophilic spacer linker includes one or more carbohydrate containing or polyhydroxyl group containing linkers and one or more aspartic acids. In another variation, the hydrophilic spacer linker includes one or more carbohydrate containing or polyhydroxyl group containing linkers and one or more glutamic acids. In a series of variations, in each of the foregoing embodiments, the hydrophilic spacer linker also includes one or more cysteines. In another series of variations, in each of the foregoing embodiments, the hydrophilic spacer linker also includes at least one arginine.
  • In another embodiment, the hydrophilic spacer linker comprises one or more oligoamide hydrophilic spacers, such as but not limited to aminoethylpiperazinylacetamide.
  • In another embodiment, the hydrophilic spacer linker comprises one or more triazole linked carbohydrate containing or polyhydroxyl group containing linkers. In another embodiment, the hydrophilic spacer linker comprises one or more amide linked carbohydrate containing or polyhydroxyl group containing linkers. In another embodiment, the hydrophilic spacer linker comprises one or more PEG groups and one or more cysteines. In another embodiment, the hydrophilic spacer linker comprises one or more EDTE derivatives.
  • In another embodiment, the additional spacer linker can be 1-alkylenesuccinimid-3-yl, optionally substituted with a substituent X1, as defined below, and the releasable linkers can be methylene, 1-alkoxyalkylene, 1-alkoxycycloalkylene, 1-alkoxyalkylenecarbonyl, 1-alkoxycycloalkylenecarbonyl, wherein each of the releasable linkers is optionally substituted with a substituent X2, as defined below, and wherein the spacer linker and the releasable linker are each bonded to the spacer linker to form a succinimid-1-ylalkyl acetal or ketal.
  • The additional spacer linkers can be carbonyl, thionocarbonyl, alkylene, cycloalkylene, alkylenecycloalkyl, alkylenecarbonyl, cycloalkylenecarbonyl, carbonylalkylcarbonyl, 1-alkylenesuccinimid-3-yl, 1-(carbonylalkyl)succinimid-3-yl, alkylenesulfoxyl, sulfonylalkyl, alkylenesulfoxylalkyl, alkylenesulfonylalkyl, carbonyltetrahydro-2H-pyranyl, carbonyltetrahydrofuranyl, 1-(carbonyltetrahydro-2H-pyranyl)succinimid-3-yl, and 1-(carbonyltetrahydrofuranyl)succinimid-3-yl, wherein each of the spacer linkers is optionally substituted with a substituent X1, as defined below. In this embodiment, the spacer linker may include an additional nitrogen, and the spacer linkers can be alkylenecarbonyl, cycloalkylenecarbonyl, carbonylalkylcarbonyl, 1-(carbonylalkyl)succinimid-3-yl, wherein each of the spacer linkers is optionally substituted with a substituent X1, as defined below, and the spacer linker is bonded to the nitrogen to form an amide. Alternatively, the spacer linker may include an additional sulfur, and the spacer linkers can be alkylene and cycloalkylene, wherein each of the spacer linkers is optionally substituted with carboxy, and the spacer linker is bonded to the sulfur to form a thiol. In another embodiment, the spacer linker can include sulfur, and the spacer linkers can be 1-alkylenesuccinimid-3-yl and 1-(carbonylalkyl)succinimid-3-yl, and the spacer linker is bonded to the sulfur to form a succinimid-3-ylthiol.
  • In an alternative to the above-described embodiments, the additional spacer linker can include nitrogen, and the releasable linker can be a divalent radical comprising alkyleneaziridin-1-yl, carbonylalkylaziridin-1-yl, sulfoxylalkylaziridin-1-yl, or sulfonylalkylaziridin-1-yl, wherein each of the releasable linkers is optionally substituted with a substituent X2, as defined below. In this alternative embodiment, the spacer linkers can be carbonyl, thionocarbonyl, alkylenecarbonyl, cycloalkylenecarbonyl, carbonylalkylcarbonyl, 1-(carbonylalkyl)succinimid-3-yl, wherein each of the spacer linkers is optionally substituted with a substituent X1, as defined below, and wherein the spacer linker is bonded to the releasable linker to form an aziridine amide.
  • The substituents X1 can be alkyl, alkoxy, alkoxyalkyl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, amino, aminoalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, halo, haloalkyl, sulfhydrylalkyl, alkylthioalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, alkyl carboxylate, alkyl alkanoate, guanidinoalkyl, R4-carbonyl, R5-carbonylalkyl, R6-acylamino, and R7-acylaminoalkyl, wherein R4 and R5 are each independently selected from amino acids, amino acid derivatives, and peptides, and wherein R6 and R7 are each independently selected from amino acids, amino acid derivatives, and peptides. In this embodiment the spacer linker can include nitrogen, and the substituent X1 and the spacer linker to which they are bound to form an heterocycle.
  • In another embodiment, the releasable linker may be a divalent radical comprising alkyleneaziridin-1-yl, alkylenecarbonylaziridin-1-yl, carbonylalkylaziridin-1-yl, alkylenesulfoxylaziridin-1-yl, sulfoxylalkylaziridin-1-yl, sulfonylalkylaziridin-1-yl, or alkylenesulfonylaziridin-1-yl, wherein each of the releasable linkers is optionally substituted with a substituent X2, as defined below.
  • Additional illustrative releasable linkers include methylene, 1-alkoxyalkylene, 1-alkoxycycloalkylene, 1-alkoxyalkylenecarbonyl, 1-alkoxycycloalkylenecarbonyl, carbonylarylcarbonyl, carbonyl(carboxyaryl)carbonyl, carbonyl(biscarboxyaryl)carbonyl, haloalkylenecarbonyl, alkylene(dialkylsilyl), alkylene(alkylarylsilyl), alkylene(diarylsilyl), (dialkylsilyl)aryl, (alkylarylsilyl)aryl, (diarylsilyl)aryl, oxycarbonyloxy, oxycarbonyloxyalkyl, sulfonyloxy, oxysulfonylalkyl, iminoalkylidenyl, carbonylalkylideniminyl, iminocycloalkylidenyl, carbonylcycloalkylideniminyl, alkylenethio, alkylenearylthio, and carbonylalkylthio, wherein each of the releasable linkers is optionally substituted with a substituent X2, as defined below.
  • In the preceding embodiment, the releasable linker may include oxygen, and the releasable linkers can be methylene, 1-alkoxyalkylene, 1-alkoxycycloalkylene, 1-alkoxyalkylenecarbonyl, and 1-alkoxycycloalkylenecarbonyl, wherein each of the releasable linkers is optionally substituted with a substituent X2, as defined below, and the releasable linker is bonded to the oxygen to form an acetal or ketal. Alternatively, the releasable linker may include oxygen, and the releasable linker can be methylene, wherein the methylene is substituted with an optionally-substituted aryl, and the releasable linker is bonded to the oxygen to form an acetal or ketal. Further, the releasable linker may include oxygen, and the releasable linker can be sulfonylalkyl, and the releasable linker is bonded to the oxygen to form an alkylsulfonate.
  • In another embodiment of the above releasable linker embodiment, the releasable linker may include nitrogen, and the releasable linkers can be iminoalkylidenyl, carbonylalkylideniminyl, iminocycloalkylidenyl, and carbonylcycloalkylideniminyl, wherein each of the releasable linkers is optionally substituted with a substituent X2, as defined below, and the releasable linker is bonded to the nitrogen to form an hydrazone. In an alternate configuration, the hydrazone may be acylated with a carboxylic acid derivative, an orthoformate derivative, or a carbamoyl derivative to form various acylhydrazone releasable linkers.
  • Alternatively, the releasable linker may include oxygen, and the releasable linkers can be alkylene(dialkylsilyl), alkylene(alkylarylsilyl), alkylene(diarylsilyl), (dialkylsilyl)aryl, (alkylarylsilyl)aryl, and (diarylsilyl)aryl, wherein each of the releasable linkers is optionally substituted with a substituent X2, as defined below, and the releasable linker is bonded to the oxygen to form a silanol.
  • In the above releasable linker embodiment, the drug can include a nitrogen atom, the releasable linker may include nitrogen, and the releasable linkers can be carbonylarylcarbonyl, carbonyl(carboxyaryl)carbonyl, carbonyl(biscarboxyaryl)carbonyl, and the releasable linker can be bonded to the heteroatom nitrogen to form an amide, and also bonded to the drug nitrogen to form an amide.
  • In the above releasable linker embodiment, the drug can include an oxygen atom, the releasable linker may include nitrogen, and the releasable linkers can be carbonylarylcarbonyl, carbonyl(carboxyaryl)carbonyl, carbonyl(biscarboxyaryl)carbonyl, and the releasable linker can form an amide, and also bonded to the drug oxygen to form an ester.
  • The substituents X2 can be alkyl, alkoxy, alkoxyalkyl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, amino, aminoalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, halo, haloalkyl, sulfhydrylalkyl, alkylthioalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, alkyl carboxylate, alkyl alkanoate, guanidinoalkyl, R4-carbonyl, R5-carbonylalkyl, R6-acylamino, and R7-acylaminoalkyl, wherein R4 and R5 are each independently selected from amino acids, amino acid derivatives, and peptides, and wherein R6 and R7 are each independently selected from amino acids, amino acid derivatives, and peptides. In this embodiment the releasable linker can include nitrogen, and the substituent X2 and the releasable linker can form an heterocycle.
  • The heterocycles can be pyrrolidines, piperidines, oxazolidines, isoxazolidines, thiazolidines, isothiazolidines, pyrrolidinones, piperidinones, oxazolidinones, isoxazolidinones, thiazolidinones, isothiazolidinones, and succinimides.
  • The agent A can include a nitrogen atom, and the releasable linker can be haloalkylenecarbonyl, optionally substituted with a substituent X2, and the releasable linker is bonded to the drug nitrogen to form an amide.
  • The agent A can include an oxygen atom, and the releasable linker can be haloalkylenecarbonyl, optionally substituted with a substituent X2, and the releasable linker is bonded to the drug oxygen to form an ester.
  • The agent A can include a double-bonded nitrogen atom, and in this embodiment, the releasable linkers can be alkylenecarbonylamino and 1-(alkylenecarbonylamino)succinimid-3-yl, and the releasable linker can be bonded to the drug nitrogen to form an hydrazone.
  • The agent A can include a sulfur atom, and in this embodiment, the releasable linkers can be alkylenethio and carbonylalkylthio, and the releasable linker can be bonded to the drug sulfur to form a disulfide.
  • The agent A can be a mitomycin, a mitomycin derivative, or a mitomycin analog, and, in this embodiment, the releasable linkers can be carbonylalkylthio, carbonyltetrahydro-2H-pyranyl, carbonyltetrahydrofuranyl, 1-(carbonyltetrahydro-2H-pyranyl)succinimid-3-yl, and 1-(carbonyltetrahydrofuranyl)succinimid-3-yl, wherein each of the releasable linkers is optionally substituted with a substituent X2, and wherein the aziridine of the mitomycin is bonded to the releasable linker to form an acylaziridine.
  • The binding ligand B can be folate which includes a nitrogen, and in this embodiment, the spacer linkers can be alkylenecarbonyl, cycloalkylenecarbonyl, carbonylalkylcarbonyl, -alkylenesuccinimid-3-yl, 1-(carbonylalkyl)succinimid-3-yl, wherein each of the spacer linkers is optionally substituted with a substituent XI, and the spacer linker is bonded to the folate nitrogen to form an imide or an alkylamide. In this embodiment, the substituents X1 can be alkyl, hydroxyalkyl, amino, aminoalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, sulfhydrylalkyl, alkylthioalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, guanidinoalkyl, R4-carbonyl, R5-carbonylalkyl, R6-acylamino, and R7-acylaminoalkyl, wherein R4 and R5 are each independently selected from amino acids, amino acid derivatives, and peptides, and wherein R6 and R7 are each independently selected from amino acids, amino acid derivatives, and peptides.
  • The term cycloalkylene as used herein refers to a bivalent chain of carbon atoms, a portion of which forms a ring, such as cycloprop-1,1-diyl, cycloprop-1,2-diyl, cyclohex-1,4-diyl, 3-ethylcyclopent-1,2-diyl, 1-methylenecyclohex-4-yl, and the like.
  • The term heterocycle as used herein refers to a monovalent chain of carbon and heteroatoms, wherein the heteroatoms are selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur, a portion of which, including at least one heteroatom, form a ring, such as aziridine, pyrrolidine, oxazolidine, 3-methoxypyrrolidine, 3-methylpiperazine, and the like.
  • The term aryl as used herein refers to an aromatic mono or polycyclic ring of carbon atoms, such as phenyl, naphthyl, and the like. In addition, aryl may also include heteroaryl.
  • The term heteroaryl as used herein refers to an aromatic mono or polycyclic ring of carbon atoms and at least one heteroatom selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur, such as pyridinyl, pyrimidinyl, indolyl, benzoxazolyl, and the like.
  • The term optionally substituted as used herein refers to the replacement of one or more hydrogen atoms, generally on carbon, with a corresponding number of substituents, such as halo, hydroxy, amino, alkyl or dialkylamino, alkoxy, alkylsulfonyl, cyano, nitro, and the like. In addition, two hydrogens on the same carbon, on adjacent carbons, or nearby carbons may be replaced with a bivalent substituent to form the corresponding cyclic structure.
  • The term iminoalkylidenyl as used herein refers to a divalent radical containing alkylene as defined herein and a nitrogen atom, where the terminal carbon of the alkylene is double-bonded to the nitrogen atom, such as the formulae —(CH)═N—, —(CH2)2(CH)═N—, —CH2C(Me)═N—, and the like.
  • The term amino acid as used herein refers generally to aminoalkylcarboxylate, where the alkyl radical is optionally substituted, such as with alkyl, hydroxy alkyl, sulfhydrylalkyl, aminoalkyl, carboxyalkyl, and the like, including groups corresponding to the naturally occurring amino acids, such as serine, cysteine, methionine, aspartic acid, glutamic acid, and the like. It is to be understood that such amino acids may be of a single stereochemistry or a particular mixture of stereochemisties, including racemic mixtures. In addition, amino acid refers to beta, gamma, and longer amino acids, such as amino acids of the formula:

  • —N(R)—(CR′R″)q—C(O)—
  • where R is hydrogen, alkyl, acyl, or a suitable nitrogen protecting group, R′ and R″ are hydrogen or a substituent, each of which is independently selected in each occurrence, and q is an integer such as 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5. Illustratively, R′ and/or R″ independently correspond to, but are not limited to, hydrogen or the side chains present on naturally occurring amino acids, such as methyl, benzyl, hydroxymethyl, thiomethyl, carboxyl, carboxylmethyl, guanidinopropyl, and the like, and derivatives and protected derivatives thereof. The above described formula includes all stereoisomeric variations. For example, the amino acid may be selected from asparagine, aspartic acid, cysteine, glutamic acid, lysine, glutamine, arginine, serine, ornitine, threonine, and the like. In another illustrative aspect of the vitamin receptor binding drug delivery conjugate intermediate described herein, the drug, or an analog or a derivative thereof, includes an alkylthiol nucleophile.
  • It is to be understood that the above-described terms can be combined to generate chemically-relevant groups, such as alkoxyalkyl referring to methyloxymethyl, ethyloxyethyl, and the like, haloalkoxyalkyl referring to trifluoromethyloxyethyl, 1,2-difluoro-2-chloroeth-1-yloxypropyl, and the like, arylalkyl referring to benzyl, phenethyl, methylbenzyl, and the like, and others.
  • The term amino acid derivative as used herein refers generally to an optionally substituted aminoalkylcarboxylate, where the amino group and/or the carboxylate group are each optionally substituted, such as with alkyl, carboxylalkyl, alkylamino, and the like, or optionally protected. In addition, the optionally substituted intervening divalent alkyl fragment may include additional groups, such as protecting groups, and the like.
  • The term peptide as used herein refers generally to a series of amino acids and/or amino acid analogs and derivatives covalently linked one to the other by amide bonds.
  • The term “releasable linker” as used herein refers to a linker that includes at least one bond that can be broken under physiological conditions (e.g., a pH-labile, acid-labile, oxidatively-labile, or enzyme-labile bond). It should be appreciated that such physiological conditions resulting in bond breaking include standard chemical hydrolysis reactions that occur, for example, at physiological pH, or as a result of compartmentalization into a cellular organelle such as an endosome having a lower pH than cytosolic pH.
  • The cleavable bond or bonds may be present in the interior of a cleavable linker and/or at one or both ends of a cleavable linker. It is appreciated that the lability of the cleavable bond may be adjusted by including functional groups or fragments within the polyvalent linker L that are able to assist or facilitate such bond breakage, also termed anchimeric assistance. In addition, it is appreciated that additional functional groups or fragments may be included within the polyvalent linker L that are able to assist or facilitate additional fragmentation of the receptor binding ligand agent conjugates after bond breaking of the releasable linker. The lability of the cleavable bond can be adjusted by, for example, substitutional changes at or near the cleavable bond, such as including alpha branching adjacent to a cleavable disulfide bond, increasing the hydrophobicity of substituents on silicon in a moiety having a silicon-oxygen bond that may be hydrolyzed, homologating alkoxy groups that form part of a ketal or acetal that may be hydrolyzed, and the like.
  • It is understood that a cleavable bond can connect two adjacent atoms within the releasable linker and/or connect other linkers or V and/or D, as described herein, at either or both ends of the releasable linker. In the case where a cleavable bond connects two adjacent atoms within the releasable linker, following breakage of the bond, the releasable linker is broken into two or more fragments. Alternatively, in the case where a cleavable bond is between the releasable linker and another moiety, such as an additional heteroatom, additional spacer linker, another releasable linker, the agent A, or analog or derivative thereof, or the binding ligand B, or analog or derivative thereof, following breakage of the bond, the releasable linker is separated from the other moiety.
  • It is understood that each of the additional spacer and releasable linkers are bivalent. It should be further understood that the connectivity between each of the various additional spacer and releasable linkers themselves, and between the various additional spacer and releasable linkers and A and/or B, as defined herein, may occur at any atom found in the various additional spacer or releasable linkers.
  • In one aspect of the various receptor binding drug delivery conjugates described herein, the polyvalent linker comprises an additional spacer linker and a releasable linker taken together to form 3-thiosuccinimid-1-ylalkyloxymethyloxy, where the methyl is optionally substituted with alkyl or substituted aryl.
  • In another aspect, the polyvalent linker comprises an additional spacer linker and a releasable linker taken together to form 3-thiosuccinimid-1-ylalkylcarbonyl, where the carbonyl forms an acylaziridine with the agent A, or analog or derivative thereof.
  • In another aspect, the polyvalent linker comprises an additional spacer linker and a releasable linker taken together to form 1-alkoxycycloalkylenoxy.
  • In another aspect, the polyvalent linker comprises an additional spacer linker and a releasable linker taken together to form alkyleneaminocarbonyl(dicarboxylarylene)carboxylate.
  • In another aspect, the polyvalent linker comprises a releasable linker, an additional spacer linker, and a releasable linker taken together to form dithioalkylcarbonylhydrazide, where the hydrazide forms an hydrazone with the agent A, or analog or derivative thereof.
  • In another aspect, the polyvalent linker comprises an additional spacer linker and a releasable linker taken together to form 3-thiosuccinimid-1-ylalkylcarbonylhydrazide, where the hydrazide forms an hydrazone with the agent A, or analog or derivative thereof.
  • In another aspect, the polyvalent linker comprises an additional spacer linker and a releasable linker taken together to form 3-thioalkylsulfonylalkyl(disubstituted silyl)oxy, where the disubstituted silyl is substituted with alkyl or optionally substituted aryl.
  • In another aspect, the polyvalent linker comprises a plurality of additional spacer linkers selected from the group consisting of the naturally occurring amino acids and stereoisomers thereof.
  • In another aspect, the polyvalent linker comprises a releasable linker, an additional spacer linker, and a releasable linker taken together to form 3-dithioalkyloxycarbonyl, where the carbonyl forms a carbonate with the agent A, or analog or derivative thereof.
  • In another aspect, the polyvalent linker comprises a releasable linker, an additional spacer linker, and a releasable linker taken together to form 3-dithioarylalkyloxycarbonyl, where the carbonyl forms a carbonate with the agent A, or analog or derivative thereof, and the aryl is optionally substituted.
  • In another aspect, the polyvalent linker comprises an additional spacer linker and a releasable linker taken together to form 3-thiosuccinimid-1-ylalkyloxyalkyloxyalkylidene, where the alkylidene forms an hydrazone with the agent A, or analog or derivative thereof, each alkyl is independently selected, and the oxyalkyloxy is optionally substituted with alkyl or optionally substituted aryl.
  • In another aspect, the polyvalent linker comprises a releasable linker, an additional spacer linker, and a releasable linker taken together to form 3-dithioalkyloxycarbonylhydrazide.
  • In another aspect, the polyvalent linker comprises a releasable linker, an additional spacer linker, and a releasable linker taken together to form 3-dithioalkylamino, where the amino forms a vinylogous amide with the agent A, or analog or derivative thereof.
  • In another aspect, the polyvalent linker comprises a releasable linker, an additional spacer linker, and a releasable linker taken together to form 3-dithioalkylamino, where the amino forms a vinylogous amide with the agent A, or analog or derivative thereof, and the alkyl is ethyl.
  • In another aspect, the polyvalent linker comprises a releasable linker, an additional spacer linker, and a releasable linker taken together to form 3-dithioalkylaminocarbonyl, where the carbonyl forms a carbamate with the agent A, or analog or derivative thereof.
  • In another aspect, the polyvalent linker comprises a releasable linker, an additional spacer linker, and a releasable linker taken together to form 3-dithioalkylaminocarbonyl, where the carbonyl forms a carbamate with the agent A, or analog or derivative thereof, and the alkyl is ethyl.
  • In another aspect, the polyvalent linker comprises a releasable linker, an additional spacer linker, and a releasable linker taken together to form 3-dithioarylalkyloxycarbonyl, where the carbonyl forms a carbamate or a carbamoylaziridine with the agent A, or analog or derivative thereof.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linker (L) includes a disulfide releasable linker. In another embodiment, the polyvalent linker (L) includes at least one releasable linker that is not a disulfide releasable linker.
  • In one aspect, the releasable and spacer linkers may be arranged in such a way that subsequent to the cleavage of a bond in the polyvalent linker, released functional groups chemically assist the breakage or cleavage of additional bonds, also termed anchimeric assisted cleavage or breakage. An illustrative embodiment of such a polyvalent linker or portion thereof includes compounds having the formulae:
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00026
  • where X is an heteroatom, such as nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or a carbonyl group; n is an integer selected from 0 to 4; illustratively 2; R is hydrogen, or a substituent, including a substituent capable of stabilizing a positive charge inductively or by resonance on the aryl ring, such as alkoxy and the like, including methoxy; and the symbol (*) indicates points of attachment for additional spacer, heteroatom, or releasable linkers forming the polyvalent linker, or alternatively for attachment of the drug, or analog or derivative thereof, or the vitamin, or analog or derivative thereof. In one embodiment, n is 2 and R is methoxy. It is appreciated that other substituents may be present on the aryl ring, the benzyl carbon, the alkanoic acid, or the methylene bridge, including but not limited to hydroxy, alkyl, alkoxy, alkylthio, halo, and the like, Assisted cleavage may include mechanisms involving benzylium intermediates, benzyne intermediates, lactone cyclization, oxonium intermediates, beta-elimination, and the like. It is further appreciated that, in addition to fragmentation subsequent to cleavage of the releasable linker, the initial cleavage of the releasable linker may be facilitated by an anchimerically assisted mechanism.
  • Illustrative examples of intermediates useful in forming such linkers include:
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00027
  • where Xa is an electrophilic group such as maleimide, vinyl sulfone, activated carboxylic acid derivatives, and the like, Xb is NH, O, or S; and m and n are each independently selected integers from 0-4. In one variation, m and n are each independently selected integers from 0-2. Such intermediates may be coupled to drugs, binding ligands, or other linkers vai nucleophilic attack onto electrophilic group Xa, and/or by forming ethers or carboxylic acid derivatives of the. In one embodiment, the benzylic hydroxyl group is converted into the corresponding activated benzyloxycarbonyl compound with phosgene or a phosgene equivalent. This embodiment may be coupled to drugs, binding ligands, or other linkers vai nucleophilic attack onto the activated carbonyl group.
  • Illustrative mechanisms for cleavage of the bivalant linkers described herein include the following 1,4 and 1,6 fragmentation mechanisms
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00028
  • where X is an exogenous or endogenous nucleophile, glutathione, or bioreducing agent, and the like, and either of Z or Z′ is the vitamin, or analog or derivative thereof, or the drug, or analog or derivative thereof, or a vitamin or drug moiety in conjunction with other portions of the polyvalent linker. It is to be understood that although the above fragmentation mechanisms are depicted as concerted mechanisms, any number of discrete steps may take place to effect the ultimate fragmentation of the polyvalent linker to the final products shown. For example, it is appreciated that the bond cleavage may also occur by acid-catalyzed elimination of the carbamate moiety, which may be anchimerically assisted by the stabilization provided by either the aryl group of the beta sulfur or disulfide illustrated in the above examples. In those variations of this embodiment, the releasable linker is the carbamate moiety. Alternatively, the fragmentation may be initiated by a nucleophilic attack on the disulfide group, causing cleavage to form a thiolate. The thiolate may intermolecularly displace a carbonic acid or carbamic acid moiety and form the corresponding thiacyclopropane. In the case of the benzyl-containing polyvalent linkers, following an illustrative breaking of the disulfide bond, the resulting phenyl thiolate may further fragment to release a carbonic acid or carbamic acid moiety by forming a resonance stabilized intermediate. In any of these cases, the releasable nature of the illustrative polyvalent linkers described herein may be realized by whatever mechanism may be relevant to the chemical, metabolic, physiological, or biological conditions present,
  • Other illustrative mechanisms for bond cleavage of the releasable linker include oxonium-assisted cleavage as follows:
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00029
  • where Z is the vitamin, or analog or derivative thereof, or the drug, or analog or derivative thereof, or each is a vitamin or drug moiety in conjunction with other portions of the polyvalent linker, such as a drug or vitamin moiety including one or more spacer linkers and/or other releasable linkers. Without being bound by theory, in this embodiment, acid catalysis, such as in an endosome, may initiate the cleavage via protonation of the urethane group. In addition, acid-catalyzed elimination of the carbamate leads to the release of CO2 and the nitrogen-containing moiety attached to Z, and the formation of a benzyl cation, which may be trapped by water, or any other Lewis base.
  • Other illustrative linkers include compounds of the formulae:
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00030
  • where X is NH, CH2, or O; R is hydrogen, or a substituent, including a substituent capable of stabilizing a positive charge inductively or by resonance on the aryl ring, such as alkoxy and the like, including methoxy; and the symbol (*) indicates points of attachment for additional spacer, heteroatom, or releasable linkers forming the polyvalent linker, or alternatively for attachment of the drug, or analog or derivative thereof, or the vitamin, or analog or derivative thereof.
  • Illustrative mechanisms for cleavage of such polyvalent linkers described herein include the following 1,4 and 1,6 fragmentation mechanisms followed by anchimerically assisted cleavage of the acylated Z′ via cyclization by the hydrazide group:
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00031
  • where X is an exogenous or endogenous nucleophile, glutathione, or bioreducing agent, and the like, and either of Z or Z′ is the vitamin, or analog or derivative thereof, or the drug, or analog or derivative thereof, or a vitamin or drug moiety in conjunction with other portions of the polyvalent linker. It is to be understood that although the above fragmentation mechanisms are depicted as concerted mechanisms, any number of discrete steps may take place to effect the ultimate fragmentation of the polyvalent linker to the final products shown. For example, it is appreciated that the bond cleavage may also occur by acid-catalyzed elimination of the carbamate moiety, which may be anchimerically assisted by the stabilization provided by either the aryl group of the beta sulfur or disulfide illustrated in the above examples. In those variations of this embodiment, the releasable linker is the carbamate moiety. Alternatively, the fragmentation may be initiated by a nucleophilic attack on the disulfide group, causing cleavage to form a thiolate. The thiolate may intermolecularly displace a carbonic acid or carbamic acid moiety and form the corresponding thiacyclopropane. In the case of the benzyl-containing polyvalent linkers, following an illustrative breaking of the disulfide bond, the resulting phenyl thiolate may further fragment to release a carbonic acid or carbamic acid moiety by forming a resonance stabilized intermediate. In any of these cases, the releasable nature of the illustrative polyvalent linkers described herein may be realized by whatever mechanism may be relevant to the chemical, metabolic, physiological, or biological conditions present. Without being bound by theory, in this embodiment, acid catalysis, such as in an endosome, may also initiate the cleavage via protonation of the urethane group. In addition, acid-catalyzed elimination of the carbamate leads to the release of CO2 and the nitrogen-containing moiety attached to Z, and the formation of a benzyl cation, which may be trapped by water, or any other Lewis base, as is similarly described herein.
  • In one embodiment, the polyvalent linkers described herein are compounds of the following formulae
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00032
  • where n is an integer selected from 1 to about 4; Ra and Rb are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl, including lower alkyl such as C1-C4 alkyl that are optionally branched; or Ra and Rb are taken together with the attached carbon atom to form a carbocyclic ring; R is an optionally substituted alkyl group, an optionally substituted acyl group, or a suitably selected nitrogen protecting group; and (*) indicates points of attachment for the drug, vitamin, imaging agent, diagnostic agent, other polyvalent linkers, or other parts of the conjugate.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linkers described herein include compounds of the following formulae
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00033
  • where m is an integer selected from 1 to about 4; R is an optionally substituted alkyl group, an optionally substituted acyl group, or a suitably selected nitrogen protecting group; and (*) indicates points of attachment for the drug, vitamin, imaging agent, diagnostic agent, other polyvalent linkers, or other parts of the conjugate.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linkers described herein include compounds of the following formulae
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00034
  • where m is an integer selected from 1 to about 4; R is an optionally substituted alkyl group, an optionally substituted acyl group, or a suitably selected nitrogen protecting group; and (*) indicates points of attachment for the drug, vitamin, imaging agent, diagnostic agent, other polyvalent linkers, or other parts of the conjugate.
  • Another illustrative mechanism involves an arrangement of the releasable and spacer linkers in such a way that subsequent to the cleavage of a bond in the polyvalent linker, released functional groups chemically assist the breakage or cleavage of additional bonds, also termed anchimeric assisted cleavage or breakage. An illustrative embodiment of such a polyvalent linker or portion thereof includes compounds having the formula:
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00035
  • where X is an heteroatom, such as nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, n is an integer selected from 0, 1, 2, and 3, R is hydrogen, or a substituent, including a substituent capable of stabilizing a positive charge inductively or by resonance on the aryl ring, such as alkoxy, and the like, and either of Z or Z′ is the vitamin, or analog or derivative thereof, or the drug, or analog or derivative thereof, or a vitamin or drug moiety in conjunction with other portions of the polyvalent linker. It is appreciated that other substituents may be present on the aryl ring, the benzyl carbon, the carbamate nitrogen, the alkanoic acid, or the methylene bridge, including but not limited to hydroxy, alkyl, alkoxy, alkylthio, halo, and the like. Assisted cleavage may include mechanisms involving benzylium intermediates, benzyne intermediates, lactone cyclization, oxonium intermediates, beta-elimination, and the like. It is further appreciated that, in addition to fragmentation subsequent to cleavage of the releasable linker, the initial cleavage of the releasable linker may be facilitated by an anchimerically assisted mechanism.
  • In this embodiment, the hydroxyalkanoic acid, which may cyclize, facilitates cleavage of the methylene bridge, by for example an oxonium ion, and facilitates bond cleavage or subsequent fragmentation after bond cleavage of the releasable linker. Alternatively, acid catalyzed oxonium ion-assisted cleavage of the methylene bridge may begin a cascade of fragmentation of this illustrative polyvalent linker, or fragment thereof. Alternatively, acid-catalyzed hydrolysis of the carbamate may facilitate the beta elimination of the hydroxyalkanoic acid, which may cyclize, and facilitate cleavage of methylene bridge, by for example an oxonium ion. It is appreciated that other chemical mechanisms of bond breakage or cleavage under the metabolic, physiological, or cellular conditions described herein may initiate such a cascade of fragmentation. It is appreciated that other chemical mechanisms of bond breakage or cleavage under the metabolic, physiological, or cellular conditions described herein may initiate such a cascade of fragmentation.
  • Another illustrative embodiment of the linkers described herein, include releasable linkers that cleave under the conditions described herein by a chemical mechanism involving beta elimination. In one aspect, such releasable linkers include beta-thio, beta-hydroxy, and beta-amino substituted carboxylic acids and derivatives thereof, such as esters, amides, carbonates, carbamates, and ureas. In another aspect, such releasable linkers include l- and 4-thioarylesters, carbamates, and carbonates.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linker includes additional spacer linkers and releasable linkers connected to form a polyvalent 3-thiosuccinimid-1-ylalkyloxymethyloxy group, illustrated by the following formula
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00036
  • where n is an integer from 1 to 6, the alkyl group is optionally substituted, and the methyl is optionally substituted with an additional alkyl or optionally substituted aryl group, each of which is represented by an independently selected group R. The (*) symbols indicate points of attachment of the polyvalent linker fragment to other parts of the conjugates described herein.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linker includes additional spacer linkers and releasable linkers connected to form a polyvalent 3-thiosuccinimid-1-ylalkylcarbonyl group, illustrated by the following formula
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00037
  • where n is an integer from 1 to 6, and the alkyl group is optionally substituted. The (*) symbols indicate points of attachment of the polyvalent linker fragment to other parts of the conjugates described herein. In another embodiment, the polyvalent linker includes spacer linkers and releasable linkers connected to form a polyvalent 3-thioalkylsulfonylalkyl(disubstituted silyl)oxy group, where the disubstituted silyl is substituted with alkyl and/or optionally substituted aryl groups.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linker includes additional spacer linkers and releasable linkers connected to form a polyvalent dithioalkylcarbonylhydrazide group, or a polyvalent 3-thiosuccinimid-1-ylalkylcarbonylhydrazide, illustrated by the following formulae
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00038
  • where n is an integer from 1 to 6, the alkyl group is optionally substituted, and the hydrazide forms an hydrazone with (B), (D), or another part of the polyvalent linker (L). The (*) symbols indicate points of attachment of the polyvalent linker fragment to other parts of the conjugates described herein.
  • In another embodiment, the polyvalent linker includes additional spacer linkers and releasable linkers connected to form a polyvalent 3-thiosuccinimid-1-ylalkyloxyalkyloxyalkylidene group, illustrated by the following formula
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00039
  • where each n is an independently selected integer from 1 to 6, each alkyl group independently selected and is optionally substituted, such as with alkyl or optionally substituted aryl, and where the alkylidene forms an hydrazone with (B), (D), or another part of the polyvalent linker (L). The (*) symbols indicate points of attachment of the polyvalent linker fragment to other parts of the conjugates described herein.
  • Additional illustrative additional spacer linkers include alkylene-amino-alkylenecarbonyl, alkylene-thio-carbonylalkylsuccinimid-3-yl, and the like, as further illustrated by the following formulae:
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00040
  • where the integers x and y are 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5:
  • In another illustrative embodiment, the linker includes one or more amino acids. In one variation, the linker includes a single amino acid. In another variation, the linker includes a peptide having from 2 to about 50, 2 to about 30, or 2 to about 20 amino acids. In another variation, the linker includes a peptide having from about 4 to about 8 amino acids. Such amino acids are illustratively selected from the naturally occurring amino acids, or stereoisomers thereof. The amino acid may also be any other amino acid, such as any amino acid having the general formula:

  • —N(R)—(CR′R″)q—C(O)—
  • where R is hydrogen, alkyl, acyl, or a suitable nitrogen protecting group, R′ and R″ are hydrogen or a substituent, each of which is independently selected in each occurrence, and q is an integer such as 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5. Illustratively, R′ and/or R″ independently correspond to, but are not limited to, hydrogen or the side chains present on naturally occurring amino acids, such as methyl, benzyl, hydroxymethyl, thiomethyl, carboxyl, carboxylmethyl, guanidinopropyl, and the like, and derivatives and protected derivatives thereof. The above described formula includes all stereoisomeric variations. For example, the amino acid may be selected from asparagine, aspartic acid, cysteine, glutamic acid, lysine, glutamine, arginine, serine, ornitine, threonine, and the like. In one variation, the releasable linker includes at least 2 amino acids selected from asparagine, aspartic acid, cysteine, glutamic acid, lysine, glutamine, arginine, serine, ornitine, and threonine. In another variation, the releasable linker includes between 2 and about 5 amino acids selected from asparagine, aspartic acid, cysteine, glutamic acid, lysine, glutamine, arginine, serine, ornitine, and threonine. In another variation, the releasable linker includes a tripeptide, tetrapeptide, pentapeptide, or hexapeptide consisting of amino acids selected from aspartic acid, cysteine, glutamic acid, lysine, arginine, and ornitine, and combinations thereof.
  • In another illustrative aspect of the vitamin receptor binding drug delivery conjugate intermediate described herein, the drug, or an analog or a derivative thereof, includes an alkylthiol nucleophile.
  • Additional linkers are described in the following Tables, where the (*) atom is the point of attachment of additional spacer or releaseable linkers, the drug, and/or the binding ligand.
  • The following illustrative spacer linkers are described.
  •
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00041
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00042
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00043
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00044
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00045
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00046
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00047
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00048
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00049
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00050
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00051
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00052
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00053
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00054
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00055
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00056
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00057
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00058
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00059
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00060
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00061
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00062
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00063
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00064
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00065
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00066
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00067
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00068
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00069
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00070
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00071
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00072
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00073
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00074
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00075
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00076
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00077
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00078
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00079
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00080
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00081
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00082
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00083
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00084
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00085
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00086
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00087
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00088
  • The following illustrative releasable linkers are described.
  •
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00089
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00090
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00091
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00092
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00093
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00094
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00095
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00096
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00097
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00098
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00099
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00100
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00101
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00102
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00103
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00104
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00105
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00106
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00107
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00108
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00109
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00110
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00111
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00112
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00113
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00114
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00115
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00116
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00117
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00118
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00119
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00120
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00121
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00122
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00123
  • It is appreciated that such hydrophilic linkers may alter the stability, metabolism and tissue distribution of the conjugates, especially compared to other conjugate forms such as the peptidic based forms described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/765,336. For example, it is understood that in certain situations, carbohydrate-protein interactions are weaker than peptide-protein interactions. Thus, it is appreciated that in various embodiments described herein, the conjugates may lead to lower binding of serum proteins. These and other physicochemical differences between the conjugates described herein and others already reported may include enhanced targeting to target cells and improved, i.e. more selective or differentially selective biodistribution profiles. The increased cyctotoxicity may be a natural consequence of the decreased serum protein binding or the better or differential biodistribution (i.e. less drug is wasted in non-specific compartments). This is especially true for the use of hydrophilic but neutral spacers. Without being bound by theory it is also suggested that the hydrophilic spacer linkers described herein may decrease toxicity that might be due at least in part to non-specific binding interactions.
  • In an alternate embodiment, drug is linked to a hydrophilic spacer linker, directly or indirectly, to accomplish the goal of decreasing liver clearance. It has been found herein that the attachment of hydrophilic groups, either releasable or not, and more specifically hydrophilic neutral groups, increases renal-specific delivery.
  • It has been observed that liver clearance of folate-drug conjugates possessing disulfide linkers and peptidic spacers retain residual and sometimes substantial unfavorable toxicity profiles. Including the hydrophilic spacers described herein also introduced vectors for kidney-specific delivery. It is therefore appreciated that including such linkers in targeted drug conjugates may decrease overall liver uptake and consequentially decrease overall toxicity. Without being bound by theory, it is appreciated that toxicity at MTD, such as with vinca alkaloid conjugates, may be caused by non-specific liver clearance, leading to metabolism, release of free drug, such as DAVLBH, into bile and then the intestine. The local toxicity as well as systemic toxicity (due to re-absorption) might then occur. By including hydrophilic linkers in the targeted and non-targeted conjugates described herein, it is believed that clearance through the kidney may preferentially occur, thus decreasing and/or avoiding concomitant liver metabolism based toxicity. Accordingly, measuring total bile clearance of the drug component, such as DAVLBH, from a series of drug-folate conjugates, may be used to predict which agent would be the least toxic.
  • As described above, the conjugates described herein may be used to deliver target agents A to cells in a selective or specific manner. In one aspect of such delivery, unwanted clearance mechanisms may also be avoided. It has been discovered that the hydrophilic spacer linkers described herein when used to form conjugates of receptor binding ligands B and agents A, can decrease the amount of clearance by the liver. It has further been discovered that these hydrophilic spacer linkers tend to favor clearance along renal pathways, such as the kidney. It has further been discovered that the conjugates described herein exhibit lower toxicity than the parent agents A by themselves when administered in the same way. Without being bound by theory, it is suggested that the lower toxicity arises from the observed decrease in liver clearance mechanism in favor of renal clearance mechanisms.
  • In another embodiment, compounds are described herein that have reduced uptake by the liver and are less likely to be cleared by the liver. In one aspect, such compounds are preferentially cleared by the renal processes as compared to hepatic processes. Accordingly, in another embodiment, non-targeted compounds of the following formula are described herein:

  • L-A
  • where L is a hydrophilic spacer and A is diagnostic, therapeutic, or imaging agent. It is appreciated that such non-targeted compounds, though not targeted using a receptor binding ligand B, may nonetheless exhibit decreased toxicity than the parent agent A when delivered in the same manner. The non-targeted compounds, like the targeted conjugates described above include the hydrophilic spacer L. Therefore, the agent that does not reach the cell desirably treated will be cleared by ordinary metabolic and biological routes. However, it is appreciated that the presence of the hydrophilic spacer L will direct the clearance through renal pathways rather than hepatic pathways.
  • In another embodiment, multi-drug conjugates are described herein. Several illustrative configurations of such multi-drug conjugates are contemplated herein, and include the compounds and compositions described in PCT international publication No. WO 2007/022494, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference. Illustratively, the polyvalent linkers may connect the receptor binding ligand B to the two or more agents A in a variety of structural configurations, including but not limited to the following illustrative general formulae:
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00124
  • where B is the receptor binding ligand, each of (L1), (L2), and (L3) is a polyvalent linker as described herein comprising a hydrophilic spacer linker, and optionally including one or more releasable linkers and/or additional spacer linkers, and each of (A1), (A2), and (A3) is an agent A, or an analog or derivative thereof. Other variations, including additional agents A, or analogs or derivatives thereof, additional linkers, and additional configurations of the arrangement of each of (B), (L), and (A), are also contemplated herein.
  • In one variation, more than one receptor binding ligand B is included in the delivery conjugates described herein, including but not limited to the following illustrative general formulae:
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00125
  • where each B is a receptor binding ligand, each of (L1), (L2), and (L3) is a polyvalent linker as described herein comprising a hydrophilic spacer linker, and optionally including one or more releasable linkers and/or additional spacer linkers, and each of (A1), (A2), and (A3) is an agent A, or an analog or derivative thereof. Other variations, including additional agents A, or analogs or derivatives thereof, additional linkers, and additional configurations of the arrangement of each of (B), (L), and (A), are also contemplated herein. In one variation, the receptor binding ligands B are ligands for the same receptor, and in another variation, the receptor binding ligands B are ligands for different receptors.
  • In another illustrative embodiment, the drugs are selected based on activity against one or more populations of pathogenic cells with a particular mechanism of action. Illustrative mechanisms of action include alkylating agents, microtubule inhibitors, including those that stabilize and/or destabilize microtubule formation, including beta-tubulin agents, cyclin dependent kinase (CDK) inhibitors, topoisomerase inhibitors, protein synthesis inhibitors, protein kinase inhibitors, including Ras, Raf, PKC, PI3K, and like inhibitors, transcription inhibitor, antifolates, heat shock protein blockers, and the like.
  • Illustrative alkylating agents include, but are not limited to, mitomycins CBI, and the like. Illustrative cyclin dependent kinase (CDK) inhibitors include, but are not limited to, CYC202, seliciclib, R-roscovitine, AGM-1470, and the like. Illustrative topoisomerase inhibitors include, but are not limited to, doxorubicin, other anthracyclines, and the like. Illustrative protein synthesis inhibitors include, but are not limited to, bruceantin, and the like. Illustrative protein kinase inhibitors, including Ras, Raf, PKC, PI3K, and like inhibitors, include but are not limited to L-779,450, R115777, and the like. Illustrative transcription inhibitors include, but are not limited to, α-amanatin, actinomycin, and the like. Illustrative antifolates include, but are not limited to, methotrexate, and the like. Illustrative heat shock protein blockers include, but are not limited to, geldanamycin, and the like.
  • Illustrative microtubule inhibitors, including those that stabilize and/or destabilize microtubule formation, including β-tubulin agents, microtubule poisons, and the like. Illustrative microtubule poisons that bind to selected receptors include, but are not limited to, inhibitors biding to the vinca binding site such as arenastatin, dolastatin, halichondrin B, maytansine, phomopsin A, rhizoxin, ustiloxin, vinblastine, vincristine, and the like, stabilizers binding to the taxol binding site such as discodermalide, epothilone, taxol, paclitaxol, and the like, inhibitors binding to the colchicine binding site such as, colchicine, combretastatin, curacin A, podophyllotoxin, steganacine, and the like, and others binding to undefined sites such as cryptophycin, tubulysins, and the like.
  • In one embodiment, the tubulsyin is a naturally occurring tubulysin. In another embodiment, the tubulsyin is a synthetic or semi-synthetic tubulysin. Additional tubulysin that may be included in the conjugates described herein are described in PCT international application serial No. PCT/US2008/056824, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • In one embodiment of the drug delivery conjugates described herein, at least one of the drugs is a microtubule inhibitor, or an analog or derivative thereof. In another embodiment, at least one of the drugs is a DNA alkylation agent. In another embodiment, at least one of the drugs is a DNA alkylation agent, and at least one other of the drugs is a microtubule inhibitor.
  • In another embodiment of the drug delivery conjugates described herein, at least one of the drugs is a P-glycoprotein (PGP) inhibitor. In another embodiment, at least one of the drugs included on the drug delivery conjugates described herein is a PGP inhibitor, and at least one other of the drugs included on the drug delivery conjugates is a PGP substrate. Illustratively in this latter embodiment, the PGP substrate is a DNA alkylating agent. Referring to this embodiment, it is appreciated that pairing a POP inhibitor with a PGP substrate, such as a DNA alkylating agent including, but not limited to, any of the mitomycins like mitomycin C, mitomycin A, and the like may improve the overall performance of the drug that is otherwise a PGP substrate. In the releasable conjugates described herein, the PGP inhibitor drug and the PGP substrate drug are both released in the cell after endocytosis. In that manner, the PGP inhibitor drug may improve the overall efficacy and/or potency of the PGP substrate drug. In addition, the PGP inhibitor may reduces PGP expression, which in turn will decrease efflux of one or more of the drugs included on the multidrug conjugates described herein from the pathogenic cell. It is appreciated that the mitomycins, or analogs or derivatives thereof, such as mitomycin C may operate as a PGP inhibitor, or down-regulator of PGP. It is further appreciated that the vinca alkaloid, or analog or derivative thereof, such as vinblastine analogs and derivatives, may be a PGP substrate that is protected from efflux from the pathogenic cell by the PGP inhibitor or down-regulator.
  • In another embodiment of the drug delivery conjugates described herein, at least one of the drugs is a vinca alkaloid, or an analog or derivative thereof. Vinca alklaloids described herein include all members of the vinca indole-dihydroindole family of alkaloids, such as but not limited to vindesine, vinblastine, vincristine, catharanthine, vindoline, leurosine, vinorelbine, imidocarb, sibutramine, toltrazuril, vinblastinoic acid, and the like, and analogs and derivatives thereof.
  • In another embodiment, methods for treating diseases caused by or evidenced by pathogenic cell populations are described herein. The binding ligand (B) drug delivery conjugates can be used to treat disease states characterized by the presence of a pathogenic cell population in the host wherein the members of the pathogenic cell population have an accessible binding site for the binding ligand (B), or analog or derivative thereof, wherein the binding site is uniquely expressed, overexpressed, or preferentially expressed by the pathogenic cells. The selective elimination of the pathogenic cells is mediated by the binding of the ligand moiety of the binding ligand (B) drug delivery conjugate to a ligand receptor, transporter, or other surface-presented protein that specifically binds the binding ligand (B), or analog or derivative thereof, and which is uniquely expressed, overexpressed, or preferentially expressed by the pathogenic cells. A surface-presented protein uniquely expressed, overexpressed, or preferentially expressed by the pathogenic cells is a receptor not present or present at lower concentrations on non-pathogenic cells providing a means for selective elimination of the pathogenic cells.
  • For example, surface-expressed vitamin receptors, such as the high-affinity folate receptor, are overexpressed on cancer cells. Epithelial cancers of the ovary, mammary gland, colon, lung, nose, throat, and brain have all been reported to express elevated levels of the folate receptor. In fact, greater than 90% of all human ovarian tumors are known to express large amounts of this receptor. Accordingly, the binding ligand (B) drug delivery conjugates described herein can be used to treat a variety of tumor cell types, as well as other types of pathogenic cells, such as infectious agents, that preferentially express ligand receptors, such as vitamin receptors, and, thus, have surface accessible binding sites for ligands, such as vitamins, or vitamin analogs or derivatives. In one aspect, methods are described herein for targeting binding ligand-linker-drug conjugates to maximize targeting of the pathogenic cells for elimination.
  • The invention further contemplates the use of combinations of binding ligand-linker-drug conjugates to maximize targeting of the pathogenic cells for elimination.
  • The binding ligand (B) drug delivery conjugates described herein can be used for both human clinical medicine and veterinary applications. Thus, the host animal harboring the population of pathogenic cells and treated with the binding ligand (e.g., a vitamin) drug delivery conjugates can be human or, in the case of veterinary applications, can be a laboratory, agricultural, domestic, or wild animal. The methods described herein can be applied to host animals including, but not limited to, humans, laboratory animals such rodents (e.g., mice, rats, hamsters, etc.), rabbits, monkeys, chimpanzees, domestic animals such as dogs, cats, and rabbits, agricultural animals such as cows, horses, pigs, sheep, goats, and wild animals in captivity such as bears, pandas, lions, tigers, leopards, elephants, zebras, giraffes, gorillas, dolphins, and whales.
  • The methods are applicable to populations of pathogenic cells that cause a variety of pathologies in these host animals. The term pathogenic cells refers to for example cancer cells, infectious agents such as bacteria and viruses, bacteria- or virus-infected cells, activated macrophages capable of causing a disease state, and any other type of pathogenic cells that uniquely express, preferentially express, or overexpress binding ligand receptors, such as vitamin receptors or receptors that bind analogs or derivatives of vitamins. Pathogenic cells can also include any cells causing a disease state for which treatment with the binding ligand drug delivery conjugates described herein results in reduction of the symptoms of the disease. For example, the pathogenic cells can be host cells that are pathogenic under some circumstances such as cells of the immune system that are responsible for graft versus host disease, but not pathogenic under other circumstances.
  • Thus, the population of pathogenic cells can be a cancer cell population that is tumorigenic, including benign tumors and malignant tumors, or it can be non-tumorigenic. The cancer cell population can arise spontaneously or by such processes as mutations present in the germline of the host animal or somatic mutations, or it can be chemically-, virally-, or radiation-induced. The methods can be utilized to treat such cancers as carcinomas, sarcomas, lymphomas, Hodgkin's disease, melanomas, mesotheliomas, Burkitt's lymphoma, nasopharyngeal carcinomas, leukemias, and myelomas. The cancer cell population can include, but is not limited to, oral, thyroid, endocrine, skin, gastric, esophageal, laryngeal, pancreatic, colon, bladder, bone, ovarian, cervical, uterine, breast, testicular, prostate, rectal, kidney, liver, and lung cancers.
  • In embodiments where the pathogenic cell population is a cancer cell population, the effect of conjugate administration is a therapeutic response measured by reduction or elimination of tumor mass or of inhibition of tumor cell proliferation. In the case of a tumor, the elimination can be an elimination of cells of the primary tumor or of cells that have metastasized or are in the process of dissociating from the primary tumor. A prophylactic treatment with the binding ligand (B) drug delivery conjugate (e.g., a vitamin used as the binding ligand) to prevent return of a tumor after its removal by any therapeutic approach including surgical removal of the tumor, radiation therapy, chemotherapy, or biological therapy is also described. The prophylactic treatment can be an initial treatment with the binding ligand (B) drug delivery conjugate, such as treatment in a multiple dose daily regimen, and/or can be an additional treatment or series of treatments after an interval of days or months following the initial treatment(s). Accordingly, elimination of any of the pathogenic cell populations treated using the described methods includes reduction in the number of pathogenic cells, inhibition of proliferation of pathogenic cells, a prophylactic treatment that prevents return of pathogenic cells, or a treatment of pathogenic cells that results in reduction of the symptoms of disease.
  • In cases where cancer cells are being eliminated, the methods can be used in combination with surgical removal of a tumor, radiation therapy, chemotherapy, or biological therapies such as other immunotherapies including, but not limited to, monoclonal antibody therapy, treatment with immunomodulatory agents, adoptive transfer of immune effector cells, treatment with hematopoietic growth factors, cytokines and vaccination.
  • The methods are also applicable to populations of pathogenic cells that cause a variety of infectious diseases. For example, the methods are applicable to such populations of pathogenic cells as bacteria, fungi, including yeasts, viruses, virus-infected cells, mycoplasma, and parasites. Infectious organisms that can be treated with the binding ligand (B) drug delivery conjugates described herein are any art-recognized infectious organisms that cause pathogenesis in an animal, including such organisms as bacteria that are gram-negative or gram-positive cocci or bacilli. For example, Proteus species, Klebsiella species, Providencia species, Yersinia species, Erwinia species, Enterobacter species, Salmonella species, Serratia species, Aerobacter species, Escherichia species, Pseudomonas species, Shigella species, Vibrio species, Aeromonas species, Campylobacter species, Streptococcus species, Staphylococcus species, Lactobacillus species, Micrococcus species, Moraxella species, Bacillus species, Clostridium species, Corynebacterium species, Eberthella species, Micrococcus species, Mycobacterium species, Neisseria species, Haemophilus species, Bacteroides species, Listeria species, Erysipelothrix species, Acinetobacter species, Brucella species, Pasteurella species, Vibrio species, Flavobacterium species, Fusobacterium species, Streptobacillus species, Calymmatobacterium species, Legionella species, Treponema species, Borrelia species, Leptospira species, Actinomyces species, Nocardia species, Rickettsia species, and any other bacterial species that causes disease in a host can be treated with the binding ligand drug delivery conjugates described herein.
  • Of particular interest are bacteria that are resistant to antibiotics such as antibiotic-resistant Streptococcus species and Staphlococcus species, or bacteria that are susceptible to antibiotics, but cause recurrent infections treated with antibiotics so that resistant organisms eventually develop. Bacteria that are susceptible to antibiotics, but cause recurrent infections treated with antibiotics so that resistant organisms eventually develop, can be treated with the binding ligand (B) drug delivery conjugates described herein in the absence of antibiotics, or in combination with lower doses of antibiotics than would normally be administered to a patient, to avoid the development of these antibiotic-resistant bacterial strains,
  • Viruses, such as DNA and RNA viruses, can also be treated with the described methods. Such viruses include, but are not limited to, DNA viruses such as papilloma viruses, parvoviruses, adenoviruses, herpesviruses and vaccinia viruses, and RNA viruses, such as arenaviruses, coronaviruses, rhinoviruses, respiratory syncytial viruses, influenza viruses, picornaviruses, paramyxoviruses, reoviruses, retroviruses, lentiviruses, and rhabdoviruses.
  • The methods are also applicable to any fungi, including yeasts, mycoplasma species, parasites, or other infectious organisms that cause disease in animals. Examples of fungi that can be treated with the methods and compositions include fungi that grow as molds or are yeastlike, including, for example, fungi that cause diseases such as ringworm, histoplasmosis, blastomycosis, aspergillosis, cryptococcosis, sporotrichosis, coccidioidomycosis, paracoccidio-idomycosis, mucormycosis, chromoblastomycosis, dermatophytosis, protothecosis, fusariosis, pityriasis, mycetoma, paracoccidioidomycosis, phaeohyphomycosis, pseudallescheriasis, sporotrichosis, trichosporosis, pneumocystis infection, and candidiasis.
  • The methods can also be utilized to treat parasitic infections including, but not limited to, infections caused by tapeworms, such as Taenia, Hymenolepsis, Diphyllobothrium, and Echinococcus species, flukes, such as Fasciolopsis, Heterophyes, Metagonimus, Clonorchis, Fasciola, Paragonimus, and Schitosoma species, roundworms, such as Enterobius, Trichuris, Ascaris, Ancylostoma, Necator, Strongyloides, Trichinella, Wuchereria, Brugia, Loa Onchocerca, and Dracunculus species, ameba, such as Naegleria and Acanthamoeba species, and protozoans, such as Plasmodium, Trypanosoma, Leishmania, Toxoplasma, Entamoeba, Giardia, Isospora, Cryptosporidium, and Enterocytozoon species.
  • The pathogenic cells to which the binding ligand drug delivery conjugates described herein are directed can also be cells harboring endogenous pathogens, such as virus-, mycoplasma-, parasite-, or bacteria-infected cells, if these cells preferentially express ligand receptors, such as vitamin receptors.
  • In one embodiment, the binding ligand drug delivery conjugates can be internalized into the targeted pathogenic cells upon binding of the binding ligand moiety to a receptor, transporter, or other surface-presented protein that specifically binds the ligand and which is preferentially expressed on the pathogenic cells. Such internalization can occur, for example, through receptor-mediated endocytosis. If the binding ligand (B) drug delivery conjugate contains a releasable linker, the binding ligand moiety and the drug can dissociate intracellularly and the drug can act on its intracellular target.
  • In an alternate embodiment, the binding ligand moiety of the drug delivery conjugate can bind to the pathogenic cell placing the drug in close association with the surface of the pathogenic cell. The drug can then be released by cleavage of the releasable linker. For example, the drug can be released by a protein disulfide isomerase if the releasable linker is a disulfide group. The drug can then be taken up by the pathogenic cell to which the binding ligand (B) drug delivery conjugate is bound, or the drug can be taken up by another pathogenic cell in close proximity thereto. Alternatively, the drug could be released by a protein disulfide isomerase inside the cell where the releasable linker is a disulfide group. The drug may also be released by a hydrolytic mechanism, such as acid-catalyzed hydrolysis, as described above for certain beta elimination mechanisms, or by an anchimerically assisted cleavage through an oxonium ion or lactonium ion producing mechanism. The selection of the releasable linker or linkers will dictate the mechanism by which the drug is released from the conjugate. It is appreciated that such a selection can be pre-defined by the conditions wherein the drug conjugate will be used. Alternatively, the drug delivery conjugates can be internalized into the targeted cells upon binding, and the binding ligand and the drug can remain associated intracellularly with the drug exhibiting its effects without dissociation from the vitamin moiety.
  • In still another embodiment where the binding ligand is a vitamin, the vitamin-drug delivery conjugate can act through a mechanism independent of cellular vitamin receptors. For example, the drug delivery conjugates can bind to soluble vitamin receptors present in the serum or to serum proteins, such as albumin, resulting in prolonged circulation of the conjugates relative to the unconjugated drug, and in increased activity of the conjugates towards the pathogenic cell population relative to the unconjugated drug.
  • In another embodiment, where the linker does not comprise a releasable linker, the vitamin moiety of the drug delivery conjugate can bind to the pathogenic cell placing the drug on the surface of the pathogenic cell to target the pathogenic cell for attack by other molecules capable of binding to the drug. Alternatively, in this embodiment, the drug delivery conjugates can be internalized into the targeted cells upon binding, and the vitamin moiety and the drug can remain associated intracellularly with the drug exhibiting its effects without dissociation from the vitamin moiety.
  • In another embodiment of this invention, a cell receptor binding delivery conjugate of the general formula B-L-A is provided, where L is as defined herein, and A is a drug such as an immunogen. The immunogen can be a hapten, for example, fluorescein, dinitrophenyl, and the like. In this embodiment, the vitamin receptor binding drug delivery conjugate binds to the surface of the pathogenic cells and “labels” the cells with the immunogen, thereby triggering an immune response directed at the labeled pathogenic cell population. Antibodies administered to the host in a passive immunization or antibodies existing in the host system from a preexisting innate or acquired immunity bind to the immunogen and trigger endogenous immune responses. Antibody binding to the cell-bound vitamin-immunogen conjugate results in complement-mediated cytotoxicity, antibody-dependent cell-mediated cytotoxicity, antibody opsonization and phagocytosis, antibody-induced receptor clustering signaling cell death or quiescence, or any other humoral or cellular immune response stimulated by antibody binding to cell-bound ligand-immunogen conjugates. In cases where an immunogen can be directly recognized by immune cells without prior antibody opsonization, direct killing of the pathogenic cells can occur. This embodiment is described in more detail in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/822,379, incorporated herein by reference. It is appreciated that in certain variations of this embodiment where the drug is an immunogen, the polyvalent linker may also include releasable linkers, as described above, such as a vitamin receptor binding drug delivery conjugate of the general formula B-L-A where L is a linker that comprises one or more hydrophilic spacer linkers and a releaseable linker.
  • The binding ligand (B) drug delivery conjugates described herein comprise a binding ligand, a polyvalent linker (L), a drug, and, optionally, heteroatom linkers to link the binding ligand and the drug to the polyvalent linker (L). The polyvalent linker (L) can comprise a spacer linker, a releasable (i.e., cleavable) linker, and an heteroatom linker, or combinations thereof.
  • The drug can be any molecule capable of modulating or otherwise modifying cell function, including pharmaceutically active compounds. Suitable molecules can include, but are not limited to: peptides, oligopeptides, retro-inverso oligopeptides, proteins, protein analogs in which at least one non-peptide linkage replaces a peptide linkage, apoproteins, glycoproteins, enzymes, coenzymes, enzyme inhibitors, amino acids and their derivatives, receptors and other membrane proteins; antigens and antibodies thereto; haptens and antibodies thereto; hormones, lipids, phospholipids, liposomes; toxins; antibiotics; analgesics; bronchodilators; beta-blockers; antimicrobial agents; antihypertensive agents; cardiovascular agents including antiarrhythmics, cardiac glycosides, antianginals and vasodilators; central nervous system agents including stimulants, psychotropics, antimanics, and depressants; antiviral agents; antihistamines; cancer drugs including chemotherapeutic agents; tranquilizers; anti-depressants; H-2 antagonists; anticonvulsants; antinauseants; prostaglandins and prostaglandin analogs; muscle relaxants; anti-inflammatory substances; stimulants; decongestants; antiemetics; diuretics; antispasmodics; antiasthmatics; anti-Parkinson agents; expectorants; cough suppressants; mucolytics; and mineral and nutritional additives.
  • Further, the drug can be any drug known in the art which is cytotoxic, enhances tumor permeability, inhibits tumor cell proliferation, promotes apoptosis, decreases anti-apoptotic activity in target cells, is used to treat diseases caused by infectious agents, enhances an endogenous immune response directed to the pathogenic cells, or is useful for treating a disease state caused by any type of pathogenic cell. Drugs suitable for use in accordance with this invention include adrenocorticoids and corticosteroids, alkylating agents, antiandrogens, antiestrogens, androgens, aclamycin and aclamycin derivatives, estrogens, antimetabolites such as cytosine arabinoside, purine analogs, pyrimidine analogs, and methotrexate, busulfan, carboplatin, chlorambucil, cisplatin and other platinum compounds, tamoxiphen, taxol, paclitaxel, paclitaxel derivatives, Taxotere®, cyclophosphamide, daunomycin, daunorubicin, doxorubicin, rhizoxin, T2 toxin, plant alkaloids, prednisone, hydroxyurea, teniposide, mitomycins, discodermolides, microtubule inhibitors, epothilones, tubulysin, cyclopropyl benz[e]indolone, seco-cyclopropyl benz[e]indolone, O-Ac-seco-cyclopropyl benz[e]indolone, bleomycin and any other antibiotic, nitrogen mustards, nitrosureas, vincristine, vinblastine, analogs and derivative thereof such as deacetylvinblastine monohydrazide, and other vinca alkaloids, including those described in PCT international publication No. WO 2007/022493, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference, colchicine, colchicine derivatives, allocolchicine, thiocolchicine, trityl cysteine, Halicondrin B, dolastatins such as dolastatin 10, amanitins such as α-amanitin, camptothecin, irinotecan, and other camptothecin derivatives thereof, maytansines, geldanamycin and geldanamycin derivatives, estramustine, nocodazole, MAP4, colcemid, inflammatory and proinflammatory agents, peptide and peptidomimetic signal transduction inhibitors, and any other art-recognized drug or toxin. Other drugs that can be used in accordance with the invention include penicillins, cephalosporins, vancomycin, erythromycin, clindamycin, rifampin, chloramphenicol, aminoglycoside antibiotics, gentamicin, amphotericin B, acyclovir, trifluridine, ganciclovir, zidovudine, amantadine, ribavirin, and any other art-recognized antimicrobial compound.
  • In another embodiment, the agent (A) is a drug selected from a vinca alkaloid, such as DAVLBH, a cryptophycin, bortezomib, thiobortezomib, a tubulysin, aminopterin, rapamycin, paclitaxel, docetaxel, doxorubicin, daunorubicin, everolimus, α-amanatin, verucarin, didemnin B, geldanomycin, purvalanol A, everolimus, ispinesib, budesonide, dasatinib, an epothilone, a maytansine, and a tyrosine kinase inhibitor, including analogs and derivatives of the foregoing. In another embodiment, the conjugate includes at least two agents (A) selected from a vinca alkaloid, such as DAVLBH, a cryptophycin, bortezomib, thiobortezomib, a tubulysin, aminopterin, rapamycin, paclitaxel, docetaxel, doxorubicin, daunorubicin, everolimus, α-amanatin, verucarin, didemnin B, geldanomycin, purvalanol A, everolimus, ispinesib, budesonide, dasatinib, an epothilone, a maytansine, and a tyrosine kinase inhibitor, including analogs and derivatives of the foregoing. In one variation, the agents (A) are the same. In another variation, the agents (A) are different.
  • In one embodiment, the drugs for use in the methods described herein remain stable in serum for at least 4 hours. In another embodiment the drugs have an IC50 in the nanomolar range, and, in another embodiment, the drugs are water soluble. If the drug is not water soluble, the polyvalent linker (L) can be derivatized to enhance water solubility. The term “drug” also means any of the drug analogs or derivatives described hereinabove. It should be appreciated that in accordance with this invention, a drug analog or derivative can mean a drug that incorporates an heteroatom through which the drug analog or derivative is covalently bound to the polyvalent linker (L).
  • The binding ligand drug delivery conjugates can comprise a binding ligand (B), a bivalent linker (L), a drug, and, optionally, heteroatom linkers to link the binding ligand (B) receptor binding moiety and the drug to the bivalent linker (L). In one illustrative embodiment, it should be appreciated that a vitamin analog or derivative can mean a vitamin that incorporates an heteroatom through which the vitamin analog or derivative is covalently bound to the bivalent linker (L). Thus, in this illustrative embodiment, the vitamin can be covalently bound to the bivalent linker (L) through an heteroatom linker, or a vitamin analog or derivative (i.e., incorporating an heteroatom) can be directly bound to the bivalent linker (L). In similar illustrative embodiments, a drug analog or derivative is a drug, and a drug analog or derivative can mean a drug that incorporates an heteroatom through which the drug analog or derivative is covalently bound to the bivalent linker (L). Thus, in these illustrative aspects, the drug can be covalently bound to the bivalent linker (L) through an heteroatom linker, or a drug analog or derivative (i.e., incorporating an heteroatom) can be directly bound to the bivalent linker (L). The bivalent linker (L) can comprise a spacer linker, a releasable (i.e., cleavable) linker, and an heteroatom linker to link the spacer linker to the releasable linker in conjugates containing both of these types of linkers.
  • Generally, any manner of forming a conjugate between the bivalent linker (L) and the binding ligand (B), or analog or derivative thereof, between the bivalent linker (L) and the drug, or analog or derivative thereof, including any intervening heteroatom linkers, can be utilized. Also, any art-recognized method of forming a conjugate between the spacer linker, the releasable linker, and the heteroatom linker to form the bivalent linker (L) can be used. The conjugate can be formed by direct conjugation of any of these molecules, for example, through complexation, or through hydrogen, ionic, or covalent bonds. Covalent bonding can occur, for example, through the formation of amide, ester, disulfide, or imino bonds between acid, aldehyde, hydroxy, amino, sulfhydryl, or hydrazo groups.
  • In another embodiment, the bivalent linker (L) includes a chain of atoms selected from C, N, O, S, Si, and P that covalently connects the binding ligand (B), the hydrophilic linker, and/or the agent (A). The linker may have a wide variety of lengths, such as in the range from about 2 to about 100 atoms. The atoms used in forming the linker may be combined in all chemically relevant ways, such as chains of carbon atoms forming alkylene, alkenylene, and alkynylene groups, and the like; chains of carbon and oxygen atoms forming ethers, polyoxyalkylene groups, or when combined with carbonyl groups forming esters and carbonates, and the like; chains of carbon and nitrogen atoms forming amines, imines, polyamines, hydrazines, hydrazones, or when combined with carbonyl groups forming amides, ureas, semicarbazides, carbazides, and the like; chains of carbon, nitrogen, and oxygen atoms forming alkoxyamines, alkoxylamines, or when combined with carbonyl groups forming urethanes, amino acids, acyloxylamines, hydroxamic acids, and the like; and many others. In addition, it is to be understood that the atoms forming the chain in each of the foregoing illustrative embodiments may be either saturated or unsaturated, such that for example, alkanes, alkenes, alkynes, imines, and the like may be radicals that are included in the linker. In addition, it is to be understood that the atoms forming the linker may also be cyclized upon each other to form divalent cyclic structures that form the linker, including cyclo alkanes, cyclic ethers, cyclic amines, arylenes, heteroarylenes, and the like in the linker.
  • In another embodiment, pharmaceutical compositions comprising an amount of a binding ligand (B) drug delivery conjugate effective to eliminate a population of pathogenic cells in a host animal when administered in one or more doses are described. The binding ligand drug delivery conjugate is preferably administered to the host animal parenterally, e.g., intradermally, subcutaneously, intramuscularly, intraperitoneally, intravenously, or intrathecally. Alternatively, the binding ligand drug delivery conjugate can be administered to the host animal by other medically useful processes, such as orally, and any effective dose and suitable therapeutic dosage form, including prolonged release dosage forms, can be used.
  • Examples of parenteral dosage forms include aqueous solutions of the active agent, in an isotonic saline, 5% glucose or other well-known pharmaceutically acceptable liquid carriers such as liquid alcohols, glycols, esters, and amides. The parenteral dosage form can be in the form of a reconstitutable lyophilizate comprising the dose of the drug delivery conjugate. In one aspect of the present embodiment, any of a number of prolonged release dosage forms known in the art can be administered such as, for example, the biodegradable carbohydrate matrices described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,713,249; 5,266,333; and 5,417,982, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference, or, alternatively, a slow pump (e.g., an osmotic pump) can be used.
  • In one illustrative aspect, at least one additional composition comprising a therapeutic factor can be administered to the host in combination or as an adjuvant to the above-detailed methodology, to enhance the binding ligand drug delivery conjugate-mediated elimination of the population of pathogenic cells, or more than one additional therapeutic factor can be administered. The therapeutic factor can be selected from a chemotherapeutic agent, or another therapeutic factor capable of complementing the efficacy of the administered binding ligand drug delivery conjugate.
  • In one illustrative aspect, therapeutically effective combinations of these factors can be used. In one embodiment, for example, therapeutically effective amounts of the therapeutic factor, for example, in amounts ranging from about 0.1 MIU/m2/dose/day to about 15 MIU/m2/dose/day in a multiple dose daily regimen, or for example, in amounts ranging from about 0.1 MIU/m2/dose/day to about 7.5 MIU/m2/dose/day in a multiple dose daily regimen, can be used along with the binding ligand drug delivery conjugates to eliminate, reduce, or neutralize pathogenic cells in a host animal harboring the pathogenic cells (MIU=million international units; m2=approximate body surface area of an average human).
  • In another embodiment, chemotherapeutic agents, which are, for example, cytotoxic themselves or can work to enhance tumor permeability, are also suitable for use in the described methods in combination with the binding ligand drug delivery conjugates. Such chemotherapeutic agents include adrenocorticoids and corticosteroids, alkylating agents, antiandrogens, antiestrogens, androgens, aclamycin and aclamycin derivatives, estrogens, antimetabolites such as cytosine arabinoside, purine analogs, pyrimidine analogs, and methotrexate, busulfan, carboplatin, chlorambucil, cisplatin and other platinum compounds, tamoxiphen, taxol, paclitaxel, paclitaxel derivatives, Taxotere®, cyclophosphamide, daunomycin, daunorubicin, doxorubicin, rhizoxin, T2 toxin, plant alkaloids, prednisone, hydroxyurea, teniposide, mitomycins, discodermolides, microtubule inhibitors, epothilones, tubulysin, cyclopropyl benz[e]indolone, seco-cyclopropyl benz[e]indolone, O-Ac-seco-cyclopropyl benz[e]indolone, bleomycin and any other antibiotic, nitrogen mustards, nitrosureas, vincristine, vinblastine, and analogs and derivative thereof such as deacetylvinblastine monohydrazide, colchicine, colchicine derivatives, allocolchicine, thiocolchicine, trityl cysteine, Halicondrin B, dolastatins such as dolastatin 10, amanitins such as α-amanitin, camptothecin, irinotecan, and other camptothecin derivatives thereof, geldanamycin and geldanamycin derivatives, estramustine, nocodazole, MAP4, colcemid, inflammatory and proinflammatory agents, peptide and peptidomimetic signal transduction inhibitors, and any other art-recognized drug or toxin. Other drugs that can be used include penicillins, cephalosporins, vancomycin, erythromycin, clindamycin, rifampin, chloramphenicol, aminoglycoside antibiotics, gentamicin, amphotericin B, acyclovir, trifluridine, ganciclovir, zidovudine, amantadine, ribavirin, maytansines and analogs and derivatives thereof, gemcitabine, and any other art-recognized antimicrobial compound.
  • The therapeutic factor can be administered to the host animal prior to, after, or at the same time as the binding ligand drug delivery conjugates and the therapeutic factor can be administered as part of the same composition containing the binding ligand drug delivery conjugate or as part of a different composition than the binding ligand drug delivery conjugate. Any such therapeutic composition containing the therapeutic factor at a therapeutically effective dose can be used.
  • Additionally, more than one type of binding ligand drug delivery conjugate can be used. Illustratively, for example, the host animal can be treated with conjugates with different vitamins, but the same drug in a co-dosing protocol. In other embodiments, the host animal can be treated with conjugates comprising the same binding ligand linked to different drugs, or various binding ligands linked to various drugs. In another illustrative embodiment, binding ligand drug delivery conjugates with the same or different vitamins, and the same or different drugs comprising multiple vitamins and multiple drugs as part of the same drug delivery conjugate could be used.
  • The unitary daily dosage of the binding ligand drug delivery conjugate can vary significantly depending on the host condition, the disease state being treated, the molecular weight of the conjugate, its route of administration and tissue distribution, and the possibility of co-usage of other therapeutic treatments such as radiation therapy. The effective amount to be administered to a patient is based on body surface area, patient weight, and physician assessment of patient condition. In illustrative embodiments, effective doses can range, for example, from about 1 ng/kg to about 1 mg/kg, from about 1 μg/kg to about 500 μg/kg, from about 1 μg/kg to about 100 μg/kg, from about 1 μg/kg to about 50 μg/kg, and from about 1 μg/kg to about 10 μg/kg.
  • In another illustrative aspect, any effective regimen for administering the binding ligand drug delivery conjugates can be used. For example, the binding ligand drug delivery conjugates can be administered as single doses, or can be divided and administered as a multiple-dose daily regimen. In other embodiments, a staggered regimen, for example, one to three days per week can be used as an alternative to daily treatment, and such intermittent or staggered daily regimen is considered to be equivalent to every day treatment and within the scope of the methods described herein. In one embodiment, the host is treated with multiple injections of the binding ligand drug delivery conjugate to eliminate the population of pathogenic cells. In another embodiment, the host is injected multiple times (preferably about 2 up to about 50 times) with the binding ligand drug delivery conjugate, for example, at 12-72 hour intervals or at 48-72 hour intervals. In other embodiments, additional injections of the binding ligand drug delivery conjugate can be administered to the patient at an interval of days or months after the initial injections(s) and the additional injections prevent recurrence of the disease state caused by the pathogenic cells.
  • In one embodiment, vitamins, or analogs or derivatives thereof, that can be used in the binding ligand drug delivery conjugates include those that bind to receptors expressed specifically on activated macrophages, such as the folate receptor which binds folate, or an analog or derivative thereof. The folate-linked conjugates, for example, can be used to kill or suppress the activity of activated macrophages that cause disease states in the host. Such macrophage targeting conjugates, when administered to a patient suffering from an activated macrophage-mediated disease state, work to concentrate and associate the conjugated drug in the population of activated macrophages to kill the activated macrophages or suppress macrophage function. Elimination, reduction, or deactivation of the activated macrophage population works to stop or reduce the activated macrophage-mediated pathogenesis characteristic of the disease state being treated. Exemplary of diseases known to be mediated by activated macrophages include rheumatoid arthritis, ulcerative colitis, Crohn's disease, psoriasis, osteomyelitis, multiple sclerosis, atherosclerosis, pulmonary fibrosis, sarcoidosis, systemic sclerosis, organ transplant rejection (GVHD) and chronic inflammations. Administration of the drug delivery conjugate is typically continued until symptoms of the disease state are reduced or eliminated.
  • Illustratively, the binding ligand drug delivery conjugates administered to kill activated macrophages or suppress the function of activated macrophages can be administered parenterally to the animal or patient suffering from the disease state, for example, intradermally, subcutaneously, intramuscularly, intraperitoneally, or intravenously in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. In another embodiment, the binding ligand drug delivery conjugates can be administered to the animal or patient by other medically useful procedures and effective doses can be administered in standard or prolonged release dosage forms. In another aspect, the therapeutic method can be used alone or in combination with other therapeutic methods recognized for treatment of disease states mediated by activated macrophages.
  • The drug delivery conjugates described herein can be prepared by art-recognized synthetic methods. The synthetic methods are chosen depending upon the selection of the optionally addition heteroatoms or the heteroatoms that are already present on the spacer linkers, releasable linkers, the drug, and/or or the binding ligand. In general, the relevant bond forming reactions are described in Richard C. Larock, “Comprehensive Organic Transformations, a guide to functional group preparations,” VCH Publishers, Inc. New York (1989), and in Theodora E. Greene & Peter G. M. Wuts, “Protective Groups ion Organic Synthesis,” 2 d edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc. New York (1991), the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference. Additional details for preparing functional groups, including amides and esters, ketals and acetals, succinimides, silyloxys, hydrazones, acyl hydrazines, semicarbazones, disulfides, carbonates, sulfonates, and the like contained in the linker, including releasable linkers are described in U.S. patent application publication No. US 2005/0002942 A1, incorporated herein in its entirety by reference.
  • General formation of folate-peptides. The folate-containing peptidyl fragment Pte-Glu-(AA), —NH(CHR2)CO2H (3) is prepared by a polymer-supported sequential approach using standard methods, such as the Fmoc-strategy on an acid-sensitive Fmoc-AA-Wang resin (1), as shown in Scheme 1.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00126
  • In this illustrative embodiment of the processes described herein, R1 is Fmoc, R2 is the desired appropriately-protected amino acid side chain, and DIPEA is diisopropylethylamine. Standard coupling procedures, such as PyBOP and others described herein or known in the art are used, where the coupling agent is illustratively applied as the activating reagent to ensure efficient coupling. Fmoc protecting groups are removed after each coupling step under standard conditions, such as upon treatment with piperidine, tetrabutylammonium fluoride (TBAF), and the like. Appropriately protected amino acid building blocks, such as Fmoc-Glu-OtBu, N10-TFA-Pte-OH, and the like, are used, as described in Scheme 1, and represented in step (b) by Fmoc-AA-OH. Thus, AA refers to any amino acid starting material, that is appropriately protected. It is to be understood that the term amino acid as used herein is intended to refer to any reagent having both an amine and a carboxylic acid functional group separated by one or more carbons, and includes the naturally occurring alpha and beta amino acids, as well as amino acid derivatives and analogs of these amino acids. In particular, amino acids having side chains that are protected, such as protected serine, threonine, cysteine, aspartate, and the like may also be used in the folate-peptide synthesis described herein. Further, gamma, delta, or longer homologous amino acids may also be included as starting materials in the folate-peptide synthesis described herein. Further, amino acid analogs having homologous side chains, or alternate branching structures, such as norleucine, isovaline, β-methyl threonine, β-methyl cysteine, β,β-dimethyl cysteine, and the like, may also be included as starting materials in the folate-peptide synthesis described herein.
  • The coupling sequence (steps (a) & (b)) involving Fmoc-AA-OH is performed “n” times to prepare solid-support peptide 2, where n is an integer and may equal 0 to about 100. Following the last coupling step, the remaining Fmoc group is removed (step (a)), and the peptide is sequentially coupled to a glutamate derivative (step (c)), deprotected, and coupled to TFA-protected pteroic acid (step (d)). Subsequently, the peptide is cleaved from the polymeric support upon treatment with trifluoroacetic acid, ethanedithiol, and triisopropylsilane (step (e)). These reaction conditions result in the simultaneous removal of the t-Bu, t-Boc, and Trt protecting groups that may form part of the appropriately-protected amino acid side chain. The TFA protecting group is removed upon treatment with base (step (f)) to provide the folate-containing peptidyl fragment 3.
  • In addition, the following illustrative process may be used to prepare compounds described herein, where is an integer such as 1 to about 10.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00127
  • It is to be understood that although the foregoing synthetic process is illustrated for selected compounds, such as the particular saccharopeptides shown, additional analogous compounds may be prepared using the same or similar process by the routine selection of starting materials and the routine optimization of reaction conditions.
  • The compounds described herein may be prepared using conventional synthetic organic chemistry. In addition, the following illustrative process may be used to prepare compounds described herein, where is an integer such as 1 to about 10.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00128
  • It is to be understood that although the foregoing synthetic process is illustrated for selected compounds, such as the particular saccharopeptides shown, additional analogous compounds may be prepared using the same or similar process by the routine selection of starting materials and the routine optimization of reaction conditions.
  • In addition, the following illustrative process may be used to prepare compounds described herein.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00129
  • It is to be understood that although the foregoing synthetic process is illustrated for selected compounds, additional analogous compounds may be prepared using the same or similar process by the routine selection of starting materials and the routine optimization of reaction conditions,
  • In each of the foregoing synthetic processes, the intermediates may be coupled with any additional hydrophilic spacer linkers, other spacer linkers, releasable linkers, or the agent A. In variations of each of the foregoing processes, additional hydrophilic spacer linkers, other spacer linkers, or releasable linkers may be inserted between the binding ligand B and the indicated hydrophilic spacer linkers. In addition, it is to be understood that the left-to-right arrangement of the bivalent hydrophilic spacer linkers is not limiting, and accordingly, the agent A, the binding ligand B, additional hydrophilic spacer linkers, other spacer linkers, and/or releasable linkers may be attached to either end of the hydrophilic spacer linkers described herein.
    • METHOD EXAMPLES
  • Relative Affinity Assay. The affinity for folate receptors (FRs) relative to folate was determined according to a previously described method (Westerhof, G. R., J. H. Schornagel, et al. (1995) Mol. Pharm. 48: 459-471) with slight modification. Briefly, FR-positive KB cells were heavily seeded into 24-well cell culture plates and allowed to adhere to the plastic for 18 h. Spent incubation media was replaced in designated wells with folate-free RPMI (FFRPMI) supplemented with 100 nM 3H-folic acid in the absence and presence of increasing concentrations of test article or folic acid. Cells were incubated for 60 min at 37° C. and then rinsed 3 times with PBS, pH 7.4. Five hundred microliters of 1% SDS in PBS, pH 7.4, were added per well. Cell lysates were then collected and added to individual vials containing 5 mL of scintillation cocktail, and then counted for radioactivity. Negative control tubes contained only the 3H-folic acid in FFRPMI (no competitor). Positive control tubes contained a final concentration of 1 mM folic acid, and CPMs measured in these samples (representing non-specific binding of label) were subtracted from all samples. Notably, relative affinities were defined as the inverse molar ratio of compound required to displace 50% of 3H-folic acid bound to the FR on KB cells, and the relative affinity of folic acid for the FR was set to 1.
  • Inhibition of Cellular DNA Synthesis. The compounds described herein were evaluated using an in vitro cytotoxicity assay that predicts the ability of the drug to inhibit the growth of folate receptor-positive KB cells. The compounds were comprised of folate linked to a respective chemotherapeutic drug, as prepared according to the protocols described herein. The KB cells were exposed for up to 7 h at 37° C. to the indicated concentrations of folate-drug conjugate in the absence or presence of at least a 100-fold excess of folic acid. The cells were then rinsed once with fresh culture medium and incubated in fresh culture medium for 72 hours at 37° C. Cell viability was assessed using a 3H-thymidine incorporation assay.
  • In Vitro Concentration-Dependent Cytotoxic Activity. Cells were heavily seeded in 24-well Falcon plates and allowed to form nearly confluent monolayers overnight. Thirty minutes prior to the addition of test article, spent medium was aspirated from all wells and replaced with fresh folate-free RPMI (FFRPMI). Note, designated wells received media containing 100 μM folic acid; and, cells within the latter wells were used to determine the targeting specificity, since cytotoxic activity produced in the presence of excess folic acid (enables competition for FR binding) would signify the portion of the total activity that was unrelated to FR-specific delivery. Following one rinse with 1 mL of fresh FFRPMI containing 10% heat-inactivated fetal calf serum, each well received 1 mL of media containing increasing concentrations of test article (4 wells per sample) in the presence or absence of 100 μM free folic acid (a binding site competitor). Treated cells were pulsed for 2 h at 37° C., rinsed 4 times with 0.5 mL of media, and then chased in 1 mL of fresh media up to 70 h. Spent media was aspirated from all wells and replaced with fresh media containing 5 μCi/mL 3H-thymidine. Following a further 2 h 37° C. incubation, cells were washed 3 times with 0.5 mL of PBS and then treated with 0.5 mL of ice-cold 5% trichloroacetic acid per well. After 15 min, the trichloroacetic acid was aspirated and the cell material solubilized by the addition of 0.5 mL of 0.25 N sodium hydroxide for 15 min. Four hundred and fifty μL of each solubilized sample were transferred to scintillation vials containing 3 mL of Ecolume scintillation cocktail and then counted in a liquid scintillation counter. Final tabulated results were expressed as the percentage of 3H-thymidine incorporation relative to untreated controls.
  • As shown in the figures herein, dose-dependent cytotoxicity was measurable, and in most cases, the IC50 values (concentration of drug conjugate required to reduce 3H-thymidine incorporation into newly synthesized DNA by 50%) were in the low nanomolar range. Furthermore, the cytotoxicities of these conjugates were reduced in the presence of excess free folic acid, indicating that the observed cell killing was mediated by binding to the folate receptor. The following table illustrated data for selected compounds against KB cells and against RAW264.7 cells
  • KB Cells RAW264.7 Cells
    Competable Competable
    Conjugate IC50 with xs IC50 with xs
    Number Base Drug(s) (nM) folate (nM) folate
    EC0234 DAVLBH 56 Yes
    EC0246 DAVLBH Yes
    EC0258 DAVLBH 8.4 Yes
    EC0262 cryptophycin
    4 Yes
    EC0263 DAVLBH
    11 Yes
    EC0409 DAVLBH 7 Yes
    EC0525 Thio-bortezomib 68 Yes
    EC0543 Tubulysin A 1.6 Yes
    EC0551 Aminopterin
    1 Yes
    EC0552 Rapamycin
    100 Yes
    EC0561 Paclitaxel 53 Yes
    EC0563 Thiobortezomib + 387 Yes
    Rapamycin
    EC0582 Thio-bortezomib + 51 Yes
    Everolimus
    EC0592 α-amanatin ~3 Yes 5 Yes
    EC0595 Bis-Thio-bortezomib 4 Yes
    EC0598 Verucarin 33 Yes
    EC0605 Bis-Verucarin 14 Yes
    EC0610 Didemnin B 4 Yes
    EC0647 Bis-Aminopterin 0.3 Yes
  • In Vitro Test against Various Cancer Cell Lines. Cells are heavily seeded in 24-well Falcon plates and allowed to form nearly confluent monolayers overnight. Thirty minutes prior to the addition of the test compound, spent medium is aspirated from all wells and replaced with fresh folate-deficient RPMI medium (FFRPMI). A subset of wells are designated to receive media containing 100 μM folic acid. The cells in the designated wells are used to determine the targeting specificity. Without being bound by theory it is suggested that the cytotoxic activity produced by test compounds in the presence of excess folic acid, i.e. where there is competition for FR binding, corresponds to the portion of the total activity that is unrelated to FR-specific delivery. Following one rinse with 1 mL of fresh FFRPMI containing 10% heat-inactivated fetal calf serum, each well receives 1 mL of medium containing increasing concentrations of test compound (4 wells per sample) in the presence or absence of 100 μM free folic acid as indicated. Treated cells are pulsed for 2 h at 37° C., rinsed 4 times with 0.5 mL of media, and then chased in 1 mL of fresh medium up to 70 h. Spent medium is aspirated from all wells and replaced with fresh medium containing 5 μCi/mL 3H-thymidine. Following a further 2 h 37° C. incubation, cells are washed 3 times with 0.5 mL of PBS and then treated with 0.5 mL of ice-cold 5% trichloroacetic acid per well. After 15 min, the trichloroacetic acid is aspirated and the cell material solubilized by the addition of 0.5 mL of 0.25 N sodium hydroxide for 15 min. A 450 μL aliquot of each solubilized sample is transferred to a scintillation vial containing 3 mL of Ecolume scintillation cocktail and then counted in a liquid scintillation counter. Final tabulated results are expressed as the percentage of 3H-thymidine incorporation relative to untreated controls.
  • Inhibition of Tumor Growth in Mice. Four to seven week-old mice (Balb/c or nu/nu strains) were purchased from Harlan Sprague Dawley, Inc. (Indianapolis, Ind.). Normal rodent chow contains a high concentration of folic acid (6 mg/kg chow); accordingly, mice used were maintained on the folate-free diet (Harlan diet #TD00434) for 1 week before tumor implantation to achieve serum folate concentrations close to the range of normal human serum. For tumor cell inoculation, 1×106 M109 cells (Balb/c strain) or 1×106 KB cells (nu/nu strain) in 100 μL were injected in the subcutis of the dorsal medial area. Tumors were measured in two perpendicular directions every 2-3 days using a caliper, and their volumes were calculated as 0.5×L×W2, where L=measurement of longest axis in mm and W=measurement of axis perpendicular to L in mm. Log cell kill (LCK) and treated over control (T/C) values were then calculated according to published procedures (see, e.g., Lee et al., “BMS-247550: a novel epothilone analog with a mode of action similar to paclitaxel but possessing superior antitumor efficacy” Clin Cancer Res 7:1429-1437 (2001); Rose, “Taxol-based combination chemotherapy and other in vivo preclinical antitumor studies” J Natl Cancer Inst Monogr 47-53 (1993)). Dosing solutions were prepared fresh each day in PBS and administered through the lateral tail vein of the mice. Dosing was initiated when the s.c. tumors had an average volume between 50-100 mm3 (to), typically 8 days post tumor inoculation (PTI) for KB tumors, and 11 days PTI for M109 tumors.
  • General KB Tumor Assay. The anti-tumor activity of the compounds described herein, when administered intravenously (i.v.) to tumor-bearing animals, was evaluated in nu/nu mice bearing subcutaneous KB tumors. Approximately 8 days post tumor inoculation in the subcutis of the right axilla with 1×106 KB cells (average tumor volume at to=50-100 mm3), in mice (5/group) were injected i.v. three times a week (TIW), for 3 weeks with 5 μmol/kg of the drug delivery conjugate or with an equivalent dose volume of PBS (control), unless otherwise indicated. Tumor growth was measured using calipers at 2-day or 3-day intervals in each treatment group. Tumor volumes were calculated using the equation V=a×b2/2, where “a” is the length of the tumor and “b” is the width expressed in millimeters.
  • General M109 Tumors Assay. The anti-tumor activity of the compounds described herein, when administered intravenously (i.v.) to tumor-bearing animals, was evaluated in Balb/c mice bearing subcutaneous M109 tumors (a syngeneic lung carcinoma). Approximately 11 days post tumor inoculation in the subcutis of the right axilla with 1×106 M109 cells (average tumor volume at to=60 mm3), mice (5/group) were injected i.v. three times a week (TIW), for 3 weeks with 1500 nmol/kg of the drug delivery conjugate or with an equivalent dose volume of PBS (control). Tumor growth was measured using calipers at 2-day or 3-day intervals in each treatment group. Tumor volumes were calculated using the equation V=a×b2/2, where “a” is the length of the tumor and “b” is the width expressed in millimeters.
  • General 4T-1 Tumor Assay. Six to seven week-old mice (female Balb/c strain) were obtained from Harlan, Inc., Indianapolis, Ind. The mice were maintained on Harlan's folate-free chow for a total of three weeks prior to the onset of and during this experiment. Folate receptor-negative 4T-1 tumor cells (1×106 cells per animal) were inoculated in the subcutis of the right axilla. Approximately 5 days post tumor inoculation when the 4T-1 tumor average volume was ˜100 mm3, mice (5/group) were injected i.v. three times a week (TIW), for 3 weeks with 3 μmol/kg of drug delivery conjugate or with an equivalent dose volume of PBS (control), unless otherwise indicated herein. Tumor growth was measured using calipers at 2-day or 3-day intervals in each treatment group. Tumor volumes were calculated using the equation V=a×b2/2, where “a” is the length of the tumor and “b” is the width expressed in millimeters.
  • The data shown in FIGS. 3A, 4A, 5A, 6A, 7A, 8A, and 10A indicate that the conjugates described herein exhibit superior efficacy in the treatment of tumors compared to the corresponding unconjugated compounds. Treatment of Balb/c mice with s.c. M109 tumors with EC0396 and EC145 (FIG. 4A) led to complete responses in all treated animals (3/3 for EC0396 and 5/5 for EC145). In addition, after nearly 70 days, no recurrence of disease was observed. Similarly, treatment with EC0400 (FIG. 5A) led to a complete response and no recurrence of disease after nearly 70 days. Treatment with the conjugated compounds described herein including a hydrophilic spacer linker (e.g. EC0436) were superior to comparison conjugates lacking hydrophilic spacer linkers (e.g. EC0305) showed superior efficacy (FIG. 8A). EC0436 showed a complete response in 5/5 animals with no recurrence of disease after 90 days.
  • Drug Toxicity Determinations. Persistent drug toxicity was assessed by collecting blood via cardiac puncture and submitting the serum for independent analysis of blood urea nitrogen (BUN), creatinine, total protein, AST-SGOT, ALT-SGPT plus a standard hematological cell panel at Ani-Lytics, Inc. (Gaithersburg, Md.). In addition, histopathologic evaluation of formalin-fixed heart, lungs, liver, spleen, kidney, intestine, skeletal muscle and bone (tibia/fibula) were conducted by board-certified pathologists at Animal Reference Pathology Laboratories (ARUP; Salt Lake City, Utah).
  • Toxicity as Measured by Weight Loss. The percentage weight change was determined in mice (5 mice/group) on selected days post-tumor inoculation (PTI), compared to controls, and graphed. As shown in FIGS. 3B, 4B, 5B, 6B, 7B, 8B, and 10B, the conjugated compounds described herein showed equal or less toxicity compared to unconjugated compounds, as determined by percent weight loss.
  • Single and Multiple Dose MTDapp on Mice. The compounds described herein may show a positive relationship between the number of hydrophilic spacer linkers included in the conjugate and the maximum tolerated dose on mice for a single dose. For example the following vinblastine conjugates described herein compared to a control conjugate are shown in the following table.
  • No. of Single Dose MTDapp
    Compound hydrophilic linkers (μmol/kg)
    EC145 0 15 
    EC0234 1 12*
    EC0246 2 <20**
    EC0263 3 >20  
    *dose limited by solubility;
    **⅓ mice died at 20 μmol/kg.

    EC0436 and Comparative Example EC0305 were also administered i.v. to Balb/c mice TIW for 1 week. The resulting MTD for the multiple dose was EC0305 (6 mmol/kg) and EC0436 (9 mmol/kg). The data indicate that EC0436 can be dosed at levels 50% greater than EC0305.
  • Serum Binding. Serum binding of Folate-DAVLBH conjugates containing hydrophilic spacer linkers compared to Comparative Example EC 145 lacking a hydrophilic spacer linker 50 μM compound in serum with 30K NMWL filtration and evaluation by HPLC-UV detection (n=3).
  • Human Serum Mouse Serum
    Compound (% Bound) SD (% Bound) SD
    EC145 54.3 1.6 67.3 2.6
    EC0396 42.7 4.4 72.2 5.2
    EC0400 61.1 1.9 75.5 1.4
  • Bile Clearance. Comparison of Bile Clearance (% ID) of unconjugated drug, drug conjugate lacking a hydrophilic spacer linker, and conjugates described herein.
  • Bile clearance
    Compound Spacer (% ID)
    DAVLBH None 58.0
    EC145 no hydrophilic spacer 8.7
    EC0234 Mono-ribosyl 10.6
    EC0246 Bis-ribosyl 4.7
    EC0258 Tri-ribosyl 3.2
    EC0434 Tetra-ribosyl 2.8
    EC0400 Mono-glucuronide 6.3
    EC0423 Bis-glucuronide 3.9
    EC0409 PEG12 7.9
    EC0429 Piperazine/Asp 8.6
  • The results shown in FIGS. 11 and 13 indicate a 76% decrease in the liver clearance of EC0434, which includes hydrophilic spacer linkers described herein, as compared to the standard EC145. Without being bound by theory, these results are believed to correspond to non-specific liver clearance, and accordingly, it is suggested that significantly lower doses of those conjugates that include the hydrophilic spacer linkers described herein may be administered compared to the corresponding conjugates that do not include such linkers. Further, without being bound by theory, it is suggested that hepatic clearance leads to the dose limiting GI-related toxicity that is observed with some conjugates.
  • Western Blot Analysis. The data shown in FIG. 13 indicate that EC0565 (folate-sugar-everolimus) can cause a dose-dependent, and specific knockdown of the downstream targets of mTOR (intracellular target for everolimus). Without being bound by theory, in it believed that folate delivers everolimus inside the cell where everolimus inhibits mTOR, which is the mammalian target of rapamycin and a ser/thr kinase. Inhibition of mTOR′ s downstream targets (P70 S6-kinase and Ribosomal S6) results, as shown on the Western blot.
    • COMPOUND EXAMPLES
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00130
    • Example
  • (3,4), (5,6)-Bisacetonide-D-Gluconic Acid Methyl Ester. In a dry 250 mL round bottom flask, under argon 6-gluconolactone (4.14 g, 23.24 mmol) was suspended in acetone-methanol (50 mL). To this suspension dimethoxypropane (17.15 mL, 139.44 mmol) followed by catalytic amount of p-toulenesulfonic acid (200 mg) were added. This solution was stirred at room temperature for 16 h. TLC (50% EtOAc in petroleum ether) showed that all of the starting material had been consumed and product had been formed. Acetone-methanol was removed under reduced pressure. The residue of the reaction was dissolved in EtOAc and washed with water. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, and concentrated to dryness. This material was then loaded onto a SiO2 column and chromatographed (30% EtOAc in petroleum ether) to yield pure (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-D-gluconic acid methyl ester (3.8 g, 56%) and regio-isomer (2,3), (5,6)-bisacetonide-D-gluconic acid methyl ester (0.71 g, 10%). 1H NMR data was in accordance with the required products. C13H22O7; MW 290.31; Exact Mass: 290.14.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00131
    • Example
  • (3,4), (5,6)-Bisacetonide-2-OTf-D-Gluconic Acid Methyl Ester. In a dry 100 mL round bottom flask, under argon (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-D-gluconic acid methyl ester (3.9 g, 13.43 mmol) was dissolved in methylene chloride (40 mL) and cooled to −20° C. to −25° C. To this solution pyridine (3.26 mL, 40.29 mmol) followed by triflic anhydride (3.39 mL, 20.15 mmol) were added. This white turbid solution was stirred at −20° C. for 1 h. TLC (25% EtOAc in petroleum ether) showed that all of the starting material had been consumed and product had been formed. The reaction mixture was poured into crushed-ice and extracted with diethyl ether. The organic layer was washed with water, brine, dried over Na2SO4, and concentrated to yield (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-2-OTf-D-gluconic acid methyl ester (5.5 g, 97%). This material was used in the next reaction without further purification. C14H21F3O9S; MW 422.37; Exact Mass: 422.09.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00132
    • Example
  • (3,4), (5,6)-Bisacetonide-2-Deoxy-2-Azido-D-Mannonic Acid Methyl Ester. In a dry 100 mL round bottom flask, under argon (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-2-OTf-D-gluconic acid methyl ester (5.5 g g, 13.02 mmol) was dissolved in DMF (20 mL). To this solution NaN3 (0.93 g, 14.32 mmol) was added. This solution was stirred at room temperature for 1 h. TLC (8% EtOAc in petroleum ether, triple run) showed that all of the starting material had been consumed and product had been formed. DMF was removed under reduced pressure. The reaction mixture was diluted with brine and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with water, brine, dried over Na2SO4, and concentrated to dryness. This crude material was then loaded onto a SiO2 column and chromatographed (20% EtOAc in petroleum ether) to yield pure (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-2-deoxy-2-azido-D-mannonic acid methyl ester (3.8 g, 93%). 1H NMR data was in accordance with the product. C13H21N3O6; MW 315.32; Exact Mass: 315.14.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00133
    • Example
  • (3,4), (5,6)-Bisacetonide-2-Deoxy-2-Amino-D-Mannonic Acid Methyl Ester. In a Parr hydrogenation flask, (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-2-deoxy-2-azido-D-mannonic acid methyl ester (3.5 g g, 11.10 mmol) was dissolved in methanol (170 mL). To this solution 10% Pd on carbon (800 mg, 5 mol %) was added. Hydrogenation was carried out using Parr-hydrogenator at 25 PSI for 1 h. TLC (10% methanol in methylene chloride) showed that all of the starting material had been consumed and product had been formed. The reaction mixture was filtered through a celite pad and concentrated to dryness. This crude material was then loaded onto a SiO2 column and chromatographed (2% methanol in methylene chloride) to yield pure (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-2-deoxy-2-amino-D-mannonic acid methyl ester (2.61 g, 81%). 1H NMR data was in accordance with the product. C13H23NO6S MW 289.32; Exact Mass: 289.15.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00134
    • Example
  • (3,4), (5,6)-Bisacetonide-2-Deoxy-2-Fmoc-Amino-D-Mannonic Acid. In a dry 100 mL round bottom flask, (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-2-deoxy-2-amino-D-mannonic acid methyl ester (1.24 g, 4.29 mmol) was dissolved in THF/MeOH (20 mL/5 mL). To this solution LiOH.H2O (215.8 mg, 5.14 mmol) in water (5 mL) was added. This light yellow solution was stirred at room temperature for 2 h. TLC (10% methanol in methylene chloride) showed that all of the starting material had been consumed and product had been formed. THF/MeOH was removed under reduced pressure. The aqueous phase was re-suspended in sat. NaHCO3 (10 mL). To this suspension Fmoc-OSu (1.74 g, 5.14 mmol) in 1,4-dioxane (10 mL) was added. This heterogeneous solution was stirred at room temperature for 18 h. TLC (10% methanol in methylene chloride) showed that most of the starting material had been consumed and product had been formed. Dioxane was removed under reduced pressure. The aqueous layer was extracted with diethyl ether to remove less polar impurities. Then the aqueous layer was acidified to pH 6 using 0.2N HCl, and re-extracted with EtOAc. The EtOAc layer was washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, and concentrated to yield (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-2-deoxy-2-Fmoc-amino-D-mannonic acid (1.6 g, 76%). This material was used in the next reaction without further purification. 1H NMR data was in accordance with the product. C27H31NO8; MW 497.54; Exact Mass: 497.20.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00135
    • Example
  • EC0233 was synthesized by SPPS in three steps according to the general peptide synthesis procedure described herein starting from H-Cys(4-methoxytrityl)-2-chlorotrityl-Resin, and the following SPPS reagents:
  • Reagents mmol Equivalent MW amount
    H-Cys(4-methoxytrityl)-2-chlorotrityl-Resin 0.56  1.0 g
    (loading 0.56 mmol/g)
    (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-2-deoxy-2-Fmoc-amino-D- 0.7 1.25 497.54 0.348 g
    mannonic acid
    Fmoc-Glu-OtBu 1.12 2 425.5 0.477 g
    N10TFA-Pteroic Acid 0.70 1.25 408 0.286 g
    (dissolve in 10 ml DMSO)
    DIPEA 2.24 4 129.25 0.390 mL
    (d = 0.742)
    PyBOP 1.12 2 520 0.583 g
  • Coupling steps. In a peptide synthesis vessel add the resin, add the amino acid solution, DIPEA, and PyBOP. Bubble argon for 1 hr. and wash 3× with DMF and IPA. Use 20% piperidine in DMF for Fmoc deprotection, 3× (10 min), before each amino acid coupling. Continue to complete all 3 coupling steps. At the end wash the resin with 2% hydrazine in DMF 3× (5 min) to cleave TFA protecting group on Pteroic acid.
  • Cleavage step. Cleavage Reagent: 92.5% (50 ml) TFA, 2.5% (1.34 ml) H2O, 2.5% (1.34 ml) triisopropylsilane, 2.5% (1.34 ml) ethanedithiol. Add 25 ml cleavage reagent and bubble argon for 20 min, drain, and wash 3× with remaining reagent. Rotavap until 5 ml remains and precipitate in ethyl ether. Centrifuge and dry.
  • HPLC Purification step. Column: Waters NovaPak C18 300×19 mm; Buffer A=10 mM ammonium acetate, pH 5; B=ACN; Method: 1% B to 20% B in 40 minutes at 15 ml/min; yield ˜202 mg, 50%. C28H35N9O12S; MW 721.70; Exact Mass: 721.21.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00136
    • Example
  • Bis-Saccharo-Folate Linker EC0244. EC0244 was synthesized by SPPS in five steps according to the general peptide synthesis procedure described herein starting from H-Cys(4-methoxytrityl)-2-chlorotrityl-Resin, and the following SPPS reagents:
  • Reagents mmol Equivalent MW amount
    H-Cys(4-methoxytrityl)-2-chlorotrityl-Resin 0.56  1.0 g
    (loading 0.56 mmol/g)
    (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-2-deoxy-2-Fmoc- 0.7 1.25 497.54 0.348 g
    amino-D-mannonic acid
    Fmoc-Asp(OtBu)-OH 1.12 2 411.5 0.461 g
    (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-2-deoxy-2-Fmoc- 0.7 1.25 497.54 0.348 g
    amino-D-mannonic acid
    Fmoc-Glu-OtBu 1.12 2 425.5 0.477 g
    N10TFA-Pteroic Acid 0.70 1.25 408 0.286 g
    (dissolve in 10 ml DMSO)
    DIPEA 2.24 4 129.25 0.390 mL
    (d = 0.742)
    PyBOP 1.12 2 520 0.583 g

    The Coupling steps, Cleavage step, Cleavage Reagent, and HPLC Purification step were identical to those described above; yield ˜284 mg, 50%. C38H51N11O20S; MW 1013.94; Exact Mass: 1013.30.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00137
    • Example
  • EC0257 was synthesized by SPPS in six steps according to the general peptide synthesis procedure described herein starting from H-Cys(4-methoxytrityl)-2-chlorotrityl-Resin, and the following SPPS reagents:
  • Reagents mmol Equivalent MW amount
    H-Cys(4-methoxytrityl)-2-chlorotrityl-Resin 0.2 0.333 g
    (loading 0.56 mmol/g)
    (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-2-deoxy-2-Fmoc- 0.25 1.25 497.54 0.124 g
    amino-D-mannonic acid
    (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-2-deoxy-2-Fmoc- 0.25 1.25 497.54 0.124 g
    amino-D-mannonic acid
    Fmoc-Asp(OtBu)-OH 0.4 2 411.5 0.165 g
    (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-2-deoxy-2- 0.25 1.25 497.54 0.124 g
    Fmoc-amino-D-mannonic acid
    Fmoc-Glu-OtBu 0.4 2 425.5 0.170 g
    N10TFA-Pteroic Acid 0.25 1.25 408 0.119 g
    (dissolve in 10 ml DMSO)
    DIPEA 0.8 4 129.25 0.139 mL
    (d = 0.742)
    PyBOP 0.4 2 520 0.208 g

    The Coupling steps, Cleavage step, Cleavage Reagent, and HPLC Purification step were identical to those described above; yield ˜170 mg, 71%. C44H62N12O25S; MW 1191.09; Exact Mass: 1190.37.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00138
    • Example
  • EC0261 was synthesized by SPPS in seven steps according to the general peptide synthesis procedure described herein starting from H-Cys(4-methoxytrityl)-2-chlorotrityl-Resin, and the following SPPS reagents:
  • Reagents mmol equivalent MW Amount
    H-Cys(4-methoxytrityl)-2-chlorotrityl-Resin 0.2 0.333 g
    (loading 0.56 mmol/g)
    (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-2-deoxy-2-Fmoc- 0.25 1.25 497.54 0.124 g
    amino-D-mannonic acid
    Fmoc-Asp(OtBu)-OH 0.4 2 411.5 0.165 g
    (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-2-deoxy-2-Fmoc- 0.25 1.25 497.54 0.124 g
    amino-D-mannonic acid
    Fmoc-Asp(OtBu)-OH 0.4 2 411.5 0.165 g
    (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-2-deoxy-2-Fmoc- 0.25 1.25 497.54 0.124 g
    amino-D-mannonic acid
    Fmoc-Glu-OtBu 0.4 2 425.5 0.170 g
    N10TFA-Pteroic Acid 0.25 1.25 408 0.119 g
    (dissolve in 10 ml DMSO)
    DIPEA 0.8 4 129.25 0.139 mL
    (d = 0.742)
    PyBOP 0.4 2 520 0.208 g

    The Coupling steps, Cleavage step, Cleavage Reagent, and HPLC Purification step were identical to those described above; yield ˜170 mg, 65%. C48H67N13O28S; MW 1306.18; Exact Mass: 1305.39.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00139
    • Example
  • Tetra-Saccharo-Tris-Asp-Folate Linker EC0268. EC0268 was synthesized by SPPS in nine steps according to the general peptide synthesis procedure described herein starting from H-Cys(4-methoxytrityl)-2-chlorotrityl-Resin, and the following SPPS reagents:
  • Reagents mmol equivalent MW Amount
    H-Cys(4-methoxytrityl)-2-chlorotrityl-Resin 0.1 0.167 g
    (loading 0.56 mmol/g)
    (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-2-deoxy-2-Fmoc- 0.125 1.25 497.54 0.062 g
    amino-D-mannonic acid
    Fmoc-Asp(OtBu)-OH 0.2 2 411.5 0.082 g
    (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-2-deoxy-2-Fmoc- 0.125 1.25 497.54 0.062 g
    amino-D-mannonic acid
    Fmoc-Asp(OtBu)-OH 0.2 2 411.5 0.082 g
    (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-2-deoxy-2-Fmoc- 0.125 1.25 497.54 0.062 g
    amino-D-mannonic acid
    Fmoc-Asp(OtBu)-OH 0.2 2 411.5 0.082 g
    (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-2-deoxy-2-Fmoc- 0.125 1.25 497.54 0.062 g
    amino-D-mannonic acid
    Fmoc-Glu-OtBu 0.2 2 425.5 0.085 g
    N10TFA-Pteroic Acid 0.125 1.25 408 0.059 g
    (dissolve in 10 ml DMSO)
    DIPEA 0.4 4 129.25 0.070 mL
    (d = 0.742)
    PyBOP 0.2 2 520 0.104 g

    The Coupling steps, Cleavage step, Cleavage Reagent, and HPLC Purification step were identical to those described above; yield ˜100 mg, 63%. C94H125N19O37S2; MW 2177.24; Exact Mass: 2175.79.
  • The following illustrative examples may be prepared according to the procedure for EC0268:
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00140
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00141
    • Example
  • Tetra-Saccharo-Asp-Folate Linker EC0463. EC0463 was synthesized by SPPS in seven steps according to the general peptide synthesis procedure described herein starting from H-Cys(4-methoxytrityl)-2-chlorotrityl-Resin, and the following SPPS reagents:
  • Reagents mmol equivalent MW Amount
    H-Cys(4-methoxytrityl)-2-chlorotrityl-Resin 0.1 0.167 g
    (loading 0.56 mmol/g)
    (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-2-deoxy-2-Fmoc- 0.125 1.25 497.54 0.062 g
    amino-D-mannonic acid
    (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-2-deoxy-2-Fmoc- 0.125 1.25 497.54 0.062 g
    amino-D-mannonic acid
    (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-2-deoxy-2-Fmoc- 0.125 1.25 497.54 0.062 g
    amino-D-mannonic acid
    Fmoc-Asp(OtBu)-OH 0.2 2 411.5 0.082 g
    (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-2-deoxy-2-Fmoc- 0.125 1.25 497.54 0.062 g
    amino-D-mannonic acid
    Fmoc-Glu-OtBu 0.2 2 425.5 0.085 g
    N10TFA-Pteroic Acid 0.125 1.25 408 0.059 g
    (dissolve in 10 ml DMSO)
    DIPEA 0.4 4 129.25 0.070 mL
    (d = 0.742)
    PyBOP 0.2 2 520 0.104 g

    The Coupling steps, Cleavage step, Cleavage Reagent, and HPLC Purification step were identical to those described above; yield ˜63 mg, 46%. C50H73N13O30S; MW 1368.25; Exact Mass: 1367.43.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00142
    • Example
  • Tetra-Saccharo-Bis-α-Glu-Arg-Folate Linker EC0480. EC0480 was synthesized by SPPS in nine steps according to the general peptide synthesis procedure described herein starting from H-Cys(4-methoxytrityl)-2-chlorotrityl-Resin, and the following SPPS reagents:
  • Reagents mmol equivalent MW Amount
    H-Cys(4-methoxytrityl)-2-chlorotrityl-Resin 0.2 0.333 g
    (loading 0.56 mmol/g)
    (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-2-deoxy-2-Fmoc- 0.250 1.25 497.54 0.124 g
    amino-D-mannonic acid
    Fmoc-Glu(OtBu)-OH 0.4 2 425.5 0.170 g
    (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-2-deoxy-2-Fmoc- 0.250 1.25 497.54 0.124 g
    amino-D-mannonic acid
    Fmoc-Arg(Pbf)-OH 0.4 2 648.78 0.260 g
    (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-2-deoxy-2-Fmoc- 0.250 1.25 497.54 0.124 g
    amino-D-mannonic acid
    Fmoc-Glu(OtBu)-OH 0.4 2 425.5 0.170 g
    (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-2-deoxy-2-Fmoc- 0.250 1.25 497.54 0.124 g
    amino-D-mannonic acid
    Fmoc-Glu-OtBu 0.4 2 425.5 0.170 g
    N10TFA-Pteroic Acid 0.250 1.25 408 0.119 g
    (dissolve in 10 ml DMSO)
    DIPEA 0.8 4 129.25 0.139 mL
    (d = 0.742)
    PyBOP 0.4 2 520 0.208 g

    The Coupling steps, Cleavage step, Cleavage Reagent, and HPLC Purification step were identical to those described above; yield ˜100 mg, 33%. C62H94N18O20S; MW 1667.58; Exact Mass: 1666.59.
    • Example
  • Tetra-Saccharo-Bis-Asp-Folate Linker EC0452:
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00143
    • Example
  • Tetra-Saccharo-Bis-Asp-Folate Linker EC0452. EC0452 was synthesized by SPPS in nine steps according to the general peptide synthesis procedure described herein starting from H-Cys(4-methoxytrityl)-2-chlorotrityl-Resin, and the following SPPS reagents:
  • Reagents mmol equivalent MW Amount
    H-Cys(4-methoxytrityl)-2-chlorotrityl-Resin 0.15 0.250 g
    (loading 0.6 mmol/g)
    (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-2-deoxy- 0.188 1.25 497.54 0.094 g
    2-Fmoc-amino-D-mannonic acid
    Fmoc-Asp(OtBu)-OH 0.3 2 411.5 0.123 g
    (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-2-deoxy- 0.188 1.25 497.54 0.094 g
    2-Fmoc-amino-D-mannonic acid
    Fmoc-4-(2-aminoethyl)-1-carboxymethyl-piperazine 0.3 2 482.42 0.145 g
    dihydrochloride
    (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-2-deoxy- 0.188 1.25 497.54 0.094 g
    2-Fmoc-amino-D-mannonic acid
    Fmoc-Asp(OtBu)-OH 0.3 2 411.5 0.123 g
    (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-2-deoxy- 0.188 1.25 497.54 0.094 g
    2-Fmoc-amino-D-mannonic acid
    Fmoc-Glu-OtBu 0.3 2 425.5 0.128 g
    N10TFA-Pteroic Acid 0.188 1.25 408 0.077 g
    (dissolve in 10 ml DMSO)
    DIPEA 0.6 4 129.25 0.105 mL
    (d = 0.742)
    PyBOP 0.3 2 520 0.156 g

    The Coupling steps, Cleavage step, and Cleavage Reagent were identical to those described above. HPLC Purification step. Column: Waters NovaPak C18 300×19 mm; Buffer A =10 mM ammonium acetate, pH 5; B=ACN; Method: 1% B to 20% B in 40 minutes at 25 ml/min; yield ˜98 mg, 40%. C62H93N17O34S; MW 1652.56; Exact Mass: 1651.58.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00144
    • Example
  • Tetra-Saccharo-bis-Asp-Folate Linker EC0457. EC0457 was synthesized by SPPS in eight steps according to the general peptide synthesis procedure described herein starting from H-Cys(4-methoxytrityl)-2-chlorotrityl-Resin, and the following SPPS reagents:
  • Reagents mmol equivalent MW Amount
    H-Cys(4-methoxytrityl)-2-chlorotrityl- 0.20 0.333 g
    Resin (loading 0. 6 mmol/g)
    (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-2-deoxy-2- 0.25 1.25 497.54 0.124 g
    Fmoc-amino-D-mannonic acid
    Fmoc-Asp(OtBu)-OH 0.30 1.5 411.5 0.123 g
    (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-2-deoxy-2- 0.25 1.25 497.54 0.124 g
    Fmoc-amino-D-mannonic acid
    (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-2-deoxy-2- 0.25 1.25 497.54 0.124 g
    Fmoc-amino-D-mannonic acid
    Fmoc-Asp(OtBu)-OH 0.30 1.5 411.5 0.123 g
    (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-2-deoxy-2- 0.25 1.25 497.54 0.124 g
    Fmoc-amino-D-mannonic acid
    Fmoc-Glu-OtBu 0.30 1.5 425.5 0.128 g
    N10TFA-Pteroic Acid 0.25 1.25 408 0.102 g
    (dissolve in 10 ml DMSO)
    DIPEA 2 eq. of amino 129.25 87 μL or 105
    acid (d = 0.742) μL
    PyBOP
    2 eq. of amino 520 260 mg or
    acid 312 mg

    The Coupling steps, Cleavage step, and Cleavage Reagent were identical to those described above. HPLC Purification step. Column: Waters NovaPak C18 300×19 mm; Buffer A=10 mM ammonium acetate, pH 5; B=ACN; Method: 0% B to 20% B in 40 minutes at 25 ml/min; yield ˜210 mg, 71%. C54H78N14O33S; MW 148334; Exact Mass: 1482.46.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00145
    • Example
  • Tetra-Saccharo-tris-Glu-Folate Linker EC0477. EC0477 was synthesized by SPPS in nine steps according to the general peptide synthesis procedure described herein starting from H-Cys(4-methoxytrityl)-2-chlorotrityl-Resin, and the following SPPS reagents:
  • Reagents mmol equivalent MW Amount
    H-Cys(4-methoxytrityl)- 0.20 0.333 g
    2-chlorotrityl-Resin
    (loading 0. 6 mmol/g)
    (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-2-deoxy- 0.25 1.25 497.54 0.124 g
    2-Fmoc-amino-D-mannonic acid
    Fmoc-Glu(OtBu)-OH 0.30 1.5 425.5 0.128 g
    (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-2-deoxy- 0.25 1.25 497.54 0.124 g
    2-Fmoc-amino-D-mannonic acid
    Fmoc-Glu(OtBu)-OH 0.30 1.5 425.5 0.128 g
    (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-2-deoxy- 0.25 1.25 497.54 0.124 g
    2-Fmoc-amino-D-mannonic acid
    Fmoc-Glu(OtBu)-OH 0.30 1.5 425.5 0.128 g
    (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-2-deoxy- 0.25 1.25 497.54 0.124 g
    2-Fmoc-amino-D-mannonic acid
    Fmoc-Glu-OtBu 0.30 1.5 425.5 0.128 g
    N10TFA-Pteroic Acid 0.25 1.25 408 0.102 g
    (dissolve in 10 ml DMSO)
    DIPEA 2 eq. of 129.25 87 μL
    amino (d = or 105 μL
    acid 0.742)
    PyBOP 1 eq. of 520 130 mg
    amino or
    acid 156 mg

    The Coupling steps, Cleavage step, and Cleavage Reagent were identical to those described above. HPLC Purification step. Column: Waters NovaPak C18 300×19 mm; Buffer A=10 mM ammonium acetate, pH 5; B=ACN; Method: 0% B to 20% B in 40 minutes at 25 ml/min; yield ˜220 mg, 67%. C61H89N15O36S; MW 1640.50; Exact Mass: 1639.53.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00146
    • Example
  • EC0453 was synthesized by SPPS according to the general peptide synthesis procedure described herein starting from H-Cys(4-methoxytrityl)-2-chlorotrityl-Resin, and the following SPPS reagents:
  • Reagents mmol equivalent MW Amount
    H-Cys(4-methoxytrityl)-2- 0.162 0.290 g
    chlorotrityl-Resin
    (loading 0.56 mmol/g)
    (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-2-deoxy- 0.203 1.25 497.54 0.101 g
    2-Fmoc-amino-D-mannonic acid
    Fmoc-Asp(OtBu)-OH 0.324 2 411.5 0.133 g
    (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-2-deoxy- 0.203 1.25 497.54 0.101 g
    2-Fmoc-amino-D-mannonic acid
    Fmoc-Asp(OtBu)-OH 0.324 2 411.5 0.133 g
    (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-2-deoxy- 0.203 1.25 497.54 0.101 g
    2-Fmoc-amino-D-mannonic acid
    Fmoc-Asp(OtBu)-OH 0.324 2 411.5 0.133 g
    (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-2-deoxy- 0.203 1.25 497.54 0.101 g
    2-Fmoc-amino-D-mannonic acid
    Fmoc-Glu-OtBu 0.324 2 425.5 0.138 g
    N10TFA-Pteroic Acid 0.203 1.25 408 0.083 g
    (dissolve in 10 ml DMSO)
    DIPEA 2 eq of 71 μL or
    AA 85 μL
    PyBOP
    1 eq of 211 mg or
    AA 253 mg
  • Coupling steps. In a peptide synthesis vessel add the resin, add the amino acid solution, DIPEA, and PyBOP. Bubble argon for 1 hr. and wash 3× with DMF and IPA. Use 20% piperidine in DMF for Fmoc deprotection, 3× (10 min), before each amino acid coupling. Continue to complete all 9 coupling steps. At the end treat the resin with 2% hydrazine in DMF 3× (5 min) to cleave TFA protecting group on Pteroic acid, wash the resin with DMF (3×), IPA (3×), MeOH (3×), and bubble the resin with argon for 30 min.
  • Cleavage step. Cleavage Reagent: 92.5% TFA, 2.5% H2O, 2.5% triisopropylsilane, 2.5% ethanedithiol. Treat the resin with cleavage reagent 3 times (15 min, 5 min, 5 min) with argon bubbling, drain, collect, and combine the solution. Rotavap until 5 ml remains and precipitate in diethyl ether (35 mL). Centrifuge, wash with diethyl ether, and dry. The crude solid was purified by HPLC.
  • HPLC Purification step. Column: Waters Xterra Prep MS C 18 10 μm 19×250 mm; Solvent A: 10 mM ammonium acetate, pH 5; Solvent B: ACN; Method: 5 min 0% B to 40 min 20% B 25 mL/min; Fractions containing the product was collected and freeze-dried to give ˜60 mg EC0453 (23% yield). 1H NMR and LC/MS were consistent with the product. C58H83N15O36S; MW 1598.43; Exact Mass: 1597.48. C, 43.58; H, 5.23; N, 13.14; O, 36.03; S, 2.01.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00147
    • Example
  • (3,4), (5,6)-Bisacetonide-2-deoxy-2-Fmoc-amino-D-Mannonic acid-diazo-ketone. In a dry 100 mL round bottom flask, (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-2-deoxy-2-Fmoc-amino-D-mannonic acid (1.0 g, 2.01 mmol) was dissolved in THF (10 mL, not fully dissolved) under Argon atmosphere. The reaction mixture was cooled to −25° C. To this solution NMM (0.23 mL, 2.11 mmol) and ethylchloroformate (228.98 mg, 2.11 mmol) were added. This solution was stirred at −20° C. for 30 min. The resulting white suspension was allowed to warm to 0° C., and a solution of diazomethane in ether was added until yellow color persisted. Stirring was continued as the mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature. Stirred for 2 h, excess diazomethane was destroyed by the addition of few drops of acetic acid with vigorous stirring. The mixture was diluted with ether, washed with sat. aq. NaHCO3 solution, sat. aq. NH4Cl, brine, dried over Na2SO4, and concentrated to dryness. This crude material was then loaded onto a SiO2 column and chromatographed (30% EtOAc in petroleum ether) to yield pure (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-2-deoxy-2-Fmoc-amino-D-mannonic acid-diazo-ketone (0.6 g, 57%). 1H NMR data was in accordance with the product. C28H31N3O7; MW 521.56; Exact Mass: 521.22.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00148
    • Example
  • (3R,4R,5S,6R)-(4,5),(6,7)-Bisacetonide-3-Fmoc-Amino-Heptanoic acid. In a dry 25 mL round bottom flask, (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-2-deoxy-2-Fmoc-amino-D-mannonic acid-diazo-ketone (0.15 g, 0.29 mmol) was dissolved in THF (1.6 mL) under Argon atmosphere. To this solution silver trifluoroacetate (6.6 mg, 0.03 mmol) in water (0.4 mL) was added in the dark. The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 h. TLC (10% MeOH in methylene chloride) showed that all of the starting material had been consumed and product had been formed. Solvent (THF) was removed under reduced pressure, the residue was diluted with water (pH was 3.5-4.0) and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, and concentrated to dryness. This crude material was then loaded onto a SiO2 column and chromatographed (gradient elution from 1% MeOH in methylene chloride to 5% MeOH in methylene chloride) to yield pure (3R,4R,5S, 6R)-(4,5),(6,7)-bisacetonide-3-Fmoc-amino-heptanoic acid (0.10 g, 68%). 1H NMR data was in accordance with the product. C28H33NO8; MW 511.56; Exact Mass: 511.22.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00149
    • Example
  • Tetra-Homosaccharo-Tris-αGlu-Folate Spacer EC0478. EC0478 was synthesized by SPPS in nine steps according to the general peptide synthesis procedure described herein starting from H-Cys(4-methoxytrityl)-2-chlorotrityl-Resin, and the following SPPS reagents:
  • Reagents mmol equivalent MW Amount
    H-Cys(4-methoxytrityl)-2- 0.1 0.167 g
    chlorotrityl-Resin
    (loading 0.56 mmol/g)
    Homo sugar 0.12 1.2 511.56 0.061 g
    Fmoc-Glu(OtBu)-OH 0.2 2 425.5 0.085 g
    Homo sugar 0.12 1.2 511.56 0.061 g
    Fmoc-Glu(OtBu)-OH 0.2 2 425.5 0.085 g
    Homo sugar 0.12 1.2 511.56 0.061 g
    Fmoc-Glu(OtBu)-OH 0.2 2 425.5 0.085 g
    Homo sugar 0.12 1.2 511.56 0.061 g
    Fmoc-Glu-OtBu 0.2 2 425.5 0.085 g
    N10TFA-Pteroic Acid•TFA 0.12 1.2 408 0.049 g
    (dissolve in 10 ml DMSO)
    DIPEA 0.4 4 129.25 0.070 mL
    (d = 0.742)
    PyBOP 0.2 2 520 0.104 g

    The Coupling steps, Cleavage step, and Cleavage Reagent were identical to those described above. HPLC Purification step: Column: Waters NovaPak C18 300×19 mm; Buffer A=10 mM ammonium acetate, pH 5; B=ACN; Method: 100% A for 5 min then 0% B to 20% B in 20 minutes at 26 ml/min; yield ˜88 mg, 52%. C65H97N15O36S; MW 1696.61; Exact Mass: 1695.59.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00150
    • Example
  • (3,4), (5,6)-Bisacetonide-D-Gluconic Amide. 20 g of the methyl ester was dissolved in 100 mL methanol, cooled the high-pressure reaction vessel with dry ice/acetone, charged with 100 mL liquid ammonia, warmed up to room temperature and heated to 160° C./850 PSI for 2 hours. The reaction vessel was cooled to room temperature and released the pressure. Evaporation of the solvent gave brownish syrup, and minimum amount of isopropyl alcohol was added to make the homogeneous solution with reflux. The solution was cooled to −20° C. and the resulting solid was filtered to give 8.3 g of solid. The mother liquid was evaporated, and to the resulting residue, ether was added and refluxed until homogeneous solution was achieved. The solution was then cooled to −20° C. and the resulting solid was filtered to give 4.0 g product. The solid was combined and recrystallized in isopropyl alcohol to give 11.2 g (59%) of the white amide product. C12H21NO6; MW 275.30; Exact Mass: 275.14.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00151
    • Example
  • (3,4), (5,6)-Bisacetonide-1-Deoxy-1-Amino-D-Glucitol. In a dry 100 mL round bottom flask, under argon, LiAlH4 (450 mg, 11.86 momol)) was dissolved in THF (10 mL) and cooled to 0° C. To this suspension (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-D-gluconic amide (1.09 g, 3.96 mmol) in THF (30 mL) was added very slowly over 15 min. This mixture was refluxed for 5 h. TLC (10% MeOH in methylene chloride) showed that all of the starting material had been consumed and product had been formed. The reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature, and then cooled to ice-bath temperature, diluted with diethyl ether (40 mL), slowly added 0.5 mL of water, 0.5 mL of 15% aq. NaOH, and then added 1.5 mL of water. The reaction mixture was warmed to room temperature and stirred for 30 min. MgSO4 was added and stirred for additional 15 min and filtered. The organic layer was concentrated to dryness to yield (3,4), (5,6)-bisacetonide-1-deoxy-1-amino-D-glucitol. 1H NMR data was in accordance with the product. C12H23NO5; MW 261.31; Exact Mass: 261.16.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00152
    • Example
  • EC0475. O-Allyl protected Fmoc-Glu (2.17 g, 1 eq), PyBOP (2.88 g, 1 eq), and DIPEA (1.83 mL, 2 eq) were added to a solution of (3,4),(5,6)-bisacetonide-1-deoxy-1-amino-D-glucitol (1.4 g, 5.3 mmol) in dry DMF (6 mL) and the mixture was stirred at RT under Ar for 2 h. The solution was diluted with EtOAc (50 mL), washed with brine (10 mL×3), organic layer separated, dried (MgSO4), filtered and concentrated to give a residue, which was purified by a flash column (silica gel, 60% EtOAc/petro-ether) to afford 1.72 g (50%) allyl-protected EC0475 as a solid. Pd(Ph3)4 (300 mg, 0.1 eq) was added to a solution of allyl-protected EC0475 (1.72 g, 2.81 mmol) in NMM/AcOH/CHCl3 (2 mL/4 mL/74 mL). The resulting yellow solution was stirred at RT under Ar for 1 h, to which was added a second portion of Pd(Ph3)4 (300 mg, 0.1 eq). After stirring for an additional 1 h, the mixture was washed with 1 N HCl (50 mL×3) and brine (50 mL), organic layer separated, dried (MgSO4), filtered, and concentrated to give a yellow foamy solid, which was subject to chromatography (silica gel, 1% MeOH/CHCl3 followed by 3.5% MeOH/CHCl3) to give 1.3 g (81%) EC0475 as a solid material. MW 612.67; Exact Mass: 612.27.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00153
    • Example
  • Tetra-Saccharoglutamate-Bis-αGlu-Folate Spacer EC0491. EC0491 was synthesized by SPPS in eight steps according to the general peptide synthesis procedure described herein starting from H-Cys(4-methoxytrityl)-2-chlorotrityl-Resin, and the following SPPS reagents:
  • Reagents Mmol equivalent MW Amount
    H-Cys(4-methoxytrityl)-2- 0.1 0.167 g
    chlorotrityl-Resin
    (loading 0.56 mmol/g)
    EC0475 0.13 1.3 612.67 0.080 g
    Fmoc-Glu(OtBu)-OH 0.2 2 425.5 0.085 g
    EC0475 0.13 1.3 612.67 0.080 g
    EC0475 0.13 1.3 612.67 0.080 g
    Fmoc-Glu(OtBu)-OH 0.2 2 425.5 0.085 g
    EC0475 0.13 1.3 612.67 0.080 g
    Fmoc-Glu-OtBu 0.2 2 425.5 0.085 g
    N10TFA-Pteroic Acid•TFA 0.2 2 408 0.105 g
    (dissolve in 10 ml DMSO)
    DIPEA 0.4 4 129.25 0.070 mL
    (d = 0.742)
    PyBOP 0.2 2 520 0.104 g

    The Coupling steps, Cleavage step, and Cleavage Reagent were identical to those described above. HPLC Purification step: Column: Waters NovaPak C18 300×19 mm; Buffer A=10 mM ammonium acetate, pH 5; B=ACN; Method: 100% A for 5 min then 0% B to 20% B in 20 minutes at 26 ml/min; yield ˜100 mg, 51%. C76H118N18O41S; MW 1971.91; Exact Mass: 1970.74.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00154
    • Example
  • EC0479 was synthesized by SPPS according to the general peptide synthesis procedure described herein starting from H-Cys(4-methoxytrityl)-2-chlorotrityl-Resin, and the following SPPS reagents:
  • Reagents mmol equivalent MW Amount
    H-Cys(4-methoxytrityl)- 0.094  0.16 g
    2-chlorotrityl-Resin
    (loading 0.6 mmol/g)
    EC0475 0.13 1.4 612.67 0.082 g
    Fmoc-Glu(OtBu)-OH 0.19 2.0 425.47 0.080 g
    EC0475 0.13 1.4 612.67 0.082 g
    Fmoc-Arg(Pbf)-OH 0.19 2.0 648.77  0.12 g
    EC0475 0.13 1.4 612.67 0.082 g
    Fmoc-Glu(OtBu)-OH 0.19 2.0 425.47 0.080 g
    EC0475 0.13 1.4 612.67 0.082 g
    Fmoc-Glu-OtBu 0.19 2.0 425.47 0.080 g
    N10TFA-Pteroic Acid 0.16 1.7 408.29 0.066 g
    (dissolve in 10 ml DMSO)
    DIPEA 2.0 eq of AA 41 μL or 49 μL
    PyBOP 1.0 eq of AA 122 mg or 147 mg
  • Coupling steps. In a peptide synthesis vessel add the resin, add the amino acid solution, DIPEA, and PyBOP. Bubble argon for 1 hr. and wash 3× with DMF and IPA. Use 20% piperidine in DMF for Fmoc deprotection, 3× (10 min), before each amino acid coupling. Continue to complete all 9 coupling steps. At the end treat the resin with 2% hydrazine in DMF 3× (5 min) to cleave TFA protecting group on Pteroic acid, wash the resin with DMF (3×), IPA (3×), MeOH (3×), and bubble the resin with argon for 30 min.
  • Cleavage step. Reagent: 92.5% TFA, 2.5% H2O, 2.5% triisopropylsilane, 2.5% ethanedithiol. Treat the resin with cleavage reagent for 15 min with argon bubbling, drain, wash the resin once with cleavage reagent, and combine the solution. Rotavap until 5 ml remains and precipitate in diethyl ether (35 mL). Centrifuge, wash with diethyl ether, and dry. The crude solid was purified by HPLC.
  • HPLC Purification step. Column: Waters Atlantis Prep T3 10 μm OBD 19×250 mm; Solvent A: 10 mM ammonium acetate, pH 5; Solvent B: ACN; Method: 5 min 0% B to 20 min 20% B 26 mL/min. Fractions containing the product was collected and freeze-dried to give ˜70 mg EC0479 (35% yield). 1H NMR and LC/MS were consistent with the product. MW 2128.10; Exact Mass: 2126.84.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00155
  • EC0488. This compound was prepared by SPPS according to the general peptide synthesis procedure described herein starting from H-Cys(4-methoxytrityl)-2-chlorotrityl-Resin, and the following SPPS reagents:
  • Reagents mmol equivalent MW amount
    H-Cys(4-methoxytrityl)-2- 0.10  0.17 g
    chlorotrityl-Resin
    (loading 0.6 mmol/g)
    EC0475 0.13 1.3 612.67 0.082 g
    Fmoc-Glu(OtBu)-OH 0.19 1.9 425.47 0.080 g
    EC0475 0.13 1.3 612.67 0.082 g
    Fmoc-Glu(OtBu)-OH 0.19 1.9 425.47 0.080 g
    EC0475 0.13 1.3 612.67 0.082 g
    Fmoc-Glu-OtBu 0.19 1.9 425.47 0.080 g
    N10TFA-Pteroic Acid 0.16 1.6 408.29 0.066 g
    (dissolve in 10 ml DMSO)
    DIPEA 2.0 eq of AA
    PyBOP 1.0 eq of AA
  • Coupling steps. In a peptide synthesis vessel add the resin, add the amino acid solution, DIPEA, and PyBOP. Bubble argon for 1 hr. and wash 3× with DMF and IPA. Use 20% piperidine in DMF for Fmoc deprotection, 3× (10 min), before each amino acid coupling. Continue to complete all 9 coupling steps. At the end treat the resin with 2% hydrazine in DMF 3× (5 min) to cleave TFA protecting group on Pteroic acid, wash the resin with DMF (3×), IPA (3×), MeOH (3×), and bubble the resin with argon for 30 min.
  • Cleavage step. Reagent: 92.5% TFA, 2.5% H2O, 2.5% triisopropylsilane, 2.5% ethanedithiol. Treat the resin with cleavage reagent 3× (10 min, 5 min, 5 min) with argon bubbling, drain, wash the resin once with cleavage reagent, and combine the solution. Rotavap until 5 ml remains and precipitate in diethyl ether (35 mL). Centrifuge, wash with diethyl ether, and dry. About half of the crude solid (−100 mg) was purified by HPLC.
  • HPLC Purification step. Column: Waters Xterra Prep MS C18 10 μm 19×250 mm; Solvent A: 10 mM ammonium acetate, pH 5; Solvent B: ACN; Method: 5 min 0% B to 25 min 20% B 26 mL/min. Fractions containing the product was collected and freeze-dried to give 43 mg EC0488 (51% yield). 1H NMR and LC/MS (exact mass 1678.62) were consistent with the product. MW 1679.63; Exact Mass: 1678.62.
  • The following Examples of binding ligand-linker intermediates, EC0233, EC0244, EC0257, and EC0261, were prepared as described herein.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00156
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00157
  • The following Examples of illustrative intermediates were prepared as described herein.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00158
  • Huisgen azide for forming 1,2,3-triazole; (a) NaN3; (b) Ag2CO3, DCM, molecular sieves; (c) LiOH, MeOH, H2O.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00159
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00160
  • C52H72N14O28S, MW 1373.27, Exact Mass: 1372.44, prepared from the corresponding tert-butyl protected carboxylates.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00161
    • C49H71N13O24S, MW 1258.23, Exact Mass: 1257.45
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00162
    • Example
  • Synthesis of Coupling Reagent EC0311. DIPEA (0.60 mL) was added to a suspension of HOBt-OCO2—(CH2)2—SS-2-pyridine HCl (685 mg, 91%) in anhydrous DCM (5.0 mL) at 0° C., stirred under argon for 2 minutes, and to which was added anhydrous hydrazine (0.10 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred under argon at 0° C. for 10 minutes and room temperature for an additional 30 minutes, filtered, and the filtrate was purified by flash chromatography (silica gel, 2% MeOH in DCM) to afford EC0311 as a clear thick oil (371 mg), solidified upon standing.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00163
    • Example
  • Vinblastine Pyridinyl Disulfide. 2-[(Benzotriazole-1-yl-(oxycarbonyloxy)-ethyldisulfanyl]-pyridine HCl (601 mg) and 378 μL it of DIPEA were sequentially added to a solution of desacetyl vinblastine hydrazide (668 mg) in 5 ml of DCM at 0° C. The reaction was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred for 3 hours. TLC (15% MeOH in DCM) showed complete conversion. The mixture was purified by silica gel chromatography (1:9 MeOH/DCM). The combined fractions were evaporated, redissolved in DCM and washed with 10% Na2CO3, brine, dried (MgSO4), and evaporated to 550 mg (80%); HPLC-RT 12.651 min., 91% pure, 1H HMR spectrum consistent with the assigned structure, and MS (ESI+): 984.3, 983.3, 982.4, 492.4, 491.9, 141.8. Additional details of this procedure are described in U.S. patent application publication No. US 2005/0002942 A1.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00164
    • Example
  • Preparation of Tubulysin Hydrazides. Illustrated by preparing EC0347. N,N-Diisopropylethylamine (DIPEA, 6.1 μL) and isobutyl chloroformate (3.0 μL) were added with via syringe in tandem into a solution of tubulysin B (0.15 mg) in anhydrous EtOAc (2.0 mL) at −15° C. After stiffing for 45 minutes at −15° C. under argon, the reaction mixture was cooled down to −20° C. and to which was added anhydrous hydrazine (5.0 μL). The reaction mixture was stirred under argon at −20° C. for 3 hours, quenched with 1.0 mM sodium phosphate buffer (pH 7.0, 1.0 mL), and injected into a preparative HPLC for purification. Column: Waters XTerra Prep MS C 18 10 μm, 19×250 mm; Mobile phase A: 1.0 mM sodium phosphate buffer, pH 7.0; Mobile phase B: acetonitrile; Method: 10% B to 80% B over 20 minutes, flow rate=25 mL/min. Fractions from 15.14-15.54 minutes were collected and lyophilized to produce EC0347 as a white solid (2.7 mg). The foregoing method is equally applicable for preparing other tubulysin hydrazides by the appropriate selection of the tubulysin starting compound.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00165
    • Example
  • Preparation of Tubulysin Disulfides (stepwise process). Illustrated for EC0312. DIPEA (36 μL) and isobutyl chloroformate (13 μL) were added with the help of a syringe in tandem into a solution of tubulysin B (82 mg) in anhydrous EtOAc (2.0 mL) at −15° C. After stirring for 45 minutes at −15° C. under argon, to the reaction mixture was added a solution of EC0311 in anhydrous EtOAc (1.0 mL). The resulting solution was stirred under argon at −15° C. for 15 minutes and room temperature for an additional 45 minutes, concentrated, and the residue was purified by flash chromatography (silica gel, 2 to 8% MeOH in DCM) to give EC0312 as a white solid (98 mg). The foregoing method is equally applicable for preparing other tubulysin derivatives by the appropriate selection of the tubulysin starting compound.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00166
    • Example
  • General Synthesis of Disulfide Containing Tubulysin Conjugates. Illustrated with EC0312. A binding ligand-linker intermediate containing a thiol group is taken in deionized water (ca. 20 mg/mL, bubbled with argon for 10 minutes prior to use) and the pH of the suspension was adjusted by saturated NaHCO3 (bubbled with argon for 10 minutes prior to use) to about 6.9 (the suspension may become a solution when the pH increased). Additional deionized water is added (ca. 20-25%) to the solution as needed, and to the aqueous solution is added immediately a solution of EC0312 in THF (ca. 20 mg/mL). The reaction mixture becomes homogenous quickly. After stirring under argon, e.g. for 45 minutes, the reaction mixture is diluted with 2.0 mM sodium phosphate buffer (pH 7.0, ca 150 volume percent) and the THF is removed by evacuation. The resulting suspension is filtered and the filtrate may be purified by preparative HPLC (as described herein). Fraction are lyophilized to isolate the conjugates. The foregoing method is equally applicable for preparing other tubulysin conjugates by the appropriate selection of the tubulysin starting compound.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00167
    • Comparative Vinblastine Example
  • EC145 lacking a hydrophilic spacer linker. Peptidyl fragment Pte-Glu-Asp-Arg-Asp-Asp-Cys-OH (Example 13) in THF was treated with either the thiosulfonate-activated vinblastine or vinblastine pyridinyl disulfide as a yellow solution resulting from dissolution in 0.1 M NaHCO3 at pH>6.5 under argon. Lyophilization and HPLC gave a 70% yield; selected 1H NMR (D2O) δ 8.67 (s, 1H, FA H-7), 7.50 (br s, 1H, VLB H-11′), 7.30-7.40 (br s, 1H, VLB H-14′), 7.35 (d, 2H, J=7.8 Hz, FA H-12 & 16), 7.25 (m, 1H, VLB H-13′), 7.05 (br s, 1H, VLB H-12′), 6.51 (d, 2H, J=8.7 Hz, FA H-13 & 15), 6.4 (s, 2H, VLB H-14 & 17), 5.7 (m, 1H, VLB olefin), 5.65 (m, 1H, VLB H-7), 5.5 (d, 1H, VLB olefin), 5.5 (m, 1H, VLB H-6), 4.15 (m, 1H, VLB H-8′), 3.82 (s, 3H, VLB C18′—CO2CH3), 3.69 (s, 3H, VLB C16—OCH3), 2.8 (s, 3H, VLB N—CH3), 1.35 (br s, 1H, VLB H-3′), 1.15 (m, 1H, VLB H-2′), 0.9 (t, 3H, J. 7 Hz, VLB H-21′), 0.55 (t, 3H, J=6.9 Hz, VLB H-21); LCMS (ESI, m+H+) 1918.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00168
    • Example
  • EC0234 (Mono-Saccharo-Folate Vinblastine Conjugate) including a hydrophilic spacer linker. In a polypropylene centrifuge bottle, folate linker (EC0233, 22 mg, 0.030 mmol) was dissolved in 2 mL of water and bubbled with argon for 10 mM. In another flask, a 0.1N NaHCO3 solution was argon bubbled for 10 min. pH of the linker solution was carefully adjusted to 6.9 using the 0.1N NaHCO3 solution. The vinblastine pyridinyl disulfide (27 mg, 0.028 mmol) in 2 mL of tetrahydrofuran (THF) was added slowly to the above solution. The resulting clear solution was stirred under argon for 15 min to 1 h. Progress of the reaction was monitored by analytical HPLC (10 mM ammonium acetate, pH=7.0 and acetonitrile). THF was removed under reduced pressure and the aqueous solution was filtered and injected on a prep-HPLC column (X-terra Column C18, 19×300 mM). Elution with 1 mM sodium phosphate pH=7.0 and acetonitrile resulted in pure fractions containing the product. Vinblastine-saccharo-folate conjugate (EC0234) was isolated after freeze-drying for 48 h (34 mg, 76%). 1H NMR data was in accordance with the folate conjugate. C74H93N15O21S2; MW 1592.75; Exact Mass: 1591.61.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00169
    • Example
  • EC0246 (Bis-Saccharo-Folate Vinblastine Conjugate). In a polypropylene centrifuge bottle, folate linker (EC0244, 30 mg, 0.030 mmol) was dissolved in 5 mL of water and bubbled with argon for 10 min. In another flask, a 0.1N NaHCO3 solution was argon bubbled for 10 min. pH of the linker solution was carefully adjusted to 6.9 using the 0.1N NaHCO3 solution. The vinblastine pyridinyl disulfide (27 mg, 0.028 mmol) in 5 mL of tetrahydrofuran (THF) was added slowly to the above solution. The resulting clear solution was stirred under argon for 15 min to 1 h. Progress of the reaction was monitored by analytical HPLC (10 mM ammonium acetate, pH=7.0 and acetonitrile). THF was removed under reduced pressure and the aqueous solution was filtered and injected on a prep-HPLC column (X-terra Column C18, 19×300 mM). Elution with 1 mM sodium phosphate pH=7.0 and acetonitrile resulted in pure fractions containing the product. Vinblastine-bis-saccharo-folate conjugate (EC0246) was isolated after freeze-drying for 48 h (34 mg, 66%). 1H NMR data was in accordance with the folate conjugate. C84H109N17O29S2; MW 1884.99; Exact Mass: 1883.70.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00170
    • Example
  • EC0258 (Tris-Saccharo-Asp-Folate Vinblastine Conjugate). In a polypropylene centrifuge bottle, folate linker (EC0257, 37 mg, 0.031 mmol) was dissolved in 5 mL of water and bubbled with argon for 10 min. In another flask, a 0.1N NaHCO3 solution was argon bubbled for 10 min. pH of the linker solution was carefully adjusted to 6.9 using the 0.1N NaHCO3 solution. The vinblastine pyridinyl disulfide (27.5 mg, 0.028 mmol) in 5 mL of tetrahydrofuran (THF) was added slowly to the above solution. The resulting clear solution was stirred under argon for 15 min to 1 h. Progress of the reaction was monitored by analytical HPLC (10 mM ammonium acetate, pH=7.0 and acetonitrile). THF was removed under reduced pressure and the aqueous solution was filtered and injected on a prep-HPLC column (X-terra Column C18, 19×300 mM). Elution with 1 mM sodium phosphate pH=7.0 and acetonitrile resulted in pure fractions containing the product. Vinblastine-tris-saccharo-Asp-folate conjugate (EC0258) was isolated after freeze-drying for 48 h (36 mg, 62%). 1H NMR data was in accordance with the folate conjugate. C90H120N18O34S2; MW 2062.15; Exact Mass: 2060.77.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00171
    • Example
  • EC0263 (Tris-Saccharo-Bis-Asp-Folate Vinblastine Conjugate). In a polypropylene centrifuge bottle, folate linker (EC0261, 37 mg, 0.029 mmol) was dissolved in 5 mL of water and bubbled with argon for 10 min. In another flask, a 0.1N NaHCO3 solution was argon bubbled for 10 min. pH of the linker solution was carefully adjusted to 6.9 using the 0.1N NaHCO3 solution. The vinblastine pyridinyl disulfide (25.5 mg, 0.026 mmol) in 5 mL of tetrahydrofuran (THF) was added slowly to the above solution. The resulting clear solution was stirred under argon for 15 min to 1 h. Progress of the reaction was monitored by analytical HPLC (10 mM ammonium acetate, pH=7.0 and acetonitrile). THF was removed under reduced pressure and the aqueous solution was filtered and injected on a prep-HPLC column (X-terra Column C18, 19×300 mM). Elution with 1 mM sodium phosphate pH=7.0 and acetonitrile resulted in pure fractions containing the product. Vinblastine-tris-saccharo-bis-Asp-folate conjugate (EC0263) was isolated after freeze-drying for 48 h (36 mg, 64%). 1H NMR data was in accordance with the folate conjugate. C94H125N19O37S2; MW 2177.24; Exact Mass: 2175.79.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00172
    • Example
  • EC0434 (Tetra-Saccharo-Tris-Asp-Folate Vinblastine Conjugate). In a polypropylene centrifuge bottle, folate linker (EC0268, 20 mg, 0.012 mmol) was dissolved in 3 mL of water and bubbled with argon for 10 min. In another flask, a 0.1N NaHCO3 solution was argon bubbled for 10 min. pH of the linker solution was carefully adjusted to 6.9 using the 0.1N NaHCO3 solution. The vinblastine pyridinyl disulfide (12 mg, 0.012 mmol) in 3 mL of tetrahydrofuran (THF) was added slowly to the above solution. The resulting clear solution was stirred under argon for 15 min to 1 h. Progress of the reaction was monitored by analytical HPLC (10 mM ammonium acetate, pH=7.0 and acetonitrile). THF was removed under reduced pressure and the aqueous solution was filtered and injected on a prep-HPLC column (X-terra Column C18, 19×300 mM). Elution with 1 mM sodium phosphate pH=7.0 and acetonitrile resulted in pure fractions containing the product. Vinblastine-tetra-saccharo-tris-Asp-folate conjugate (EC0434) was isolated after freeze-drying for 48 h (26 mg, 62%). 1H NMR data was in accordance with the folate conjugate. C104H141N21O45S2; MW 2469.48; Exact Mass: 2467.88.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00173
    • Example
  • EC0454 (Tetra-Saccharo-Bis-Asp-Folate Vinblastine Conjugate). In a polypropylene centrifuge bottle, folate linker (EC0452, 34 mg, 0.02 mmol) was dissolved in 3 mL of water and bubbled with argon for 10 min. In another flask, a 0.1N NaHCO3 solution was argon bubbled for 10 min. pH of the linker solution was carefully adjusted to 6.9 using the 0.1N NaHCO3 solution. The vinblastine pyridinyl disulfide (20 mg, 0.02 mmol) in 3 mL of tetrahydrofuran (THF) was added slowly to the above solution. The resulting clear solution was stirred under argon for 15 min to 1 h. Progress of the reaction was monitored by analytical HPLC (10 mM ammonium acetate, pH=7.0 and acetonitrile). THF was removed under reduced pressure and the aqueous solution was filtered and injected on a prep-HPLC column (X-terra Column C18, 19×300 mM). Elution with 1 mM sodium phosphate pH=7.0 and acetonitrile resulted in pure fractions containing the product. Vinblastine-tetra-saccharo-bis-Asp-folate conjugate (EC0454) was isolated after freeze-drying for 48 h (35 mg, 70%). 1H NMR data was in accordance with the folate conjugate. C108H151N23O43S2; MW 2523.62; Exact Mass: 2521.98.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00174
    • Example
  • EC0455 (Tetra-Saccharo-bis-Asp-Folate Vinblastine Conjugate). In a polypropylene centrifuge bottle, folate linker (EC0457, 20 mg, 0.013 mmol) was dissolved in 1.5 mL of water and bubbled with argon for 10 min. In another flask, a 0.1N NaHCO3 solution was argon bubbled for 10 min. pH of the linker solution was carefully adjusted to 6.9 using the 0.1N NaHCO3 solution. The vinblastine pyridinyl disulfide (18 mg, 0.018 mmol) in 1.5 mL of tetrahydrofuran (THF) was added slowly to the above solution. The resulting clear solution was stirred under argon for 30 min. Progress of the reaction was monitored by analytical HPLC (10 mM ammonium acetate, pH=7.0 and acetonitrile). THF was removed under reduced pressure and the aqueous solution was filtered and injected on a prep-HPLC column (X-terra Column C18, 19×300 mM). Elution with 1 mM sodium phosphate pH=7.0 and acetonitrile resulted in pure fractions containing the product. Vinblastine-tetra-saccharo-bis-Asp-folate conjugate (EC0455) was isolated after freeze-drying for 48 h (19 mg, 62%). 1H NMR data was in accordance with the folate conjugate. C100H136N20O42S2; MW 2354.39.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00175
    • Example
  • EC0456. In a polypropylene centrifuge bottle, folate linker (EC0453, 46 mg, 0.029 mmol) was dissolved in 3 mL of water, which had been bubbled with argon for 10 min. In another flask, a saturated NaHCO3 solution was argon bubbled for 10 min. The pH of the linker solution was carefully adjusted, with argon bubbling, to 6.9 using the NaHCO3 solution. The vinblastine pyridinyl disulfide (32 mg, 1.1 eq) in 3 mL of tetrahydrofuran (THF) was added quickly to the above solution. The resulting clear solution was stirred under argon. Progress of the reaction was monitored by analytical HPLC (2 mM phosphate buffer, pH=7.0 and acetonitrile). After 30 min, to the reaction was added 12 mL 2 mM phosphate buffer (pH 7), the resulting cloudy solution filtered, and the filtrate was injected on a prep-HPLC: Column: Waters Xterra Prep MS C 18 10 μm 19×250 mm; Solvent A: 2 mM sodium phosphate, pH 7; Solvent B: ACN; Method: 5 min 1% B to 40 min 80% B 25 mL/min. Fractions containing EC0456 were collected and freeze-dried to afford 41.6 mg fluffy yellow solid, consisting of 30 mg EC0456 (42% yield) and 11.6 sodium phosphate salt. 1H NMR and LC/MS were consistent with the product. C104H141N21O45S2; MW 2469.48; Exact Mass: 2467.88. C, 50.58; H, 5.76; N, 11.91; O, 29.15; S, 2.60.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00176
    • Example
  • EC0481. In a polypropylene centrifuge bottle, folate linker (EC0479, 12 mg, 0.0058 mmol) was dissolved in 2.5 mL of water, which had been bubbled with argon for 10 min. In another flask, a saturated NaHCO3 solution was argon bubbled for 10 min. The pH of the linker solution was carefully adjusted, with argon bubbling, to 6.9 using the NaHCO3 solution. The vinblastine pyridinyl disulfide (5.7 mg, 1.0 eq) in 2.5 mL of tetrahydrofuran (THF) was added quickly to the above solution. The resulting clear solution was stirred under argon. Progress of the reaction was monitored by analytical HPLC (2 mM phosphate buffer, pH=7.0 and acetonitrile). After 20 min, to the reaction was added 12 mL 2 mM phosphate buffer (pH 7), the resulting cloudy solution filtered, and the filtrate was injected on a prep-HPLC: Column: Waters Atlantis Prep T3 10 μm OBD 19×250 mm; Solvent A: 2 mM sodium phosphate, pH 7; Solvent B: ACN; Method: 5 min 1% B to 25 min 50% B 26 mL/min. Fractions containing EC0481 were collected and freeze-dried to afford 15.5 mg fluffy yellow solid, consisting of 10.5 mg EC0481 (60% yield) and 5.0 sodium phosphate salt. 1H NMR and LC/MS were consistent with the product. MW 2999.15; Exact Mass: 2997.24.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00177
    • Example
  • EC0484 (Tetra-Saccharo-Bis-α-Glu-Arg-Folate Vinblastine Conjugate). In a polypropylene centrifuge bottle, folate linker (EC0480, 15 mg, 0.009 mmol) was dissolved in 3 mL of water and bubbled with argon for 10 min. In another flask, a 0.1N NaHCO3 solution was argon bubbled for 10 min. pH of the linker solution was carefully adjusted to 6.9 using the 0.1N NaHCO3 solution. The vinblastine pyridinyl disulfide (8.8 mg, 0.009 mmol) in 3 mL of tetrahydrofuran (THF) was added slowly to the above solution. The resulting clear solution was stirred under argon for 15 mM to 1 h. Progress of the reaction was monitored by analytical HPLC (10 mM ammonium acetate, pH=7.0 and acetonitrile). THF was removed under reduced pressure and the aqueous solution was filtered and injected on a prep-HPLC column (X-terra Column C18, 19×300 mM). Elution with 1 mM sodium phosphate pH=7.0 and acetonitrile resulted in pure fractions containing the product. Vinblastine-tetra-saccharo-bis-α-Glu-Arg-folate conjugate (EC0484) was isolated after freeze-drying for 48 h (16 mg, 70%). 1H NMR data was in accordance with the folate conjugate. C108H152N24O43S2; MW 2538.63; Exact Mass: 2536.99.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00178
    • Example
  • EC0487 (Tetra-Saccharo-Asp-Folate Vinblastine Conjugate). In a polypropylene centrifuge bottle, folate linker (EC0463, 21 mg, 0.015 mmol) was dissolved in 3 mL of water and bubbled with argon for 10 min. In another flask, a 0.1N NaHCO3 solution was argon bubbled for 10 min. pH of the linker solution was carefully adjusted to 6.9 using the 0.1N NaHCO3 solution. The vinblastine pyridinyl disulfide (15 mg, 0.015 mmol) in 3 mL of tetrahydrofuran (THF) was added slowly to the above solution. The resulting clear solution was stirred under argon for 15 min to 1 h. Progress of the reaction was monitored by analytical HPLC (10 mM ammonium acetate, pH=7.0 and acetonitrile). THF was removed under reduced pressure and the aqueous solution was filtered and injected on a prep-HPLC column (Atlantis Column, 19×300 mM). Elution with 1 mM sodium phosphate pH=7.0 and acetonitrile resulted in pure fractions containing the product. Vinblastine-tetra-saccharo-Asp-folate conjugate (EC0487) was isolated after freeze-drying for 48 h (28 mg, 84%). 1H NMR data was in accordance with the folate conjugate. C96H131N19O39S2; MW 2239.30; Exact Mass: 2237.83.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00179
    • Example
  • EC0489. In a polypropylene centrifuge bottle, folate linker (EC0488, 26 mg, 0.015 mmol) was dissolved in 2.5 mL of water, which had been bubbled with argon for 10 min. In another flask, a saturated NaHCO3 solution was argon bubbled for 10 min. The pH of the linker solution was carefully adjusted, with argon bubbling, to 6.9 using the NaHCO3 solution. The vinblastine pyridinyl disulfide (15 mg, 1.0 eq) in 2.5 mL of tetrahydrofuran (THF) was added quickly to the above solution. The resulting clear solution was stirred under argon. Progress of the reaction was monitored by analytical HPLC (2 mM phosphate buffer, pH=7.0 and acetonitrile). After 20 min, to the reaction was added 12 mL 2 mM phosphate buffer (pH 7), the resulting cloudy solution filtered, and the filtrate was injected on a prep-HPLC: Column: Waters Xterra Prep MS C 18 10 μm 19×250 mm; Solvent A: 2 mM sodium phosphate, pH 7; Solvent B: ACN; Method: 5 min 1% B to 25 min 50% B 26 mL/min. Fractions containing EC0489 were collected and freeze-dried to afford 35 mg fluffy yellow solid, consisting of 27.5 mg EC0489 (71% yield) and 7.5 sodium phosphate salt. 1H NMR and LC/MS were consistent with the product. MW 2550.68; Exact Mass: 2549.01.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00180
    • Example
  • EC0490 (Tetra-HomoSaccharo-Tris-αGlu-Folate Vinblastine Conjugate). In a polypropylene centrifuge bottle, folate linker (EC0478, 22 mg, 0.013 mmol) was dissolved in 3 mL of water and bubbled with argon for 10 min. In another flask, a 0.1N NaHCO3 solution was argon bubbled for 10 min. pH of the linker solution was carefully adjusted to 6.9 using the 0.1N NaHCO3 solution. The vinblastine pyridinyl disulfide (mg, mmol) in 3 mL of tetrahydrofuran (THF) was added slowly to the above solution. The resulting clear solution was stirred under argon for 15 min to 1 h. Progress of the reaction was monitored by analytical HPLC (10 mM ammonium acetate, pH=7.0 and acetonitrile). THF was removed under reduced pressure and the aqueous solution was filtered and injected on a prep-HPLC column (X-terra Column C18, 19×300 mM). Elution with 1 mM sodium phosphate pH=7.0 and acetonitrile resulted in pure fractions containing the product. Vinblastine-tetra-Homosaccharo-tris-Glu-folate conjugate (EC0490) was isolated after freeze-drying for 48 h (15 mg, 45%). NMR data was in accordance with the folate conjugate. C111H155N21O45S2; MW 2567.66; Exact Mass: 2565.99.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00181
    • Example
  • EC0492 (Tetra-HomoSaccharo-Tris-αGlu-Folate Vinblastine Conjugate). In a polypropylene centrifuge bottle, folate linker (EC0491, 26 mg, 0.013 mmol) was dissolved in 3 mL of water and bubbled with argon for 10 mM. In another flask, a 0.1N NaHCO3 solution was argon bubbled for 10 min. pH of the linker solution was carefully adjusted to 6.9 using the 0.1N NaHCO3 solution. The vinblastine pyridinyl disulfide (13 mg, 0.013 mmol) in 3 mL of tetrahydrofuran (THF) was added to the above solution. The resulting clear solution was stirred under argon for 15 min to 1 h. Progress of the reaction was monitored by analytical HPLC (10 mM ammonium acetate, pH=7.0 and acetonitrile). THF was removed under reduced pressure and the aqueous solution was filtered and injected on a prep-HPLC column (X-terra Column C18, 19×300 mM). Elution with 1 mM sodium phosphate pH=7.0 and acetonitrile resulted in pure fractions containing the product. Vinblastine-tetra-homosaccharo-tris-Glu-folate conjugate (EC0492) was isolated after freeze-drying for 48 h (22 mg, 60%). 1H NMR data was in accordance with the folate conjugate. C122H176N24O50S2; MW 2842.97; Exact Mass: 2841,14.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00182
    • Example
  • EC0493 (Tetra-Saccharo-tris-Glu-Folate Vinblastine Conjugate). In a polypropylene centrifuge bottle, folate linker (EC0477, 25 mg, 0.015 mmol) was dissolved in 1.5 mL of water and bubbled with argon for 10 min. In another flask, a 0.1N NaHCO3 solution was argon bubbled for 10 min. pH of the linker solution was carefully adjusted to 6.9 using the 0.1N NaHCO3 solution. The vinblastine pyridinyl disulfide (20 mg, 0.020 mmol) in 1.5 mL of tetrahydrofuran (THF) was added slowly to the above solution. The resulting clear solution was stirred under argon for 30 min, Progress of the reaction was monitored by analytical HPLC (10 mM ammonium acetate, pH=7.0 and acetonitrile). THF was removed under reduced pressure and the aqueous solution was filtered and injected on a prep-HPLC column (X-terra Column C18, 19×300 mM). Elution with 1 mM sodium phosphate pH=7.0 and acetonitrile resulted in pure fractions containing the product. Vinblastine-tetra-saccharo-tris-Glu-folate conjugate (EC0493) was isolated after freeze-drying for 48 h (23 mg, 61%). 1H NMR data was in accordance with the folate conjugate. C107H147N21O45S2; MW 2511.56; Exact Mass: 2509.93.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00183
    • Example
  • EC0429. This Example including an oligoamide hydrophilic spacer represented by the aminoethylpiperazinylacetamide of Asp-Asp-Cys, was prepared using the processes described herein.
  • The following illustrative examples of glucuronide compounds, EC0400 and EC0423, where the saccharide based group is illustratively introduced using click chemistry, were also prepared as described herein.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00184
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00185
  • The following illustrative examples of PEG-spacer compounds, EC0367 and EC0409, were also prepared as described herein.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00186
  • The following illustrative examples of sulfuric acid alkyl ester compounds, EC0418 and EC0428, where the sulfuric acid fragment is illustratively introduced via click chemistry, were prepared as described herein.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00187
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00188
  • The following illustrative examples of additional oligoamide spacer compounds, where the oligoamide includes an EDTE derivative were prepared as described herein.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00189
  • The following illustrative examples of β-alkyl glycosides of 2-deoxyhexapyranose compounds and PEG-linked compounds may be prepared as described herein, using click chemistry to attach the hydrophilic groups onto the spacer linker.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00190
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00191
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00192
    • Comparative Tubulysin Example
  • EC0305 lacking a hydrophilic spacer linker. EC89 (86 mg) was taken in deionized water (4.0 mL, bubbled with argon for 10 minutes prior to use) and the pH of the suspension was adjusted by saturated NaHCO3 (bubbled with argon for 10 minutes prior to use) to about 6.9 (the suspension became a solution when the pH increased). Additional deionized water was added to the solution to make a total volume of 5.0 mL and to the aqueous solution was added immediately a solution of EC0312 (97 mg) in THF (5.0 mL). The reaction mixture became homogenous quickly. After stirring under argon for 45 minutes, the reaction mixture was diluted with 2.0 mM sodium phosphate buffer (pH 7.0, 15 mL) and the THF was removed on a Rotavapor. The resulting suspension was filtered and the filtrate was injected into a preparative HPLC for purification (Column: Waters XTerra Prep MS C 18 10 μm, 19×250 mm; Mobile phase A: 2.0 mM sodium phosphate buffer, pH 7.0; Mobile phase B: acetonitrile; Method: 5% B to 80% B over 25 minutes, flow rate=25 mL/min). Fractions from 10.04-11.90 minutes were collected and lyophilized to give EC0305 as a pale yellow fluffy solid (117 mg).
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00193
    • Example
  • General Method 2 for Preparing Conjugates having a hydrophilic spacer linker (one-pot). Illustrated with preparation of EC0543. DIPEA (7.8 μL) and isobutyl chloroformate (3.1 μL) were added with the help of a syringe in tandem into a solution of tubulysin A (18 mg) in anhydrous EtOAc (0.50 mL) at −15° C. After stirring for 35 minutes at −15° C. under argon, to the reaction mixture was added a solution of EC0311 (5.8 mg) in anhydrous EtOAc (0.50 mL). The cooling was removed and the reaction mixture was stirred under argon for an additional 45 minutes, concentrated, vacuumed, and the residue was dissolved in THF (2.0 mL). Meanwhile, EC0488 (40 mg) was dissolved in deionized water (bubbled with argon for 10 minutes prior to use) and the pH of the aqueous solution was adjusted to 6.9 by saturated NaHCO3. Additional deionized water was added to the EC0488 solution to make a total volume of 2.0 mL and to which was added immediately the THF solution containing the activated tubulysin. The reaction mixture, which became homogeneous quickly, was stirred under argon for 50 minutes and quenched with 2.0 mM sodium phosphate buffer (pH 7.0, 15 mL). The resulting cloudy solution was filtered and the filtrate was injected into a preparative HPLC for purification. Column: Waters XTerra Prep MS C 18 10 μm, 19×250 mm; Mobile phase A: 2.0 mM sodium phosphate buffer, pH 7.0; Mobile phase B: acetonitrile; Method: 1% B for 5 minutes, then 1% B to 60% B over the next 30 minutes, flow rate=26 mL/min. Fractions from 20.75-24.50 minutes were collected and lyophilized to afford EC0543 as a pale yellow fluffy solid (26 mg). The foregoing method is equally applicable for preparing other tubulysin conjugates by the appropriate selection of the tubulysin starting compound.
  • The following additional illustrative examples of tubulysin conjugates including a hydrophilic spacer linker were prepared using the process and syntheses described herein from tubulysins.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00194
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00195
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00196
  • The following Examples were also prepared as described herein.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00197
    • C87H115Cl2N15O38S2; MW 2113.96; Exact Mass: 2111.63
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00198
    • Comparative Bortezomib Examples
  • The following Comparative Examples of bortezomib (Velcade) conjugates (EC0522 and EC0587) lacking a hydrophilic spacer linker were also prepared as described herein and in US Patent Application Publication Serial No. 2005/0002942.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00199
    • EC0522 C56H69BN18O17S2, C, 50.15; H, 5.19; B, 0.81; N, 18.80; O, 20.28; S, 4.78, MW 1341.20, Exact Mass: 1340.46
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00200
    • EC0587 C77H90B2N20O23S4, MW 1813.55, Exact Mass: 1812.56
  • The following Examples of bortezomib conjugates including a hydrophilic spacer linker were also prepared as described herein.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00201
  • C85H119BN20O36S2, MW 2071.91, Exact Mass: 2070.76. Without being bound by theory, it is appreciated that in the velcade conjugates, the boronic acid and the linker may form intermolecular interactions with the carbohydrate side chains. Illustratively, the boronic acid forms boronate ester complexes with one or two hydroxyl groups. Such ester complexes may be formed with vicinal hydroxyls as well as with 1,3-hydroxyls. It is appreciated that the boronate ester complexes may form at the end of the carbohydrate fragment, or in the interior of the carbohydrate fragment. It is further appreciated that in aqueous solution, the boronate ester complexes may be in equilibrium with the boronic acid.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00202
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00203
  • C85H119BN20O36S2, MW 2071.91, Exact Mass: 2070.76; EC0525 (coordinated). C85H123BN20O38S2, MW 2107.94, Exact Mass: 2106.78.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00204
    • C108H145B2N25O39S4, MW 2567.34, Exact Mass: 2565.92 Comparative α-Amantin Example
  • The following Comparative Example of an α-amantin conjugate lacking a hydrophilic spacer linker was also prepared as described herein and in US Patent Application Publication Serial No. 2005/0002942.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00205
  • EC0323 was not competitive with folic acid, and exhibited the same IC50 with and without excess folic acid present.
  • The following Examples of an α-amantin conjugate including a hydrophilic spacer linker was also prepared as described herein.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00206
  • C107H154N26O50S3, MW 2700.71, Exact Mass: 2698.95. EC0592 shows an IC50 of ˜3 nM, which may be competed with excess folic acid, against KB cells in 3H-thymidine incorporation assay.
  • The following Examples of illustrative conjugates were prepared as described herein.
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00207
    • C95H139N19O42S2, MW 2283.35, Exact Mass: 2281.88
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00208
    • C99H146N20O44S2, MW 2384.46, Exact Mass: 2382.92
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00209
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00210
    • C83H116N24O37S2, C, 47.33; H, 5.55; N, 15.96; O, 28.11; S, 3.05, MW 2106.08, Exact Mass: 2104.74
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00211
    • C86H120N24O39S2, C, 47.42; H, 5.55; N, 15.43; O, 28.65; S, 2.94, MW 2178,14, Exact Mass: 2176.76
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00212
    • C111H167N23045S3, C, 50.50; H, 6.38; N, 12.20; O, 27.27; S, 3.64, MW 2639.84, m/z: 2639.07 (100.0%), 2638.06 (80.8%), 2640.07 (79.6%)
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00213
    • C87H125ClN22O37S2; MW 2170.63, Exact Mass: 2168.77
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00214
    • C121H183N17050S2, MW 2739.96, Exact Mass: 2738.17
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00215
  • Prepared by Huisgen cyclization of corresponding alkyne and azidoethylcarbohydrate; 2 eq. Na ascorbate, 1 eq. CuSO4.5H2O, THF/water (1:1); 5 eq. Na aAscorbate, 2.5 eq. CuSO4.5H2O, THF/water (9:1); (10 mg). C81H100N18O24S2, C, 54.84; H, 5.68; N, 14.21; O, 21.65; S, 3.62, MW 1773.90, Exact Mass: 1772.66
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00216
  • Prepared from EC0419. C82H97N17O21S2, MW 1720.88, Exact Mass: 1719.65 (90 mg).
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00217
  • Prepared by Huisgen cyclization; C98H123N23O35S2, C, 52.38; H, 5.52; N, 14.34; O, 24.92; S, 2.85, MW 2247.29, Exact Mass: 2245.80
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00218
    • C98H130N20O37S2, MW 2244.32, Exact Mass: 2242.83
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00219
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00220
    • C98H133ClN20O38S2, MW 2298.80, Exact Mass: 2296.82
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00221
    • C124H159N19O53S2, MW 2827.82, Exact Mass: 2825.98
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00222
    • C120H161N19O53S2, MW 2781.79, Exact Mass: 2779.99
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00223
    • C95H134N16O45S2, MW 2284.29, Exact Mass: 2282.81
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00224
    • C93H134N16O42S2, C, 50.49; H, 6.11; N, 10.13; O, 30.37; S, 2.90, MW 2212.27, Exact Mass: 2210.83
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00225
    • C125H189N23O51S2, MW 2894.09, Exact Mass: 2892.23
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00226
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00227
    • C90H126ClN23O38S3, MW 2269.74, Exact Mass: 2267.75
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00228
    • C68H103N17O35S2, MW 1782.77, Exact Mass: 1781.62
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00229
    • C90H140N22O47S4, MW 2410.45, Exact Mass: 2408.81
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00230
    • C85H118N18O36S2, C, 50.24; H, 5.85; N, 12.41; O, 28.34; S, 3.16, MW 2032.08, Exact Mass: 2030.74
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00231
    • C90H121N19O36S3, MW 2141.22, Exact Mass: 2139.74
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00232
    • C95H132N20O42S2, MW 2290.30, Exact Mass: 2288.82
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00233
    • C106H140N26O41S3, MW 2530.59, Exact Mass: 2528.88
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00234
    • C105H139BN22O38S3, C, 52.02; H, 5.78; B, 0.45; N, 12.71; O, 25.08; S, 3.97, MW 2424.36, Exact Mass: 2422.89
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00235
    • C141H203N19O52S3, C, 54.76; H, 6.62; N, 8.61; O, 26.90; S, 3.11, MW 3092.42, Exact Mass: 3090.30
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00236
    • C131H176N24O45S3, MW 2903.13, Exact Mass: 2901.14
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00237
    • C145H2O9BrN24O55S4, MW 3376.51, Exact Mass: 3373.24
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00238
    • C101H131BrN24O38S3, MW 2465.36, Exact Mass: 2462.74
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00239
    • C115H149N19O49S3, MW 2677.71, Exact Mass: 2675.89
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00240
    • C110H147N33O45S4, MW, 2779.80, Exact Mass: 2777.9112, m/z: 2778.91 (100.0%), 2777.91 (74.4%), 2779.92 (62.2%)
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00241
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00242
    Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00243
    • C147H214BN23O54S4, C, 53.40; H, 6.52; B, 0.33; N, 9.74; O, 26.13; S, 3,88, MW 3306.47, Exact Mass: 3304.37
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00244
    • C173H251N25O61S4, MW 3785.23, Exact Mass: 3782.62
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00245
    • C145H209BrN24O55S4, MW 3376.51, Exact Mass: 3373.24
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00246
    • C143H206BrN25O54S4, MW 3347.47, Exact Mass: 3344.22
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00247
    • C61H91N9O31S, MW 1478.48, Exact Mass: 1477.55
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00248
    • C63H95N9O30S2, MW 1522.60, Exact Mass: 1521.56
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00249
    • C48H83N9O30S, MW 1298.28, Exact Mass: 1297.50
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00250
    • C69H105N17O35S2, MW 1796.79, Exact Mass: 1795.64
  • Figure US20140073761A1-20140313-C00251
  • C102H164N10O45S2, C, 52.93; H, 7.14; N, 6.05; O, 31.11; S, 2.77, MW 2314.57, Exact Mass: 2313.03

Claims (2)

1. A compound of the formula

B-L-A
wherein B is a receptor binding ligand that binds to a target cell receptor, L is a linker that comprises one or more hydrophilic spacer linkers, and A is a diagnostic, therapeutic, or imaging agent that is desirably delivered to the cell.
2.-39. (canceled)
US13/785,542 2007-06-25 2013-03-05 Conjugates containing hydrophilic spacer linkers Pending US20140073761A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US13/785,542 US20140073761A1 (en) 2007-06-25 2013-03-05 Conjugates containing hydrophilic spacer linkers

Applications Claiming Priority (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US94609207P 2007-06-25 2007-06-25
US3618608P 2008-03-13 2008-03-13
PCT/US2008/068093 WO2009002993A1 (en) 2007-06-25 2008-06-25 Conjugates containing hydrophilic spacer linkers
US66671209A 2009-12-24 2009-12-24
US13/785,542 US20140073761A1 (en) 2007-06-25 2013-03-05 Conjugates containing hydrophilic spacer linkers

Related Parent Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US12/666,712 Continuation US9138484B2 (en) 2007-06-25 2008-06-25 Conjugates containing hydrophilic spacer linkers
PCT/US2008/068093 Continuation WO2009002993A1 (en) 2007-06-25 2008-06-25 Conjugates containing hydrophilic spacer linkers

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20140073761A1 true US20140073761A1 (en) 2014-03-13

Family

ID=40186017

Family Applications (5)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US12/666,712 Expired - Fee Related US9138484B2 (en) 2007-06-25 2008-06-25 Conjugates containing hydrophilic spacer linkers
US13/785,542 Pending US20140073761A1 (en) 2007-06-25 2013-03-05 Conjugates containing hydrophilic spacer linkers
US14/820,777 Abandoned US20160168183A1 (en) 2007-06-25 2015-08-07 Conjugates Containing Hydrophilic Spacer Linkers
US15/431,157 Expired - Fee Related US10738086B2 (en) 2007-06-25 2017-02-13 Conjugates containing hydrophilic spacer linkers
US16/919,919 Abandoned US20210024581A1 (en) 2007-06-25 2020-07-02 Conjugates containing hydrophilic spacer linkers

Family Applications Before (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US12/666,712 Expired - Fee Related US9138484B2 (en) 2007-06-25 2008-06-25 Conjugates containing hydrophilic spacer linkers

Family Applications After (3)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US14/820,777 Abandoned US20160168183A1 (en) 2007-06-25 2015-08-07 Conjugates Containing Hydrophilic Spacer Linkers
US15/431,157 Expired - Fee Related US10738086B2 (en) 2007-06-25 2017-02-13 Conjugates containing hydrophilic spacer linkers
US16/919,919 Abandoned US20210024581A1 (en) 2007-06-25 2020-07-02 Conjugates containing hydrophilic spacer linkers

Country Status (12)

Country Link
US (5) US9138484B2 (en)
EP (2) EP3569251A1 (en)
JP (1) JP5690589B2 (en)
CN (2) CN104383553A (en)
AU (1) AU2008268432B2 (en)
BR (1) BRPI0812970A2 (en)
CA (1) CA2690943A1 (en)
ES (1) ES2732879T3 (en)
HK (1) HK1207980A1 (en)
IL (2) IL202796A (en)
RU (1) RU2523909C2 (en)
WO (1) WO2009002993A1 (en)

Cited By (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US9505747B2 (en) 2012-03-29 2016-11-29 Endocyte, Inc. Processes for preparing tubulysin derivatives and conjugates thereof
US9550734B2 (en) 2004-07-23 2017-01-24 Endocyte, Inc. Bivalent linkers and conjugates thereof
US9555139B2 (en) 2007-03-14 2017-01-31 Endocyte, Inc. Binding ligand linked drug delivery conjugates of tubulysins
WO2017161144A1 (en) * 2016-03-16 2017-09-21 Endocyte, Inc. Carbonic anhydrase ix inhibitor conjugates and uses thereof
US9877965B2 (en) 2007-06-25 2018-01-30 Endocyte, Inc. Vitamin receptor drug delivery conjugates for treating inflammation
US10080805B2 (en) 2012-02-24 2018-09-25 Purdue Research Foundation Cholecystokinin B receptor targeting for imaging and therapy
US10738086B2 (en) 2007-06-25 2020-08-11 Endocyte Inc. Conjugates containing hydrophilic spacer linkers
WO2022241262A3 (en) * 2021-05-14 2023-01-12 Purdue Research Foundation Small molecule-based bi-specific immune cell tethers and their use in the treatment of enveloped virus infection
US11925696B2 (en) 2016-03-16 2024-03-12 Purdue Research Foundation Carbonic anhydrase IX targeting agents and methods

Families Citing this family (102)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
MXPA03010035A (en) 2001-05-02 2004-06-30 Purdue Research Foundation Treatment and diagnosis of macrophage mediated disease.
US8043602B2 (en) 2002-02-07 2011-10-25 Endocyte, Inc. Folate targeted enhanced tumor and folate receptor positive tissue optical imaging technology
US8043603B2 (en) 2002-02-07 2011-10-25 Endocyte, Inc. Folate targeted enhanced tumor and folate receptor positive tissue optical imaging technology
AU2004210136C1 (en) * 2003-01-27 2010-10-07 Endocyte, Inc. Vitamin receptor binding drug delivery conjugates
ES2317010T3 (en) 2003-05-30 2009-04-16 Purdue Research Foundation METHOD OF DIAGNOSIS OF ARTEROSCLEROSIS.
WO2005080431A2 (en) 2004-02-12 2005-09-01 Morphotek, Inc. Monoclonal antibodies that specifically bind to folate receptor alpha
US20060239910A1 (en) 2005-04-22 2006-10-26 Morphotek Inc. Antibodies with immune effector activity and that internalize in folate receptor alpha-positive cells
JP5175723B2 (en) 2005-07-05 2013-04-03 パーデュー・リサーチ・ファウンデーション Preparation of compositions for treating monocyte-mediated diseases
EP1940473A2 (en) 2005-09-23 2008-07-09 Purdue Research Foundation Multiphoton in vivo flow cytometry method and device
US8685752B2 (en) 2006-11-03 2014-04-01 Purdue Research Foundation Ex vivo flow cytometry method and device
WO2008098112A2 (en) 2007-02-07 2008-08-14 Purdue Research Foundation Positron emission tomography imaging method
US20100104626A1 (en) 2007-02-16 2010-04-29 Endocyte, Inc. Methods and compositions for treating and diagnosing kidney disease
US8961926B2 (en) 2007-05-25 2015-02-24 Purdue Research Foundation Method of imaging localized infections
PT2187965T (en) 2007-08-17 2020-01-17 Purdue Research Foundation Psma binding ligand-linker conjugates and methods for using
EP2209374B1 (en) 2007-10-25 2014-12-03 Endocyte, Inc. Tubulysins and processes for preparing
CN102215844A (en) 2008-09-17 2011-10-12 恩多塞特公司 Folate receptor binding conjugates of antifolates
US20120022245A1 (en) * 2008-10-17 2012-01-26 Purdue Research Foundation Folate targeting of nucleotides
FR2947269B1 (en) * 2009-06-29 2013-01-18 Sanofi Aventis NEW ANTICANCER COMPOUNDS
KR20120050462A (en) * 2009-07-31 2012-05-18 엔도사이트, 인코포레이티드 Folate-targeted diagnostics and treatment
US8394922B2 (en) 2009-08-03 2013-03-12 Medarex, Inc. Antiproliferative compounds, conjugates thereof, methods therefor, and uses thereof
CA2785373A1 (en) * 2009-12-23 2011-06-30 Endocyte, Inc. Vitamin receptor drug delivery conjugates for treating inflammation
EP2538976B8 (en) 2010-02-24 2017-05-24 ImmunoGen, Inc. Immunoconjugates against folate receptor 1 and uses thereof
US9951324B2 (en) 2010-02-25 2018-04-24 Purdue Research Foundation PSMA binding ligand-linker conjugates and methods for using
EP2571362A4 (en) * 2010-05-19 2014-01-22 Endocyte Inc Improved process for a folate-targeted agent
WO2012047525A2 (en) * 2010-09-27 2012-04-12 Endocyte, Inc. Folate conjugates for treating inflammation of the eye
CN102008732B (en) * 2010-11-08 2012-10-24 武汉华耀生物医药有限公司 Folate conjugated antibody medicament and preparation method and application thereof
CA2817223A1 (en) 2010-11-12 2012-05-18 Endocyte, Inc. Methods of treating cancer
ES2661466T3 (en) 2011-04-01 2018-04-02 Immunogen, Inc. Methods to increase the effectiveness of cancer therapy with FOLR1
KR102087854B1 (en) 2011-06-10 2020-03-12 메르사나 테라퓨틱스, 인코포레이티드 Protein-Polymer-Drug Conjugates
US9034829B1 (en) 2011-10-27 2015-05-19 Northwestern University pH-sensitive polymer-drug conjugates for targeted delivery of therapeutics
EP2822386B1 (en) 2012-02-29 2021-05-05 Purdue Research Foundation Folate receptor alpha binding ligands
US8940742B2 (en) 2012-04-10 2015-01-27 Infinity Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Heterocyclic compounds and uses thereof
US9801951B2 (en) * 2012-05-15 2017-10-31 Concortis Biosystems, Corp. Drug-conjugates, conjugation methods, and uses thereof
US9504756B2 (en) 2012-05-15 2016-11-29 Seattle Genetics, Inc. Self-stabilizing linker conjugates
KR102434075B1 (en) 2012-05-17 2022-08-19 익스텐드 바이오사이언시즈, 인크. Carriers for improved drug delivery
LT3210627T (en) 2012-07-12 2023-04-11 Hangzhou Dac Biotech Co., Ltd Conjugates of cell binding molecules with cytotoxic agents
HUE049693T2 (en) 2012-08-31 2020-10-28 Immunogen Inc Diagnostic assays and kits for detection of folate receptor 1
AU2013331440A1 (en) * 2012-10-16 2015-04-30 Endocyte, Inc. Drug delivery conjugates containing unnatural amino acids and methods for using
KR102499944B1 (en) 2012-11-15 2023-02-14 엔도사이트, 인코포레이티드 Conjugates for treating diseases caused by psma expressing cells
CN105849086B (en) * 2012-11-24 2018-07-31 杭州多禧生物科技有限公司 Hydrophily chain junctor and its application on drug molecule and cell-binding molecules conjugation reaction
US20140154702A1 (en) * 2012-11-30 2014-06-05 Endocyte, Inc. Methods For Treating Cancer Using Combination Therapies
AU2013359506B2 (en) 2012-12-10 2018-05-24 Mersana Therapeutics, Inc. Protein-polymer-drug conjugates
WO2014093640A1 (en) 2012-12-12 2014-06-19 Mersana Therapeutics,Inc. Hydroxy-polmer-drug-protein conjugates
US20150314007A1 (en) * 2012-12-21 2015-11-05 Glykos Finland Oy Linker-payload molecule conjugates
PL2956173T3 (en) 2013-02-14 2017-09-29 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Tubulysin compounds, methods of making and use
US10813931B2 (en) 2013-02-19 2020-10-27 The Brigham And Women's Hospital, Inc. Methods and compositions relating to the treatment of cancer
US9352049B2 (en) * 2013-03-14 2016-05-31 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Ligand-therapeutic agent conjugates, silicon-based linkers, and methods for making and using them
JP2016536330A (en) 2013-08-30 2016-11-24 イミュノジェン， インコーポレイテッド Antibodies and assays for detection of folate receptor 1
US9751888B2 (en) 2013-10-04 2017-09-05 Infinity Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Heterocyclic compounds and uses thereof
TWI657085B (en) 2013-10-04 2019-04-21 英菲尼提製藥股份有限公司 Heterocyclic compounds and uses thereof
KR20240034882A (en) 2013-10-15 2024-03-14 씨젠 인크. Pegylated drug-linkers for improved ligand-drug conjugate pharmacokinetics
PE20211760A1 (en) 2013-10-18 2021-09-07 Deutsches Krebsforsch MARKED MEMBRANE-SPECIFIC PROSTATIC ANTIGEN (PSMA) INHIBITORS INCLUDING CARBOXYL GROUPS AND A MODIFIED BINDER REGION, IMAGING AGENTS, AND UNDERSTANDING PHARMACEUTICAL AGENTS
CN108514646B (en) 2013-11-14 2021-07-16 恩多塞特公司 Compounds for positron emission tomography
ES2860173T3 (en) 2013-11-19 2021-10-04 Purdue Research Foundation Patient Selection Method for Inflammation
CN106414465B (en) * 2014-02-28 2021-11-16 杭州多禧生物科技有限公司 Charged linkers and their use in conjugation reactions
MX2016012021A (en) 2014-03-19 2017-04-13 Infinity Pharmaceuticals Inc Heterocyclic compounds for use in the treatment of pi3k-gamma mediated disorders.
AU2015247806A1 (en) * 2014-04-14 2016-10-27 Endocyte, Inc. Drug delivery conjugates for treating resistant cancer and for use in combination therapy
ES2785551T3 (en) 2014-06-30 2020-10-07 Glykos Finland Oy Saccharide derivative of a toxic payload and its conjugates with antibodies
WO2016054491A1 (en) 2014-10-03 2016-04-07 Infinity Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Heterocyclic compounds and uses thereof
EP3220961B1 (en) 2014-10-22 2023-07-05 Extend Biosciences, Inc. Therapeutic vitamin d conjugates
US9789197B2 (en) 2014-10-22 2017-10-17 Extend Biosciences, Inc. RNAi vitamin D conjugates
WO2016065052A1 (en) 2014-10-22 2016-04-28 Extend Biosciences, Inc. Insulin vitamin d conjugates
US10077287B2 (en) 2014-11-10 2018-09-18 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Tubulysin analogs and methods of making and use
US10188759B2 (en) 2015-01-07 2019-01-29 Endocyte, Inc. Conjugates for imaging
CA2979527A1 (en) * 2015-03-13 2016-09-22 Endocyte, Inc. Conjugates of pyrrolobenzodiazepine (pbd) prodrugs for treating disease
EP3069734A1 (en) * 2015-03-17 2016-09-21 Exiris S.r.l. Cryptophycin-based antibody-drug conjugates with novel self-immolative linkers
CA2984169A1 (en) * 2015-05-01 2016-11-10 Endocyte, Inc. Antifolate conjugates for treating inflammation
WO2016183131A1 (en) 2015-05-11 2016-11-17 Purdue Research Foundation Ligand ionophore conjugates
CN108026123B (en) * 2015-06-15 2021-02-05 杭州多禧生物科技有限公司 Hydrophilic linkers for coupling
CN113350518A (en) 2015-07-12 2021-09-07 杭州多禧生物科技有限公司 Conjugated bridge linkers to cell binding molecules
US9839687B2 (en) 2015-07-15 2017-12-12 Suzhou M-Conj Biotech Co., Ltd. Acetylenedicarboxyl linkers and their uses in specific conjugation of a cell-binding molecule
US10676487B2 (en) * 2015-09-09 2020-06-09 On Target Laboratories, LLC Synthesis and composition of photodynamic therapeutic agents for the targeted treatment of cancer
AU2016322552B2 (en) 2015-09-14 2021-03-25 Infinity Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Solid forms of isoquinolinone derivatives, process of making, compositions comprising, and methods of using the same
CN116440279A (en) 2015-09-17 2023-07-18 伊缪诺金公司 Therapeutic combinations comprising anti-FOLR 1 immunoconjugates
EP3383420B1 (en) 2015-12-04 2022-03-23 Seagen Inc. Conjugates of quaternized tubulysin compounds
US11793880B2 (en) 2015-12-04 2023-10-24 Seagen Inc. Conjugates of quaternized tubulysin compounds
WO2017161116A1 (en) 2016-03-17 2017-09-21 Infinity Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Isotopologues of isoquinolinone and quinazolinone compounds and uses thereof as pi3k kinase inhibitors
KR102626498B1 (en) 2016-03-25 2024-01-19 씨젠 인크. Process for the preparation of pegylated drug-linkers and intermediates thereof
WO2018182776A1 (en) * 2016-03-29 2018-10-04 Endocyte, Inc. Folate conjugate for use in targeting tumor associated macrophages
CN107949566B (en) * 2016-05-10 2021-09-28 浙江海正药业股份有限公司 Water-soluble rapamycin derivatives
WO2017214269A1 (en) 2016-06-08 2017-12-14 Infinity Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Heterocyclic compounds and uses thereof
US10111966B2 (en) 2016-06-17 2018-10-30 Magenta Therapeutics, Inc. Methods for the depletion of CD117+ cells
JP7257951B2 (en) 2016-08-09 2023-04-14 シージェン インコーポレイテッド Drug conjugates using self-stable linkers with improved physiochemical properties
CA3042428A1 (en) 2016-11-08 2018-05-17 Regeneron Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Steroids and protein-conjugates thereof
KR102459469B1 (en) 2016-11-14 2022-10-26 항저우 디에이씨 바이오테크 씨오, 엘티디 Conjugation linkers, cell binding molecule-drug conjugates containing the likers, methods of making and uses such conjugates with the linkers
SG10202102897PA (en) 2017-01-20 2021-04-29 Magenta Therapeutics Inc Compositions and methods for the depletion of cd137+ cells
CN106967081A (en) * 2017-03-17 2017-07-21 南开大学 A kind of synthetic method of the integrated medicine of the diagnosis and treatment with Chemosensitizing effect
CA3056134A1 (en) 2017-03-24 2018-09-27 Seattle Genetics, Inc. Process for the preparation of glucuronide drug-linkers and intermediates thereof
KR20200007905A (en) 2017-05-18 2020-01-22 리제너론 파마슈티칼스 인코포레이티드 Cyclodextrin protein drug conjugate
US12070506B2 (en) * 2018-01-08 2024-08-27 Regeneron Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Steroids and antibody-conjugates thereof
US11377502B2 (en) 2018-05-09 2022-07-05 Regeneron Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Anti-MSR1 antibodies and methods of use thereof
AU2020224097B2 (en) 2019-02-19 2024-03-07 Ultima Genomics, Inc. Linkers and methods for optical detection and sequencing
IL289458A (en) 2019-06-29 2022-07-01 Hangzhou Dac Biotech Co Ltd Cell-binding molecule-tubulysin derivative conjugate and preparation method therefor
AU2020309570A1 (en) * 2019-07-10 2022-02-03 Cybrexa 2, Inc. Peptide conjugates of cytotoxins as therapeutics
TW202116356A (en) 2019-07-10 2021-05-01 美商斯布雷克薩三號公司 Peptide conjugates of microtubule-targeting agents as therapeutics
BR112022001931A2 (en) 2019-08-02 2022-06-21 Mersana Therapeutics Inc Bis-[n-((5-carbamoyl)-1h-benzo[d]imidazol-2-yl)-pyrazol-5-carboxamide derivatives and related compounds as sting agonists (interferon gene stimulator) for the treatment of cancer
JP2022549971A (en) 2019-09-30 2022-11-29 ザ・リージェンツ・オブ・ザ・ユニバーシティ・オブ・ミシガン Biocatalytic synthesis of cryptophycin anticancer agents
US11807851B1 (en) 2020-02-18 2023-11-07 Ultima Genomics, Inc. Modified polynucleotides and uses thereof
KR102417845B1 (en) * 2020-09-18 2022-07-06 엠브릭스 주식회사 A viral receptor mimic compound bound with sialic acid compounds
EP4267961A1 (en) * 2020-12-22 2023-11-01 F. Hoffmann-La Roche AG Method for detecting an analyte of interest in a sample
AU2023208050A1 (en) * 2022-01-14 2024-07-04 Regeneron Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Verrucarin a derivatives and antibody drug conjugates thereof
CN118696234A (en) * 2022-02-18 2024-09-24 豪夫迈·罗氏有限公司 Method for detecting target analytes in a sample

Family Cites Families (237)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US2515483A (en) 1946-08-10 1950-07-18 Merck & Co Inc Diacylated pteroic acid and process for preparing same
US2816110A (en) 1956-11-23 1957-12-10 Merck & Co Inc Methods for the production of substituted pteridines
US3392173A (en) 1964-03-09 1968-07-09 Lilly Co Eli Novel acyl derivatives of desacetyl-vincaleukoblastine and processes for their preparation
US3387001A (en) 1964-10-19 1968-06-04 Lilly Co Eli Novel aminoacyl esters of desacetyl vincaleukoblastine
US3641109A (en) 1968-09-04 1972-02-08 Carl D Emerson Alkyl and aryl esters of polyhalo-dithio alcohols
US3632622A (en) 1969-04-01 1972-01-04 Chevron Res Polyhaloalkylpolythioalkyl sulfite esters
US4203898A (en) 1977-08-29 1980-05-20 Eli Lilly And Company Amide derivatives of VLB, leurosidine, leurocristine and related dimeric alkaloids
US4166810A (en) 1978-04-20 1979-09-04 Eli Lilly And Company Derivatives of 4-desacetyl VLB C-3 carboxyhydrazide
US4337339A (en) 1979-04-30 1982-06-29 Baker Instruments Corp. Process for preparation of folic acid derivatives
US4639456A (en) 1980-06-10 1987-01-27 Omnichem S.A. Vinblastin-23-oyl amino acid derivatives
US4316885A (en) 1980-08-25 1982-02-23 Ayerst, Mckenna And Harrison, Inc. Acyl derivatives of rapamycin
US4713249A (en) 1981-11-12 1987-12-15 Schroeder Ulf Crystallized carbohydrate matrix for biologically active substances, a process of preparing said matrix, and the use thereof
US5140104A (en) 1982-03-09 1992-08-18 Cytogen Corporation Amine derivatives of folic acid analogs
US4687808A (en) 1982-08-12 1987-08-18 Biospecific Technologies, Inc. Activation of biocompatible polymers with biologicals whose binding complements are pathological effectors
DE3376114D1 (en) 1982-12-07 1988-05-05 Kyowa Hakko Kogyo Kk Mitomycin analogues
JPS59175493A (en) 1983-03-25 1984-10-04 Kyowa Hakko Kogyo Co Ltd Mitomycin derivative and its preparation
EP0124502B1 (en) 1983-04-29 1991-06-12 OMNICHEM Société anonyme Conjugates of vinblastine and its derivatives, process for their preparation and pharmaceutical compositions containing these conjugates
JPS59175493U (en) 1983-05-12 1984-11-22 株式会社小松製作所 Laser processing equipment
US4866180A (en) 1984-02-24 1989-09-12 Bristol-Myers Company Amino disulfide thiol exchange products
GB8413849D0 (en) 1984-05-31 1984-07-04 Amersham Int Plc Nmr contrast agents
JPS60255789A (en) 1984-06-01 1985-12-17 Kyowa Hakko Kogyo Co Ltd Mitomycin derivative, its preparation, and antitumor agent
US5266333A (en) 1985-03-06 1993-11-30 American Cyanamid Company Water dispersible and water soluble carbohydrate polymer compositions for parenteral administration of growth hormone
US4650803A (en) 1985-12-06 1987-03-17 University Of Kansas Prodrugs of rapamycin
US4801688A (en) 1986-05-27 1989-01-31 Eli Lilly And Company Hydrazone immunoglobulin conjugates
IL82579A0 (en) 1986-05-27 1987-11-30 Lilly Co Eli Immunoglobulin conjugates
US5103018A (en) 1986-08-26 1992-04-07 Kyowa Hakko Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha Mitomycin derivatives
US5094849A (en) 1988-08-08 1992-03-10 Eli Lilly And Company Cytotoxic antibody conjugates of hydrazide derivatized vinca analogs via simple organic linkers
US5006652A (en) 1988-08-08 1991-04-09 Eli Lilly And Company Intermediates for antibody-vinca drug conjugates
US5108921A (en) 1989-04-03 1992-04-28 Purdue Research Foundation Method for enhanced transmembrane transport of exogenous molecules
US5688488A (en) 1989-04-03 1997-11-18 Purdue Research Foundation Composition and method for tumor imaging
WO1991007418A1 (en) 1989-11-13 1991-05-30 Xoma Corporation Chimeric mouse-human a10 antibody with specificity to a human tumor cell antigen
US5627165A (en) 1990-06-13 1997-05-06 Drug Innovation & Design, Inc. Phosphorous prodrugs and therapeutic delivery systems using same
US5998603A (en) 1994-09-29 1999-12-07 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 4'-desmethyl nucleoside analogs, and oligomers thereof
DE69132925T2 (en) 1990-08-29 2002-10-10 Centre Hospitalier Regional De Nantes, Nantes PROTEIN POLYLIGANDS TIED TO STABLE PROTEIN CORE STRUCTURE
US5130307A (en) 1990-09-28 1992-07-14 American Home Products Corporation Aminoesters of rapamycin
US5378696A (en) 1990-09-19 1995-01-03 American Home Products Corporation Rapamycin esters
US5221670A (en) 1990-09-19 1993-06-22 American Home Products Corporation Rapamycin esters
US5233036A (en) 1990-10-16 1993-08-03 American Home Products Corporation Rapamycin alkoxyesters
US5120842A (en) 1991-04-01 1992-06-09 American Home Products Corporation Silyl ethers of rapamycin
US5100883A (en) 1991-04-08 1992-03-31 American Home Products Corporation Fluorinated esters of rapamycin
US5194447A (en) 1992-02-18 1993-03-16 American Home Products Corporation Sulfonylcarbamates of rapamycin
US5118678A (en) 1991-04-17 1992-06-02 American Home Products Corporation Carbamates of rapamycin
US5138051A (en) 1991-08-07 1992-08-11 American Home Products Corporation Rapamycin analogs as immunosuppressants and antifungals
US5118677A (en) 1991-05-20 1992-06-02 American Home Products Corporation Amide esters of rapamycin
US5169851A (en) 1991-08-07 1992-12-08 American Home Products Corporation Rapamycin analog as immunosuppressants and antifungals
US6335434B1 (en) 1998-06-16 2002-01-01 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc., Nucleosidic and non-nucleosidic folate conjugates
US5151413A (en) 1991-11-06 1992-09-29 American Home Products Corporation Rapamycin acetals as immunosuppressant and antifungal agents
US5159079A (en) 1991-12-20 1992-10-27 Eli Lilly And Company 2-piperidones as intermediates for 5-deaza-10-oxo- and 5-deaza-10-thio-5,6,7,8-tetrahydrofolic acids
US6004555A (en) 1992-03-05 1999-12-21 Board Of Regents, The University Of Texas System Methods for the specific coagulation of vasculature
US6022966A (en) 1993-11-22 2000-02-08 Neorx Corporation Pretargeting methods and compounds
US5302584A (en) 1992-10-13 1994-04-12 American Home Products Corporation Carbamates of rapamycin
US5258389A (en) 1992-11-09 1993-11-02 Merck & Co., Inc. O-aryl, O-alkyl, O-alkenyl and O-alkynylrapamycin derivatives
US5260300A (en) 1992-11-19 1993-11-09 American Home Products Corporation Rapamycin carbonate esters as immuno-suppressant agents
US5583020A (en) 1992-11-24 1996-12-10 Ribozyme Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Permeability enhancers for negatively charged polynucleotides
JPH08509499A (en) 1993-04-23 1996-10-08 アボツト・ラボラトリーズ Rapamycin conjugates and antibodies
US7279561B1 (en) 1993-04-23 2007-10-09 Wyeth Anti-rapamycin monoclonal antibodies
US5562907A (en) 1993-05-14 1996-10-08 Arnon; Stephen S. Method to prevent side-effects and insensitivity to the therapeutic uses of toxins
US5391730A (en) 1993-10-08 1995-02-21 American Home Products Corporation Phosphorylcarbamates of rapamycin and oxime derivatives thereof
US5385909A (en) 1993-11-22 1995-01-31 American Home Products Corporation Heterocyclic esters of rapamycin
US5385908A (en) 1993-11-22 1995-01-31 American Home Products Corporation Hindered esters of rapamycin
US5385910A (en) 1993-11-22 1995-01-31 American Home Products Corporation Gem-distributed esters of rapamycin
US5389639A (en) 1993-12-29 1995-02-14 American Home Products Company Amino alkanoic esters of rapamycin
US5417982A (en) 1994-02-17 1995-05-23 Modi; Pankaj Controlled release of drugs or hormones in biodegradable polymer microspheres
IL112873A (en) 1994-03-08 2005-03-20 Wyeth Corp Rapamycin-fkbp12 binding proteins, their isolation and their use
US6171859B1 (en) 1994-03-30 2001-01-09 Mitokor Method of targeting conjugate molecules to mitochondria
US5362718A (en) 1994-04-18 1994-11-08 American Home Products Corporation Rapamycin hydroxyesters
US5463048A (en) 1994-06-14 1995-10-31 American Home Products Corporation Rapamycin amidino carbamates
US5574018A (en) 1994-07-29 1996-11-12 Amgen Inc. Conjugates of vitamin B12 and proteins
US5491231A (en) 1994-11-28 1996-02-13 American Home Products Corporation Hindered N-oxide esters of rapamycin
US5547668A (en) 1995-05-05 1996-08-20 The Board Of Trustees Of The University Of Illinois Conjugates of folate anti-effector cell antibodies
AUPN449295A0 (en) 1995-07-28 1995-08-24 Inner And Eastern Health Care Network, The Radioprotectors
US6207157B1 (en) 1996-04-23 2001-03-27 The United States Of America As Represented By The Department Of Health And Human Services Conjugate vaccine for nontypeable Haemophilus influenzae
US6030941A (en) 1996-05-01 2000-02-29 Avi Biopharma, Inc. Polymer composition for delivering substances in living organisms
ATE365562T1 (en) 1996-05-03 2007-07-15 Immunomedics Inc TARGETED COMBINATION IMMUNOTHERAPY FOR CANCER
DE19621133A1 (en) 1996-05-24 1997-11-27 Boehringer Mannheim Gmbh Determination method with oligomerized receptors
AU738431B2 (en) 1996-08-27 2001-09-20 University Of Utah Research Foundation Bioconjugates and delivery of bioactive agents
WO1998008382A1 (en) 1996-08-30 1998-03-05 Eli Lilly And Company Nonclassical pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidine antifolates
AU715632B2 (en) 1996-09-12 2000-02-03 Merck & Co., Inc. Conjugates useful in the treatment of prostate cancer
US6056973A (en) 1996-10-11 2000-05-02 Sequus Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Therapeutic liposome composition and method of preparation
US6071532A (en) 1996-10-15 2000-06-06 Emory University Synthesis of glycophospholipid and peptide-phospholipid conjugates and uses thereof
US6177404B1 (en) 1996-10-15 2001-01-23 Merck & Co., Inc. Conjugates useful in the treatment of benign prostatic hyperplasia
WO1999020626A1 (en) 1997-10-17 1999-04-29 Purdue Research Foundation Folic acid derivatives
GB9723669D0 (en) 1997-11-07 1998-01-07 Univ Aberdeen Skin penetration enhancing components
US6399638B1 (en) 1998-04-21 2002-06-04 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company 12,13-modified epothilone derivatives
US6093382A (en) 1998-05-16 2000-07-25 Bracco Research Usa Inc. Metal complexes derivatized with folate for use in diagnostic and therapeutic applications
WO1999061055A1 (en) 1998-05-22 1999-12-02 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Bifunctional molecules and therapies based thereon
JP2000026434A (en) 1998-06-05 2000-01-25 Zeria Pharmaceut Co Ltd New 1,5-benzodiazepine derivative
US6589503B1 (en) 1998-06-20 2003-07-08 Washington University Membrane-permeant peptide complexes for medical imaging, diagnostics, and pharmaceutical therapy
ES2302391T3 (en) 1998-12-18 2008-07-01 HADASIT MEDICAL RESEARCH SERVICES &amp; DEVELOPMENT COMPANY, LTD. PROCEDURE FOR ADMINISTRATION OF A COMPOSITE TO CELLS RESISTANT TO MULTI-PHARMACOS.
US6291684B1 (en) 1999-03-29 2001-09-18 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Process for the preparation of aziridinyl epothilones from oxiranyl epothilones
US7238368B2 (en) 1999-04-23 2007-07-03 Alza Corporation Releasable linkage and compositions containing same
KR100669053B1 (en) 1999-04-23 2007-01-15 알자 코포레이션 Conjugate having a cleavable linkage for use in a liposome
AUPQ014799A0 (en) 1999-05-04 1999-05-27 Access Pharmaceuticals Australia Pty Limited Amplification of folate-mediated targeting to tumor cells using polymers
AUPQ071299A0 (en) 1999-06-02 1999-06-24 Access Pharmaceuticals Australia Pty Limited Vitamin directed dual targeting therapy
AU6762600A (en) 1999-08-09 2001-03-05 General Hospital Corporation, The Drug-carrier complexes and methods of use thereof
US6822086B1 (en) 1999-08-09 2004-11-23 The General Hospital Corporation Drug-carrier complexes and methods of use thereof
AU769315B2 (en) 1999-08-24 2004-01-22 Cellgate, Inc. Enhancing drug delivery across and into epithelial tissues using oligo arginine moieties
US7229961B2 (en) 1999-08-24 2007-06-12 Cellgate, Inc. Compositions and methods for enhancing drug delivery across and into ocular tissues
EP1231942A1 (en) 1999-10-15 2002-08-21 Mayo Foundation For Medical Education And Research Cobalamin conjugates useful as imaging agents and as antitumor agents
US7067111B1 (en) 1999-10-25 2006-06-27 Board Of Regents, University Of Texas System Ethylenedicysteine (EC)-drug conjugates, compositions and methods for tissue specific disease imaging
EP1242401B1 (en) 1999-11-24 2006-12-27 Immunogen, Inc. Cytotoxic agents comprising taxanes and their therapeutic use
CN1221538C (en) 1999-12-02 2005-10-05 泽里新药工业株式会社 Calcium salts of 1,5-benzodiazepine derivatives, process for producing salts and drugs containing same
CA2405299C (en) 2000-03-31 2014-07-22 Purdue Research Foundation Method of treatment using ligand-immunogen conjugates
US6670355B2 (en) 2000-06-16 2003-12-30 Wyeth Method of treating cardiovascular disease
US6290929B1 (en) 2000-07-28 2001-09-18 The Procter & Gamble Company Cancer treatment
WO2002013802A2 (en) 2000-08-11 2002-02-21 Wyeth Method of treating estrogen receptor positive carcinoma
AU2001290841A1 (en) 2000-09-19 2002-04-02 American Home Products Corporation Water soluble rapamycin esters
US6399625B1 (en) 2000-09-27 2002-06-04 Wyeth 1-oxorapamycins
US6440991B1 (en) 2000-10-02 2002-08-27 Wyeth Ethers of 7-desmethlrapamycin
US6399626B1 (en) 2000-10-02 2002-06-04 Wyeth Hydroxyesters of 7-desmethylrapamycin
IL155952A0 (en) 2000-11-28 2003-12-23 Wyeth Corp Expression analysis of fkbp nucleic acids and polypeptides useful in the diagnosis and treatment of prostate cancer
US20020168737A1 (en) 2001-01-24 2002-11-14 Cornish Virginia W. Binding and catalysis screen for high throughput determination of protein function using chemical inducers of dimerization
AR036993A1 (en) 2001-04-02 2004-10-20 Wyeth Corp USE OF AGENTS THAT MODULATE THE INTERACTION BETWEEN PD-1 AND ITS LINKS IN THE SUBMODULATION OF IMMUNOLOGICAL ANSWERS
US7105328B2 (en) 2001-04-02 2006-09-12 Dana-Farber Cancer Institute Methods for screening for compounds that modulate pd-1 signaling
WO2002085908A1 (en) 2001-04-24 2002-10-31 Purdue Research Foundation Folate mimetics and folate-receptor binding conjugates thereof
MXPA03010035A (en) 2001-05-02 2004-06-30 Purdue Research Foundation Treatment and diagnosis of macrophage mediated disease.
US7109165B2 (en) 2001-05-18 2006-09-19 Sirna Therapeutics, Inc. Conjugates and compositions for cellular delivery
CA2449077A1 (en) 2001-06-01 2002-12-12 Gregory D. Vite Epothilone derivatives
US20040018203A1 (en) 2001-06-08 2004-01-29 Ira Pastan Pegylation of linkers improves antitumor activity and reduces toxicity of immunoconjugates
UA77200C2 (en) 2001-08-07 2006-11-15 Wyeth Corp Antineoplastic combination of cci-779 and bkb-569
CA2455308A1 (en) 2001-08-22 2003-03-06 Wyeth Rapamycin 29-enols
EP1419153A1 (en) 2001-08-22 2004-05-19 Wyeth Rapamycin dialdehydes
EP2168598A1 (en) 2001-09-28 2010-03-31 Purdue Research Foundation Method of Treatment Using Ligand-Immunogen Conjugates
GR1004163B (en) 2001-11-01 2003-02-21 Polycarbocyclic derivatives for modification of resist, optical and etch resistance properties
WO2003050295A2 (en) * 2001-12-12 2003-06-19 Conforma Therapeutics Corporation Assays and implements for determining and modulating hsp90 binding activity
US20030194409A1 (en) * 2002-01-17 2003-10-16 Rothman James E. Conjugate heat shock protein-binding peptides
US8043602B2 (en) 2002-02-07 2011-10-25 Endocyte, Inc. Folate targeted enhanced tumor and folate receptor positive tissue optical imaging technology
US7000695B2 (en) 2002-05-02 2006-02-21 Halliburton Energy Services, Inc. Expanding wellbore junction
ES2438008T3 (en) 2002-05-06 2014-01-15 Endocyte, Inc. Vitamin-directed imaging agents
US6596757B1 (en) 2002-05-14 2003-07-22 Immunogen Inc. Cytotoxic agents comprising polyethylene glycol-containing taxanes and their therapeutic use
WO2003097647A1 (en) 2002-05-15 2003-11-27 Endocyte, Inc. Vitamin-mitomycin conjugates
EP1523493B1 (en) 2002-07-09 2013-09-04 Dömling, Alexander Novel tubulysin analogues
EP1521769B1 (en) 2002-07-09 2015-09-09 Dömling, Alexander Tubulysin conjugates
MXPA05001282A (en) 2002-07-31 2005-04-28 Schering Aktiengsellschaft New effector conjugates, process for their production and their pharmaceutical use.
DK1545613T3 (en) 2002-07-31 2011-11-14 Seattle Genetics Inc Auristatin conjugates and their use in the treatment of cancer, an autoimmune disease or an infectious disease
DE10241152A1 (en) 2002-09-05 2004-03-18 GESELLSCHAFT FüR BIOTECHNOLOGISCHE FORSCHUNG MBH (GBF) Tubulysin biosynthesis genes
JP2006502301A (en) 2002-09-06 2006-01-19 インサート セラピューティクス インコーポレイテッド Cyclodextrin-based polymer for therapeutic agent delivery
US20040047917A1 (en) 2002-09-06 2004-03-11 Stephen Wilson Drug delivery and targeting with vitamin B12 conjugates
AU2003300027A1 (en) 2002-10-10 2004-05-04 Wyeth Compositions, organisms and methodologies employing a novel human kinase
AU2003286705A1 (en) 2002-10-24 2004-05-13 Research Corporation Technologies Functional mri agents for cancer imaging
DE10254439A1 (en) 2002-11-21 2004-06-03 GESELLSCHAFT FüR BIOTECHNOLOGISCHE FORSCHUNG MBH (GBF) Tubulysins, manufacturing processes and tubulysin agents
JP2006516388A (en) 2002-11-21 2006-07-06 ワイス Compositions and methods for the treatment of lupus nephritis
AU2003288467A1 (en) 2002-12-13 2004-07-09 Immunomedics, Inc. Immunoconjugates with an intracellularly-cleavable linkage
AU2004210136C1 (en) * 2003-01-27 2010-10-07 Endocyte, Inc. Vitamin receptor binding drug delivery conjugates
SI1592457T1 (en) * 2003-01-27 2012-12-31 Endocyte, Inc. Folate-vinblastine conjugate as medicament
AR042938A1 (en) 2003-02-06 2005-07-06 Wyeth Corp USE OF CCI-779 IN THE TREATMENT OF HEPATIC FIBROSIS
US7482016B2 (en) 2003-03-19 2009-01-27 The J. David Gladstone Institutes Immunogenic compositions comprising HIV-1 acetylated Tat polypeptides
DK1620544T3 (en) 2003-04-17 2019-01-14 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals Inc MODIFIED iRNA AGENTS
JP2007526238A (en) 2003-05-06 2007-09-13 パーデュー・リサーチ・ファウンデーション Lupus therapy targeting macrophages or folate receptors
WO2004101803A2 (en) 2003-05-12 2004-11-25 Wyeth Holdings Corporation Process for producing anticancer agent ll-d45042
CA2528173A1 (en) 2003-07-16 2005-02-03 Wyeth Cci-779 isomer c
PL1658295T3 (en) 2003-08-07 2007-11-30 Wyeth Corp Regioselective synthesis of cci-779
DK1718340T3 (en) 2004-01-30 2008-03-03 Bayer Schering Pharma Ag New effector conjugates, processes for their preparation and their pharmaceutical use
US7612071B2 (en) 2004-03-12 2009-11-03 Syntrix Biosystems, Inc. Compositions and methods employing aminopterin
WO2005111238A2 (en) 2004-04-19 2005-11-24 Archemix Corporation Aptamer-mediated intracellular delivery of therapeutic oligonucleotides
EP1747021B1 (en) 2004-05-19 2015-09-09 E. R. Squibb & Sons, L.L.C. Self-immolative linkers and drug conjugates
WO2005115912A1 (en) 2004-05-25 2005-12-08 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Hydrogen production apparatus and fuel cell system using the same
US8288557B2 (en) 2004-07-23 2012-10-16 Endocyte, Inc. Bivalent linkers and conjugates thereof
EP1791567B1 (en) 2004-08-10 2015-07-29 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals Inc. Chemically modified oligonucleotides
TW200616604A (en) 2004-08-26 2006-06-01 Nicholas Piramal India Ltd Nitric oxide releasing prodrugs containing bio-cleavable linker
US20090004118A1 (en) 2004-10-07 2009-01-01 Shuming Nie Multifunctional Nanoparticle Conjugates And Their Use
US20060222653A1 (en) 2004-11-12 2006-10-05 Xencor, Inc. Antibodies operably linked to selected chemoattractants
US7811572B2 (en) 2005-08-24 2010-10-12 Immunogen, Inc. Process for preparing purified drug conjugates
US20110166319A1 (en) 2005-02-11 2011-07-07 Immunogen, Inc. Process for preparing purified drug conjugates
TW200640493A (en) 2005-02-16 2006-12-01 Insert Therapeutics Inc Cyclodextrin-based polymers for therapeutics delivery
US7312217B2 (en) 2005-03-11 2007-12-25 Syntrix Biosystems, Inc. Aminopterin dosage forms and methods for inflammatory disorders
CN101175757B (en) 2005-03-16 2012-11-14 恩多塞特公司 Synthesis and purification of pteroic acid and conjugates thereof
JP2008537778A (en) 2005-03-30 2008-09-25 パーデュー・リサーチ・ファウンデーション Cancer prognosis by quantification of cellular folate vitamin receptor
BRPI0612529A2 (en) 2005-06-20 2010-11-23 Psma Dev Company Llc antibody-psma drug conjugates
JP5175723B2 (en) 2005-07-05 2013-04-03 パーデュー・リサーチ・ファウンデーション Preparation of compositions for treating monocyte-mediated diseases
BRPI0615354A2 (en) * 2005-08-19 2011-05-17 Endocyte Inc receptor binding drug release conjugate, pharmaceutical composition comprising it, as well as its use
JP2009515508A (en) 2005-08-19 2009-04-16 ネオス テクノロジーズ インコーポレイテッド GlycoPEGylated Factor VII and Factor VIIA
EP1948240A2 (en) 2005-08-19 2008-07-30 Endocyte, Inc. Ligand conjugates of vinca alkaloids, analogs and derivatives
DE102005039651B4 (en) * 2005-08-22 2008-04-03 Airbus Deutschland Gmbh Illumination in the area of aircraft cabins
CA2670355A1 (en) 2005-11-21 2008-04-24 Medivas, Llc Polymer particles for delivery of macromolecules and methods of use
PE20080102A1 (en) 2006-05-25 2008-02-11 Bristol Myers Squibb Co AZIRIDINYL-EPOTILONE CONJUGATES AND PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS INCLUDING THE SAME
US8685752B2 (en) 2006-11-03 2014-04-01 Purdue Research Foundation Ex vivo flow cytometry method and device
US20080176958A1 (en) 2007-01-24 2008-07-24 Insert Therapeutics, Inc. Cyclodextrin-based polymers for therapeutics delivery
US20100104626A1 (en) 2007-02-16 2010-04-29 Endocyte, Inc. Methods and compositions for treating and diagnosing kidney disease
JP2010518135A (en) 2007-02-16 2010-05-27 ケイテーベー ツモルフォルシュングスゲゼルシャフト ミット ベシュレンクテル ハフツング Dual action prodrug
NZ580132A (en) 2007-03-14 2012-11-30 Endocyte Inc Binding ligand linked drug delivery conjugates of tubulysins to vitamins
CA2723671C (en) 2007-05-10 2018-06-19 R & D Biopharmaceuticals Gmbh Tubulysine derivatives
US9877965B2 (en) 2007-06-25 2018-01-30 Endocyte, Inc. Vitamin receptor drug delivery conjugates for treating inflammation
RU2523909C2 (en) 2007-06-25 2014-07-27 Эндосайт, Инк. Conjugates, containing hydrophilic spacers of linkers
US8476451B2 (en) 2007-07-20 2013-07-02 The Regents Of The University Of California Tubulysin D analogues
PT2187965T (en) 2007-08-17 2020-01-17 Purdue Research Foundation Psma binding ligand-linker conjugates and methods for using
EP2209374B1 (en) 2007-10-25 2014-12-03 Endocyte, Inc. Tubulysins and processes for preparing
EP2231194B1 (en) 2007-12-04 2017-02-22 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals Inc. Folate-irna conjugates
NO2842575T3 (en) 2008-03-18 2018-02-24
KR20230133952A (en) 2008-04-30 2023-09-19 이뮤노젠 아이엔씨 Cross-linkers and their uses
WO2009134976A1 (en) 2008-04-30 2009-11-05 Immunogen, Inc Potent conjugates and hydrophilic linkers
US20100040669A1 (en) 2008-08-12 2010-02-18 Higuchi John W Non-Invasive Ocular Delivery of Rapamycin
CN102215844A (en) 2008-09-17 2011-10-12 恩多塞特公司 Folate receptor binding conjugates of antifolates
US20100074863A1 (en) 2008-09-17 2010-03-25 Yat Sun Or Anti-infective pyrrolidine derivatives and analogs
EP2174947A1 (en) 2008-09-25 2010-04-14 Universität des Saarlandes Bioactive pre-tubulysins and use thereof
WO2010045598A2 (en) 2008-10-17 2010-04-22 Purdue Research Foundation Psma binding ligand-linker conjugates and methods for using
US20120022245A1 (en) 2008-10-17 2012-01-26 Purdue Research Foundation Folate targeting of nucleotides
IT1394860B1 (en) 2009-07-22 2012-07-20 Kemotech S R L PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOUNDS
US8394922B2 (en) 2009-08-03 2013-03-12 Medarex, Inc. Antiproliferative compounds, conjugates thereof, methods therefor, and uses thereof
CN102648208B (en) 2009-11-12 2016-04-27 R&D生技药品有限责任公司 Antitubulin
EP2322537A1 (en) 2009-11-12 2011-05-18 R & D Biopharmaceuticals Gmbh Tubulin inhibitors
WO2011069116A1 (en) 2009-12-04 2011-06-09 Endocyte, Inc. Binding ligand linked drug delivery conjugates of tubulysins
CA2785373A1 (en) 2009-12-23 2011-06-30 Endocyte, Inc. Vitamin receptor drug delivery conjugates for treating inflammation
US20120322741A1 (en) 2010-02-25 2012-12-20 Purdue Research Foundation Psma binding ligand-linker conjugates and methods for using
ES2430567T3 (en) 2010-04-15 2013-11-21 Spirogen Sàrl Pyrrolobenzodiazepines and conjugates thereof
EP2409983A1 (en) 2010-07-19 2012-01-25 Leibniz-Institut für Pflanzenbiochemie (IPB) Tubulysin analogues
JP2013535220A (en) 2010-08-06 2013-09-12 エンドサイト，インコーポレイテッド Process for preparing tubulin
WO2012047525A2 (en) 2010-09-27 2012-04-12 Endocyte, Inc. Folate conjugates for treating inflammation of the eye
CA2817223A1 (en) 2010-11-12 2012-05-18 Endocyte, Inc. Methods of treating cancer
US20140243282A1 (en) 2010-12-31 2014-08-28 Satish Reddy Kallam Methods and compositions for designing novel conjugate therapeutics
PL2675479T3 (en) 2011-02-15 2016-09-30 Cytotoxic benzodiazepine derivatives
AU2012236403B2 (en) 2011-03-29 2016-08-04 Immunogen, Inc. Process for manufacturing conjugates of improved homogeneity
KR102351886B1 (en) 2011-03-29 2022-01-17 이뮤노젠 아이엔씨 Preparation of maytansinoid antibody conjugates by a one-step process
WO2012177837A2 (en) 2011-06-21 2012-12-27 Immunogen, Inc. Novel maytansinoid derivatives with peptide linker and conjugates thereof
US20130224228A1 (en) 2011-12-05 2013-08-29 Igenica, Inc. Antibody-Drug Conjugates and Related Compounds, Compositions, and Methods
WO2013126797A1 (en) 2012-02-24 2013-08-29 Purdue Research Foundation Cholecystokinin b receptor targeting for imaging and therapy
EP2822386B1 (en) 2012-02-29 2021-05-05 Purdue Research Foundation Folate receptor alpha binding ligands
CA2807707A1 (en) 2012-02-29 2013-08-29 Christopher P. Leamon Compositions and methods for treating cancer
US20140080175A1 (en) 2012-03-29 2014-03-20 Endocyte, Inc. Processes for preparing tubulysin derivatives and conjugates thereof
WO2013170272A2 (en) 2012-05-11 2013-11-14 Alexander Krantz Site-specific labeling and targeted delivery of proteins for the treatment of cancer
US9801951B2 (en) 2012-05-15 2017-10-31 Concortis Biosystems, Corp. Drug-conjugates, conjugation methods, and uses thereof
LT3210627T (en) 2012-07-12 2023-04-11 Hangzhou Dac Biotech Co., Ltd Conjugates of cell binding molecules with cytotoxic agents
EP2708243A1 (en) 2012-09-17 2014-03-19 OntoChem GmbH Receptor ligand linked cytotoxic molecules
US20140107316A1 (en) 2012-10-16 2014-04-17 Endocyte, Inc. Drug delivery conjugates containing unnatural amino acids and methods for using
AU2013331440A1 (en) 2012-10-16 2015-04-30 Endocyte, Inc. Drug delivery conjugates containing unnatural amino acids and methods for using
KR102499944B1 (en) 2012-11-15 2023-02-14 엔도사이트, 인코포레이티드 Conjugates for treating diseases caused by psma expressing cells
CN105849086B (en) 2012-11-24 2018-07-31 杭州多禧生物科技有限公司 Hydrophily chain junctor and its application on drug molecule and cell-binding molecules conjugation reaction
US20140154702A1 (en) 2012-11-30 2014-06-05 Endocyte, Inc. Methods For Treating Cancer Using Combination Therapies
JP6482471B2 (en) 2012-12-21 2019-03-13 バイオアライアンス コマンディテール フェンノートシャップ Hydrophilic self-destructible linker and conjugate thereof
PL2956173T3 (en) 2013-02-14 2017-09-29 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Tubulysin compounds, methods of making and use
US20140249315A1 (en) 2013-03-01 2014-09-04 Endocyte, Inc. Processes for preparing tubulysins
US9295731B2 (en) 2013-04-01 2016-03-29 Mark Quang Nguyen Cleavable drug conjugates, compositions thereof and methods of use
CN104784699B (en) 2014-01-20 2019-05-03 博瑞生物医药（苏州）股份有限公司 Folate receptor binding ligand-drug conjugates
TW201617081A (en) 2014-09-25 2016-05-16 安德賽特公司 Methods of treating cancer with Tubulysin conjugates
WO2016080626A2 (en) 2014-11-20 2016-05-26 Pharosgen Prodrugs activated by caspase
ES2897706T3 (en) 2015-03-19 2022-03-02 Hangzhou Dac Biotech Co Ltd Novel hydrophilic linkers and ligand-drug conjugates thereof
US10975112B2 (en) 2015-06-16 2021-04-13 Hangzhou Dac Biotech Co., Ltd. Linkers for conjugation of cell-binding molecules

Cited By (14)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US9550734B2 (en) 2004-07-23 2017-01-24 Endocyte, Inc. Bivalent linkers and conjugates thereof
US10647676B2 (en) 2004-07-23 2020-05-12 Endocyte, Inc. Bivalent linkers and conjugates thereof
US9555139B2 (en) 2007-03-14 2017-01-31 Endocyte, Inc. Binding ligand linked drug delivery conjugates of tubulysins
US10500204B2 (en) 2007-06-25 2019-12-10 Endocyte, Inc. Vitamin receptor drug delivery conjugates for treating inflammation
US10738086B2 (en) 2007-06-25 2020-08-11 Endocyte Inc. Conjugates containing hydrophilic spacer linkers
US9877965B2 (en) 2007-06-25 2018-01-30 Endocyte, Inc. Vitamin receptor drug delivery conjugates for treating inflammation
US10765756B2 (en) 2012-02-24 2020-09-08 Purdue Research Foundation Cholecystokinin B receptor targeting for imaging and therapy
US10080805B2 (en) 2012-02-24 2018-09-25 Purdue Research Foundation Cholecystokinin B receptor targeting for imaging and therapy
US11344623B2 (en) 2012-02-24 2022-05-31 Purdue Research Foundation Cholecystokinin B receptor targeting for imaging and therapy
US9505747B2 (en) 2012-03-29 2016-11-29 Endocyte, Inc. Processes for preparing tubulysin derivatives and conjugates thereof
WO2017161144A1 (en) * 2016-03-16 2017-09-21 Endocyte, Inc. Carbonic anhydrase ix inhibitor conjugates and uses thereof
US10857234B2 (en) 2016-03-16 2020-12-08 Endocyte Inc. Carbonic anhydrase IX inhibitor conjugates and uses thereof
US11925696B2 (en) 2016-03-16 2024-03-12 Purdue Research Foundation Carbonic anhydrase IX targeting agents and methods
WO2022241262A3 (en) * 2021-05-14 2023-01-12 Purdue Research Foundation Small molecule-based bi-specific immune cell tethers and their use in the treatment of enveloped virus infection

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
HK1207980A1 (en) 2016-02-19
IL202796A (en) 2015-09-24
RU2010102044A (en) 2011-08-20
US20170151340A1 (en) 2017-06-01
US10738086B2 (en) 2020-08-11
BRPI0812970A2 (en) 2019-09-24
CN104383553A (en) 2015-03-04
CA2690943A1 (en) 2008-12-31
EP3569251A1 (en) 2019-11-20
US9138484B2 (en) 2015-09-22
US20160168183A1 (en) 2016-06-16
IL202796A0 (en) 2011-08-01
CN101784565A (en) 2010-07-21
EP2176293A1 (en) 2010-04-21
EP2176293A4 (en) 2016-03-02
AU2008268432B2 (en) 2015-01-15
WO2009002993A1 (en) 2008-12-31
EP2176293B1 (en) 2019-04-03
US20210024581A1 (en) 2021-01-28
JP5690589B2 (en) 2015-03-25
IL240973A0 (en) 2015-10-29
JP2010531363A (en) 2010-09-24
AU2008268432A1 (en) 2008-12-31
CN101784565B (en) 2014-12-10
ES2732879T3 (en) 2019-11-26
RU2523909C2 (en) 2014-07-27
US20100323973A1 (en) 2010-12-23

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20210024581A1 (en) Conjugates containing hydrophilic spacer linkers
US20170327537A1 (en) Binding ligand linked drug delivery conjugates of tubulysins
US8465724B2 (en) Multi-drug ligand conjugates
EP2382995A2 (en) Ligand conjugates of Vinca alkaloids, analogs and derivatives
AU2013203147A1 (en) Binding ligand linked drug delivery conjugates of tubulysins
AU2016204030A1 (en) Binding ligand linked drug delivery conjugates of tubulysins
AU2013204207A1 (en) Conjugates containing hydrophilic spacer linkers
AU2013204293A1 (en) Multi-drug ligand conjugates

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: DOCKETED NEW CASE - READY FOR EXAMINATION